2010 CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls ...... 7-1 Keys and Locks ...... 1-2 Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4 Climate Control Systems ...... 7-1 Doors ...... 1-17 Controls ...... 4-6 Air Vents ...... 7-6 Vehicle Security...... 1-23 Warning Lights, Gages, and Maintenance ...... 7-6 Exterior Mirrors ...... 1-26 Indicators ...... 4-14 Interior Mirrors ...... 1-27 Information Displays ...... 4-31 Driving and Operating ...... 8-1 Windows ...... 1-28 Vehicle Messages ...... 4-36 Driving Information ...... 8-2 Roof ...... 1-31 Vehicle Personalization ...... 4-51 Starting and Operating ...... 8-17 OnStar® System ...... 4-59 Exhaust ...... 8-25 Seats and Restraints ...... 2-1 Universal Remote System . . . . 4-61 Automatic ...... 8-26 Head Restraints ...... 2-2 ...... 8-30 Front Seats ...... 2-3 Lighting ...... 5-1 Drive Systems ...... 8-32 Rear Seats ...... 2-10 Exterior Lighting ...... 5-1 Brakes ...... 8-33 Safety Belts ...... 2-11 Interior Lighting ...... 5-5 Ride Control Systems ...... 8-37 Airbag System ...... 2-27 Lighting Features ...... 5-6 Cruise Control ...... 8-41 Child Restraints ...... 2-43 Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-44 Infotainment System ...... 6-1 Fuel ...... 8-49 Storage ...... 3-1 Introduction ...... 6-1 Towing...... 8-54 Storage Compartments ...... 3-1 Radio ...... 6-9 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-60 Additional Storage Features . . . 3-2 Audio Players ...... 6-16 Roof Rack System ...... 3-6 Phone ...... 6-37 2010 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care ...... 9-1 Technical Data ...... 11-1 General Information ...... 9-2 Vehicle Identification ...... 11-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 9-4 Vehicle Data ...... 11-2 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-34 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-37 Customer Information ...... 12-1 Electrical System ...... 9-40 Customer Information ...... 12-1 Wheels and Tires ...... 9-58 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-13 Jump Starting ...... 9-103 Vehicle Data Recording Towing...... 9-108 and Privacy...... 12-15 Appearance Care ...... 9-110 Index ...... i-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1 General Information ...... 10-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-3 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 10-7 Maintenance Records ...... 10-11 Introduction iii

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Music recognition technology and Dolby® is manufactured under Emblem, CADILLAC, the CADILLAC related data are provided by license from Dolby® Laboratories. Crest and Wreath, and the name Gracenote®. Gracenote is the Dolby®, MLP Lossless, and the CTS/CTS-V are registered industry standard in music double-D symbol are trademarks trademarks of . recognition technology and of Dolby® Laboratories. This manual describes features that related content delivery. This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific For more information, visit may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are www.gracenote.com. vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the purchase Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. the features found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada, DTS and DTS Digital surround For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General are registered trademarks of substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Digital Theater systems, Inc. Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division Cadillac Motor Car Division wherever it appears in this manual. wherever it appears in this manual. Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 25834994 B Second Printing © 2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved. iv Introduction

Canadian Vehicle Owners Danger, Warnings, and Propriétaires Canadiens Cautions A French language copy of this Warning messages found on vehicle manual can be obtained from your labels and in this manual describe dealer/retailer or from: hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them. A circle with a slash through it is On peut obtenir un exemplaire de a safety symbol which means ce guide en français auprès du Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in “Do Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not concessionnaire ou à l'adresse let this happen.” suivante: serious injury or death. Helm, Incorporated Warning or Caution indicates a Symbols P.O. Box 07130 hazard that could result in injury or death. The vehicle has components and , MI 48207 labels that use symbols instead of 1-800-551-4123 { WARNING text. Symbols are shown along with Numéro de poste 6438 de langue the text describing the operation or française These mean there is something information relating to a specific www.helminc.com that could hurt you or other component, control, message, gage, people. or indicator. Using this Manual M : This symbol is shown when To quickly locate information about Notice: This means there is you need to see your owner manual the vehicle use the Index in the something that could result in for additional instructions or back of the manual. It is an property or vehicle damage. information. This would not be covered by alphabetical list of what is in the * : This symbol is shown when the vehicle's warranty. manual and the page number where you need to see a service manual it can be found. for additional instructions or information. Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Here are some additional symbols Changer that may be found on the vehicle j : LATCH System Child and what they mean. For more Restraints information on the symbol, refer to the index. * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : 9 : Airbag Readiness Light : Oil Pressure } # : Air Conditioning : Power / ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) : Remote Vehicle Start > g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls : Safety Belt Reminders or OnStar® 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor $ : Brake System Warning Light d : Traction Control " : Charging System M : Windshield Washer Fluid I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Exterior Lamps # : Fog Lamps . : Fuel Gage + : Fuses vi Introduction

2 NOTES Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1

Doors Windows Keys, Doors and Trunk () ...... 1-17 Windows ...... 1-28 Windows Liftgate (Wagon) ...... 1-19 Power Windows ...... 1-28 Sun Visors ...... 1-31 Vehicle Security Roof Keys and Locks Vehicle Security ...... 1-23 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-23 Sunroof ...... 1-31 Keys ...... 1-2 Immobilizer ...... 1-24 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation System ...... 1-4 (Key Access) ...... 1-24 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation System Operation (Keyless Access) ...... 1-25 (Key Access) ...... 1-5 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Exterior Mirrors System Operation Convex Mirrors ...... 1-26 (Keyless Access) ...... 1-7 Power Mirrors ...... 1-27 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-12 Folding Mirrors ...... 1-27 Door Locks ...... 1-14 Heated Mirrors ...... 1-27 Central Door Unlocking System ...... 1-15 Interior Mirrors Power Door Locks ...... 1-15 Automatic Dimming Rearview Delayed Locking ...... 1-15 Mirror ...... 1-27 Automatic Door Locks ...... 1-15 Lockout Protection ...... 1-16 Safety Locks ...... 1-16 1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks { WARNING Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless access transmitter is { WARNING dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly Leaving children in a vehicle with injured or even killed. They could the ignition key is dangerous for operate the power windows or many reasons, children or others other controls or even make the could be badly injured or even vehicle move. The windows will killed. They could operate the function with the keyless access power windows or other controls transmitter in the vehicle and they or even make the vehicle move. could be seriously injured or killed The windows will function with the if caught in the path of a closing keys in the ignition and children window. Do not leave the keyless could be seriously injured or killed access transmitter in a vehicle if caught in the path of a closing with children. window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-3

One of the following keys comes with the vehicle.

This key, located inside the keyless This type of transmitter has a thin access transmitter, is used for the button (A) near the bottom of driver door, glove box, and rear seat the keyless access transmitter. This key is used for the driver door, pass-through door. See “Rear Seat To remove the key, press (A) and ignition, and glove box. Pass-Through Door” under Trunk pull the key out. Never pull the key (Sedan) on page 1‑17 for more out without pressing the button. information. 1-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Notice: If you ever lock your keys If there is a decrease in the RKE in the vehicle, you may have to operating range: damage the vehicle to get in. . Check the distance. The Be sure you have spare keys. transmitter may be too far from Contact Roadside Service if you the vehicle. are locked out of the vehicle. . Check the location. Other See Roadside Service on vehicles or objects may be page 12‑6. blocking the signal. Remote Keyless Entry . Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery Replacement” later (RKE) System in this section. Notice: If the transmitter does not See Radio Frequency Statement on . If the transmitter is still not have a button near the base, do page 12‑16 for information working correctly, see your not pull on the chrome base of regarding Part 15 of the Federal dealer/retailer or a qualified the transmitter. This type of Communications Commission (FCC) technician for service. transmitter does not have a key Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry inside. Pulling on the base of this and Science Canada. transmitter could damage it. Changes or modifications to this This vehicle may have the Keyless system by other than an authorized Access System. See Ignition service facility could void Positions (Key Access) on authorization to use this equipment. page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) on page 8‑19 for information on starting the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer if a new key is needed. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-5

Remote Keyless Entry Q (Lock): Press to lock all the V /& (Remote Trunk/Liftgate (RKE) System Operation doors. Release): Press and hold for (Key Access) If enabled through the Driver about one second to unlock the Information Center (DIC), the trunk/liftgate. The automatic The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) parking lamps may flash once to transmission must be in P (Park) or transmitter functions work up to indicate locking has occurred. the manual transmission must be in 20 m (65 feet) away from the Neutral with the parking brake set. The horn may chirp when is vehicle. Q pressed again within five seconds. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic There are other conditions that can See Vehicle Personalization on Alarm): Press and release to affect the performance of the page 4‑51 for additional locate the vehicle. The turn signal transmitter. See Remote Keyless information. lamps flash and the horn sounds Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑4. three times. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door. If K is pressed again Press and hold L for more than within five seconds, all remaining two seconds to activate the panic doors unlock. The interior lamps alarm. The turn signal lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds flash and the horn sounds for or until the ignition is turned on. 30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to If enabled through the DIC, the START or is pressed again. parking lamps flash twice to indicate L unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work. Personalization on page 4‑51.

Do not pull on the chrome base of the transmitter. 1-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

The vehicle comes with two be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters. Each transmitter transmitters no longer work once the will have a number on top of it, new transmitter is programmed. “1” or “2”. These numbers Each vehicle can have up to eight correspond to the driver of the transmitters programmed to it. vehicle. For example, the memory See “Relearn Remote Key” under seat position for driver 1 will be Driver Information Center (DIC) on recalled when using the transmitter page 4‑31. labeled “1”, if enabled through the DIC. See “Memory Seat” under Battery Replacement Power Seat Adjustment on Replace the battery if the Replace page 2‑4 and Vehicle Battery In Remote Key message Personalization on page 4‑51 displays in the DIC. See “Replace To replace the battery: for more information. Battery In Remote Key” under Key 1. Separate the transmitter with a and Lock Messages on page 4‑42 Programming Transmitters for additional information. flat, thin object inserted into to the Vehicle the notch, located above the Notice: When replacing the metal base. Only RKE transmitters programmed battery, do not touch any of the to the vehicle will work. If a circuitry on the transmitter. 2. Remove the old battery. Do not transmitter is lost or stolen, a Static from your body could use a metal object. replacement can be purchased damage the transmitter. 3. Insert the new battery, positive and programmed through your side facing up. Replace with a dealer/retailer. When the CR2032 or equivalent battery. replacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle, all 4. Snap the transmitter back remaining transmitters must also together. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-7

Remote Keyless Entry To access the rear doors first, pull To customize whether the doors (RKE) System Operation the rear door handle once to unlock automatically lock when you exit the all doors and a second time to open vehicle, see “Keyless Locking” (Keyless Access) the door. under Vehicle Personalization on The Keyless Access System Entering any door other than the page 4‑51. transmitter functions will work up to driver door will always cause all of Keyless Trunk Opening 60 m (195 feet) away from the the doors to unlock. This is not vehicle. customizable. Press the trunk release button located on the trunk lid above the The Keyless Access System lets To customize which doors unlock license plate to open the trunk if the you lock and unlock the doors and when the driver's door is opened, keyless access transmitter is within access the trunk without removing see “Keyless Unlock” under Vehicle range. the remote transmitter from your Personalization on page 4‑51. pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. There are other conditions which The keyless access transmitter must Keyless Locking can affect the performance of the be within 1 m (3 feet) of the door or The doors lock after several transmitter. See Remote Keyless trunk being opened. seconds if all doors are closed and Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑4. at least one keyless access Keyless Unlocking transmitter has been removed from With the keyless access transmitter the interior of the vehicle. It does not within 1 m (3 feet), approach the matter how far away that one front door and pull the handle to transmitter is from the vehicle. unlock and open the door. If the transmitter is recognized, the door will unlock and open. 1-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock / (Remote Start): Press to only the driver door. The turn signal operate the remote start feature. indicators flash twice. See Remote Vehicle Start on K page 1‑12 for additional Press twice within five seconds information. to unlock all the doors. The interior & lamps may come on. V / (Remote Trunk/Liftgate Release): Press and hold for To program the vehicle so the turn about one second to unlock the signal indicators do not flash and trunk/liftgate. The automatic the fog lamps and reverse lamps transmission must be in P (Park) or remain on steady for about the manual transmission must be in 20 seconds when the keyless Neutral with the parking brake set. With Remote Start Shown, access transmitter is used to unlock Without Similar the vehicle, see “Remote Door L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Unlock Feedback under Vehicle Alarm): Press and release to Q (Lock): Press once to lock the ” Personalization on page 4‑51. locate the vehicle. The horn sounds doors. The turn signal indicators three times and the turn signal flash. When Q is pressed twice, the For vehicles with the memory lamps flash three times. turn signal indicators flash twice, feature, press K on the keyless and the horn sounds once to access transmitter to program and Press and hold L for confirm locking. recall the memory settings. See three seconds to sound the Memory Seat under Power Seat panic alarm. The horn sounds To program the vehicle so the turn “ ” Adjustment on page 2 4 for more and the turn signal lamps flash signal indicators do not flash and ‑ information. for 30 seconds. Press and the horn does not sound when release L again to stop pressing Q on the keyless access the alarm. transmitter, see “Remote Door Lock Feedback” under Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑51. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-9

The vehicle comes with two Programming with a Recognized transmitters. Each transmitter will Transmitter have a number on top of it, A new transmitter can be “1” or “2”. These numbers programmed to the vehicle when correspond to the driver of the there is one recognized transmitter. vehicle. For example, the memory For vehicles sold in Canada, two seat position for driver 1 will be recognized transmitters are required recalled when using the transmitter to program a new transmitter. labeled “1”, if enabled through the DIC. See “Memory Seat” under 1. The vehicle must be off. Power Seat Adjustment on 2. Place the recognized page 2‑4 and Vehicle transmitter(s) in the cupholder. Personalization on page 4‑51 for Have the new transmitter 6. Place the new transmitter into more information. available with you. the transmitter pocket with the Programming Transmitters 3. Insert the vehicle key into the buttons facing the front of the to the Vehicle key lock located on the vehicle. The transmitter pocket outside of the driver door. is inside the center console Only keyless access transmitters storage area located between programmed to the vehicle will work. 4. Turn the key to the unlock the driver and front passenger If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a position five times within seats. replacement can be purchased five seconds. 7. A beep sounds once the and programmed through your 5. The Driver Information Center transmitter is programmed. dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be (DIC) displays Ready To Learn The DIC displays Ready To reprogrammed so that lost or Electronic Key #2, 3 or 4. Learn Electronic Key #3 or 4, stolen transmitters no longer work. or Maximum # Electronic Keys Each vehicle can have up to Learned. four transmitters matched to it. 1-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

8. Press the ignition control knob to The procedure requires three, 3. Insert the vehicle key into the exit programming mode. ten minute cycles to complete the key lock cylinder located on the 9. Remove the transmitter from matching process. driver door. the transmitter pocket and 1. The vehicle must be off. 4. Turn the key to the unlock press K on the keyless access position five times within transmitter two times. five seconds. 10. To program additional 5. The DIC displays Press Start transmitters, repeat Steps 6 Control To Learn Keys. through 9. 6. Press the ignition switch in. Programming without a 7. The DIC reads Learn Delay Recognized Transmitter Active Wait XX Min and counts United States owners are permitted down to zero. to program a new transmitter to 8. The DIC displays Press Start their vehicle when a recognized Control To Learn Keys again. transmitter is not available. The 9. Press the ignition switch in Canadian immobilizer standard again. requires that Canadian owners 2. Place the new transmitter into see their dealer/retailer for the transmitter pocket with the 10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9. programming new transmitters buttons facing the front of the vehicle. The transmitter pocket 11. The DIC reads Learn Delay when two recognized transmitters Active Wait XX Min and counts are not available. is inside the center console storage area located between down to zero. the driver and front passenger 12. A beep sounds and the seats. DIC reads Ready To Learn Electronic Key # X. All previously known transmitter programming has been erased. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-11

13. A beep sounds once Starting the Vehicle with a Low Battery Replacement programming is complete. Transmitter Battery Notice: When replacing the The DIC displays Ready battery, do not touch any of the To Learn Electronic Key # 2. Replace the battery if the Replace Battery In Remote Key message circuitry on the transmitter. To program additional displays in the DIC. See “Replace Static from your body could transmitters, insert each Battery In Remote Key” under Key damage the transmitter. transmitter in the pocket until and Lock Messages on page 4‑42 a beep is heard and the for additional information. DIC advances to the next electronic key number. Up to If the transmitter battery is weak, the four transmitters can be DIC may display Electronic Key Not programmed. The DIC displays Detected when you try to start the Maximum # Electronic Keys vehicle. To start the vehicle, place Learned and exits the the transmitter in the center console programming mode. storage area transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to the front of the Press the ignition control knob vehicle. Then, with the vehicle in to complete the process. P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the 14. Press the ignition control knob brake pedal and the ignition control knob. See Starting the Engine on if programming is complete. 1. Separate the transmitter with a page 8 20, for additional ‑ flat, thin object inserted into the 15. Press K on each newly information about the vehicle's slot on the side or back of the programmed transmitter to electronic keyless ignition with push transmitter. complete the process. start. Replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible. 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. 1-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

3. Insert the new battery, positive after the ignition is turned to Starting the Engine Using side facing down. Replace with a ON/RUN. See Dual Automatic Remote Start CR2032 or equivalent battery. Climate Control System on To start the engine using the remote 4. Snap the transmitter back page 7‑1. start feature: together. Laws in some local communities 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle may restrict the use of remote Remote Vehicle Start starters. For example, some laws and press Q on the transmitter. may require a person using remote This vehicle may have a remote 2. Press and hold / for at least start to have the vehicle in view four seconds or until the starting feature that allows you to when doing so. Check local start the engine from outside the vehicle's turn signal lamps flash. regulations for any requirements on The parking lamps will turn on vehicle. remote starting of vehicles. / and remain on as long as the (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle is low on fuel, engine is running. The vehicle's This button will be on the RKE do not use the remote start feature. doors will be locked. transmitter if you have remote start. The vehicle may run out of fuel. 3. After entering the vehicle during The automatic climate control will If your vehicle has the remote start a remote start, press the brake begin to heat or cool your vehicle feature, the RKE transmitter pedal and turn the ignition to during remote start depending on functions will have an increased ON/RUN to drive the vehicle. the temperature inside and outside range of operation. However, the of the vehicle. The windshield After a remote start, the engine range may be less while the vehicle will automatically shut off after defroster and/or rear window is running. defogger turn on if it is cold outside. 10 minutes unless a time If the vehicle has heated seats, There are other conditions which extension has been done or the they may also be turned on during can affect the performance of the ignition has been turned to remote start to warm up the seat in transmitter, see Remote Keyless ON/RUN. cold weather. Normal operation of Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑4 the climate control system returns for additional information. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-13

Extending Engine Run Time A maximum of two remote starts or Conditions in Which Remote Start To extend the engine run time by remote start attempts are allowed Will Not Work 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 and 2 between ignition cycles. The remote vehicle start feature will while the engine is still running. After the vehicle's engine has been not operate if any of the following The engine run time can only be started two times using the remote occur: extended if it is the first remote start start button, the ignition must be . The ignition is in any position since the vehicle has been driven. turned on and then back off before other than LOCK/OFF. Remote start can be extended the remote start procedure can be one time. used again. . A keyless access transmitter is inside the vehicle. If the remote start procedure is used Shutting the Engine Off After a again before the first 10 minute Remote Start . The vehicle's hood is not closed. time frame has ended, the first To manually shut off the engine . The hazard warning flashers 10 minutes will immediately expire are on. and the second 10 minute time after a remote start, do any of the frame will start. following: . There is an emission control system malfunction. For example, if the lock button and . Press / until the parking lamps then the remote start buttons are turn off. . The engine coolant temperature is too high. pressed again after the vehicle has . Turn on the hazard warning been running for five minutes, flashers. . The oil pressure is low. 10 minutes are added, allowing . the engine to run for a total of . Turn the ignition switch on and Two remote vehicle starts 15 minutes. then off. have already been used. The maximum number of remote starts or remote start attempts between ignition cycles with the key is two. 1-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) WARNING (Continued) System Operation (Keyless Access) on page 1‑7 for more information. { WARNING . Young children who get into On vehicles with the Remote unlocked vehicles may be Unlocked doors can be Keyless Access system, the door dangerous. unable to get out. A child can unlocks by pulling the door handle be overcome by extreme heat when you have the transmitter with . Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent you. See Remote Keyless Entry children, can easily open the injuries or even death from (RKE) System Operation (Key doors and fall out of a moving heat . Always lock the Access) on page 1 5 or Remote vehicle. When a door is ‑ vehicle whenever leaving it. Keyless Entry (RKE) System locked, the handle will not Operation (Keyless Access) on open it. The chance of being . Outsiders can easily enter page 1 7 for more information. thrown out of the vehicle in through an unlocked door ‑ a crash is increased if the when you slow down or stop If the windows are down and the doors are not locked. So, all your vehicle. Locking your doors are locked, do not reach in to passengers should wear doors can help prevent this manually unlock the vehicle safety belts properly and the from happening. because you will set off the alarm. doors should be locked From the inside, press the power whenever the vehicle is There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle. door lock switch located on the front driven. door. See Power Door Locks on (Continued) From the outside, use the key, page 1‑15. or press the lock or unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Push down or pull up on the manual transmitter. See Remote Keyless lock knob, located at the top of the Entry (RKE) System Operation door near the window, for the rear (Key Access) on page 1‑5 or doors. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-15

Central Door Unlocking Delayed Locking the shift lever is moved out of P (Park). The doors will System With this feature, you can delay the automatically unlock when the The vehicle has a central door actual locking of the doors. vehicle is stopped and the shift unlocking feature. When unlocking When the power door lock switch is lever is moved into P (Park). the driver door, the other doors can pressed when the key is not in the If the vehicle has a manual be unlocked by holding the key ignition and the driver door is transmission, the vehicle is in the turned position for a opened, a chime will sound three programmed so that the doors will few seconds or by quickly turning times indicating that delayed locking lock automatically after the vehicle the key twice in the lock cylinder. is active. speed reaches 8 km (5 mph). The When all the doors are closed, the doors will automatically unlock when Power Door Locks doors will lock automatically after the ignition is turned off and the key On vehicles with power door locks, five seconds. If a door is reopened is removed from the ignition. the switches are located on the front before five seconds have elapsed, If someone needs to exit the vehicle doors. the five second timer will reset itself once the doors are locked, have once all the doors are closed again. " (Unlock): Press to unlock the that person use the manual lever or doors. You can press the door lock switch power door lock switch. When the again or the lock button on the RKE door is closed again, it will not lock (Lock): Remove the key from Q transmitter to override this feature automatically. Use the manual lever the ignition and press to lock the and lock the doors immediately. or the power door lock switch to lock doors. the door. Automatic Door Locks The power door locks can be If the vehicle has an automatic programmed through prompts transmission, the vehicle is displayed on the Driver Information programmed so that the doors will Center (DIC). For more information lock automatically when all doors on programming, see Vehicle are closed, the ignition is on, and Personalization on page 4‑51. 1-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Lockout Protection Safety Locks To set the locks: If the power door lock switch is The vehicle has rear door security 1. Insert the key into the security pressed when the key is in the locks. These prevent passengers lock slot and turn it so the slot is ignition and a door is open, all the from opening the rear doors from in the horizontal position. doors will lock and only the driver the inside. 2. Close the door. door will unlock. If the doors are When you want to open a rear door closed, they can be locked by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) when the security lock is on: transmitter. Be sure to remove the 1. Unlock the door using the key from the ignition when locking Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or the vehicle. Keyless Access System This feature can be overridden by transmitter, if the vehicle has pressing the lock button on the RKE one, the power door lock switch, or the rear door manual lock. transmitter or by pressing the power lock switch a second time. 2. Open the door from the outside. On vehicles with a Keyless Access To cancel the rear door System, the system can be security lock: Lock Label shown programmed to alert you when 1. Unlock the door and open it from all the doors are closed and a The rear door security locks are the outside. transmitter has been left inside located on the inside edge of each 2. Insert the key into the security of the vehicle. See Vehicle rear door. The rear doors must be lock slot and turn it so the slot is Personalization on page 4‑51 for open to access them. The label in the vertical position. more information. showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-17

Trunk Lock Release Doors WARNING (Continued) Trunk (Sedan) . Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that { WARNING brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate vehicle if it is driven with the Control System in the Index. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with . If the vehicle is equipped with any objects that pass through the a power liftgate, disable the seal between the body and the power liftgate function. trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine For more information about exhaust contains Carbon carbon monoxide, see Engine Monoxide (CO) which cannot be The remote trunk release button is Exhaust on page 8‑25. seen or smelled. It can cause located on the lower portion of the unconsciousness and even death. driver door. If the vehicle must be driven with To use the remote trunk release, the the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for a vehicle with an . Close all of the windows. . The shift . Fully open the air outlets on lever must be in N (Neutral), with the or under the instrument parking brake set for a vehicle with panel. a manual transmission. (Continued) 1-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Press the button to open the trunk. On vehicles with a rear seat Close the trunk by pulling on the You can also press the button with pass-through door: handle. Do not use the handle as a the trunk symbol on the Remote 1. Fold the rear armrest down and tie-down. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open the pass-through door. open the trunk. Rear-Seat Pass Through See “Rear-Seat Pass Through” With the Keyless Access System, following for more information. If the vehicle has the rear seat-pass through door, the trunk can be when you have the transmitter, the 2. Reach upward through the trunk can be opened by the trunk accessed through the rear seat. opening to locate the emergency This is useful when transporting release button located on the rear of trunk release handle. See the trunk above the license plate. long items. “Emergency Trunk Release The vehicle must be in P (Park) and Handle” for more information. To open the door, pull down the rear the valet mode turned off. seat armrest. Then pull the lever all 3. Pull forward on the trunk release the way down to release the door. If the vehicle is locked, the keyless handle to open the trunk lid. access transmitter must be within To close the door, push it up and 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk opening On vehicles with a split folding back into place. Then try to open for it to be recognized and allow the rear seat: the door without pulling up on the trunk to open. 1. Fold down the rear seatback. lever to make sure it is locked into If the vehicle is ever without power, See Rear Seats on page 2‑10 place. the trunk area can still be accessed for more information. by using one of the following 2. Reach upward through the procedures. opening to locate the trunk release handle. 3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open the trunk lid. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-19

Emergency Trunk Release There is a glow-in-the-dark Handle (Sedan Only) emergency trunk release handle WARNING (Continued) located on the back wall of the trunk. This handle will glow following If the vehicle must be driven with exposure to light. Pull the release the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: handle toward the front of the . Close all of the windows. vehicle to open the trunk from the . Fully open the air outlets on inside. or under the instrument Liftgate (Wagon) panel. . Adjust the Climate Control Power Liftgate Operation system to a setting that brings in only outside air and { WARNING set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Notice: Do not use the Exhaust gases can enter the Control System in the Index. emergency trunk release handle vehicle if it is driven with the . If the vehicle is equipped with as a tie-down or anchor point liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with a power liftgate, disable the when securing items in the trunk any objects that pass through the power liftgate function. as it could damage the handle. seal between the body and the The emergency trunk release trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine For more information about handle is only intended to aid a exhaust contains Carbon carbon monoxide, see Engine person trapped in a latched trunk, Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Exhaust on page 8‑25. enabling them to open the trunk seen or smelled. It can cause from the inside. unconsciousness and even death. (Continued) 1-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

The switch is located on the driver’s Use this setting to prevent the door. The vehicle must be in liftgate from opening into overhead P (Park) to use the power feature. obstructions such as a garage door The taillamps flash when the power or roof mounted cargo during power liftgate moves. operation. The liftgate can still be opened fully manually. { WARNING OFF: The liftgate only operates manually in this position. You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power Manual operation of a liftgate that liftgate. Make sure there is no one also has power operation requires in the way of the liftgate as it is more effort than with a standard manual liftgate. opening and closing. The power liftgate has three modes of operation. Mode selection is In either the MAX or the ¾ mode, Notice: If you open the liftgate controlled by the interior mode the liftgate can be power opened without checking for overhead switch located on the driver door. and closed by: obstructions such as a garage Choose the power liftgate mode by . Press and hold the power liftgate door, you could damage the turning the dial on the switch until button & on the Remote liftgate or the liftgate glass. the indicator lines up with the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Always check to make sure the desired position. until the liftgate starts moving. area above and behind the liftgate See Remote Keyless Entry is clear before opening it. The three modes are: (RKE) System Operation MAX: The liftgate power opens to (Key Access) on page 1‑5 or the full open height. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 3/4: The liftgate power opens to a System Operation (Keyless reduced open height that can be set Access) on page 1‑7. by the vehicle operator in a range of approximately ¾ open to full open. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-21

. Press the power liftgate button Pressing any button that operates vehicle. Always make sure the on the center of the mode the power liftgate, or the touchpad power liftgate is closed and latched switch, located on the switch while the liftgate is moving, before you drive away. driver’s door. stops it. Pressing the button or RKE If the liftgate is powered open and . Press the touchpad switch on switch again reverses the direction. the liftgate support struts have lost the liftgate outside handle to There is a minimum that the power pressure, the turn signals will flash open the liftgate. liftgate must already be open for the and a chime will sound. The liftgate system to hold it open. If movement will stay open temporarily, and then is stopped below that minimum the slowly close. See your dealer/ liftgate closes. retailer for service before using the Do not force the liftgate open or liftgate. closed during a power cycle. Obstacle Detection Features The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme If the liftgate encounters an obstacle temperatures or low battery during a power open or close cycle, conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate a warning chime will sound and the can still be operated manually. liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open If you shift the transmission out of position. After removing the P (Park) while the power function is obstruction, the power liftgate . Press and release the power in progress, the liftgate power operation can be used again. liftgate button on the liftgate function will continue to completion. If the liftgate encounters multiple adjacent to the latch to close If you shift the transmission out of obstacles on the same power cycle, the liftgate. P (Park) and accelerate before the the power function will deactivate. power liftgate latch is closed, the After removing the obstructions, the liftgate may reverse to the open liftgate will resume normal power position. Cargo could fall out of the operation. 1-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

The vehicle has pinch sensors 3. Press and hold the button on the a vehicle equipped with a power located on the side edges of the liftgate adjacent to the latch until liftgate will be higher than a liftgate. If an object is caught the turn signals flash and a beep standard non-power liftgate. between the liftgate and the body sounds to indicate that the new To open the liftgate, press the and presses against this sensor, the setting is recorded. touchpad on the handle on the liftgate will reverse direction and When power opened with the outside of the liftgate, and lift the open fully. The liftgate will remain ¾ mode selected, the liftgate gate open. To close the liftgate, use open until it is activated again or stops at the new set position. the pull cup to lower the liftgate and closed manually. If an audible and visual response is close. With the power liftgate Setting the Power Liftgate not received when setting the disabled the liftgate electric latch will Intermediate Mode intermediate stop position, the still power latch once contact is made with the striker. Always close To change the liftgate stop position: liftgate height is below the ¾ open height minimum, approximately the liftgate before driving. 1. Turn the liftgate switch to either 5 feet at the edge of the liftgate. If the RKE button is pressed while the MAX, or the ¾ mode position power operation is disabled, the turn and power open the liftgate. Manual Operation of Power signals will flash, and the liftgate will 2. Stop the liftgate movement at Liftgate not move. the desired height by pressing To change the liftgate to manual The liftgate has an electric latch. any button that operates the operation, turn the mode switch If the battery is disconnected or has power lift gate, or the touchpad to OFF. low voltage, the liftgate will not switch. Manually adjust the With the power liftgate disabled open. The liftgate will resume liftgate position if required. and all of the doors unlocked, the operation when the battery is liftgate can be manually opened reconnected and charged. and closed. Note: Manual efforts of Keys, Doors and Windows 1-23

Vehicle Security Arming the System The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with To arm the system, Vehicle theft is big business, the vehicle's key or the manual door especially in some cities. This 1. Open the door. lock. It activates only if the power vehicle has theft-deterrent features, 2. Lock the door with the door lock switch is used while the however, they do not make it transmitter. The security light door is open or with the transmitter. impossible to steal. should come on and stay on. You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the Anti-Theft Alarm System 3. Close all doors. The security correct ignition key if the alarm has light should go off after about been set off. This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm 30 seconds. The alarm is not system. armed until the security light To avoid setting off the alarm by goes off. accident: . If a locked door or trunk is opened Lock the vehicle with the door without using the key in the driver's key after the doors are closed. door key cylinder or the transmitter, . Always unlock a door with the a ten second pre-alarm will occur. transmitter. Unlocking a door any The horn will chirp and the lights will other way will set off the alarm. flash. If the key is not placed in the The security light, located in the If you set off the alarm by accident, ignition and turned to START or the instrument panel cluster, comes on turn off the alarm by pressing the door is not unlocked by pressing the when the system is arming. unlock button on the transmitter. unlock button on the transmitter The alarm will not stop if you try to during the ten second pre-alarm, unlock a door any other way. the alarm will go off. Your vehicle's headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds, then will turn off to save the battery power. 1-24 Keys, Doors and Windows

How to Detect a Tamper Immobilizer Operation Condition (Key Access) If K is pressed and the horn This vehicle has a passive sounds, an attempted break-in has theft-deterrent system. occurred while the system was armed. The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed. The security light, located in the If the alarm has been activated, the instrument panel cluster, comes on Theft Attempted message will The vehicle is automatically if there is a problem with arming or appear on the DIC. See Key and immobilized when the key is disarming the theft-deterrent removed from the ignition. Lock Messages on page 4‑42 for system. additional information. The system is automatically When trying to start the vehicle, the disarmed when the vehicle is security light comes on briefly when Immobilizer started with the correct key. The key the ignition is turned on. uses a transponder that matches an See Radio Frequency Statement on immobilizer control unit in the If the engine does not start and the page 12‑16 for information vehicle and automatically disarms security light stays on there is a regarding Part 15 of the Federal the system. Only the correct key problem with the system. Turn the Communications Commission (FCC) starts the vehicle. The vehicle may ignition off and try again. Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry not start if the key is damaged. If the engine still does not start, and and Science Canada. the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. If the engine still does not start and the light continues to stay on try another key. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-25

If the engine still does not start with 3. After the engine has started, Immobilizer Operation the other key, the vehicle needs turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and service. If the vehicle does start, the remove the key. (Keyless Access) first key may be damaged. See your 4. Insert the key to be programmed This vehicle has a passive dealer/retailer who can service the and turn it to ON/RUN within theft-deterrent system. theft-deterrent system and have a five seconds of the ignition being The system does not have to be new key made. turned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3. manually armed or disarmed. It is possible for the theft-deterrent 5. The security light will turn off The vehicle is automatically system decoder to learn the once the key has been immobilized when the ignition transponder value of a new or programmed. It may not be control knob is turned to LOCK/OFF. replacement key. Up to 10 keys can apparent that the security light The immobilization system is be programmed for the vehicle. went on due to how quickly the disarmed when the ignition control The following procedure is for key is programmed. programming additional keys only. knob is pushed in and a valid 6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 transmitter is found in the vehicle. To program a new key do the if additional keys are to be following: programmed. 1. Verify that the new key has 1 Do not leave the key or device that stamped on it. disarms or deactivates the theft 2. Insert the current driver's key in deterrent system in the vehicle. the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start see The security light, located in the your dealer/retailer for service. instrument panel cluster, comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system. 1-26 Keys, Doors and Windows

The system has one or more If the ignition control knob still does Exterior Mirrors keyless access transmitters that are not rotate with the other transmitter, matched to an immobilizer control your vehicle needs service. If the unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly ignition control knob does rotate, Convex Mirrors matched keyless access transmitter the first transmitter may be faulty. will start the vehicle. If the keyless See your dealer/retailer who can { CAUTION access transmitter is ever damaged, service the theft-deterrent system you may not be able to start your and have a new keyless access A convex mirror can make things, vehicle. transmitter programmed to the like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you When trying to start the vehicle, the vehicle. cut too sharply into the right lane, security light comes on briefly when It is possible for the immobilizer the ignition is turned on. system to learn new or replacement you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or If the engine does not start and the keyless access transmitters. Up to 4 keyless access transmitters can glance over your shoulder before security light stays on there is a changing lanes. problem with the system. Turn the be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional transmitters, ignition control knob off and try The passenger side mirror is convex again. see “Matching transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” for Keyless Access under shaped. A convex mirror's surface is If the ignition control knob does not Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) curved so more can be seen from rotate, and the keyless access System Operation (Key Access) on the driver seat. transmitter appears to be page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry undamaged, try another keyless (RKE) System Operation (Keyless access transmitter. Or, you may try Access) on page 1‑7. placing the transmitter in the transmitter pocket located in the Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft center console. See “Electronic Key deterrent system in the vehicle. Not Detected” under Key and Lock Messages on page 4‑42. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-27

Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so Interior Mirrors that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen. Automatic Dimming 4. Press either } or | again to Rearview Mirror deselect the mirror. The vehicle has an automatic Folding Mirrors dimming inside rearview mirror with OnStar® controls, located at the Manual bottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more information Vehicles with manual fold mirrors on the system and how to subscribe are folded inward toward the vehicle to OnStar. See OnStar System for to prevent damage when going more information about the services through an automatic car wash. OnStar provides. Push the mirror outward, to return it Controls for the outside power to the original position. O (On/Off): Press to turn the mirrors are located on the dimming feature on or off. driver door. Heated Mirrors If the vehicle has a rear vision To adjust each mirrors: = (Rear Window Defogger): camera (RVC). See Rear Vision 1. Press } or | to select the Press to heat the mirrors. Camera (RVC) on page 8‑46 for more information. driver or passenger side mirror. See “Rear Window Defogger” 2. Press one of the four arrows under Climate Control for more located on the control pad to information. move the mirror to the desired direction. 1-28 Keys, Doors and Windows

Automatic Dimming Mirror Windows Operation Automatic dimming reduces the { WARNING glare of headlamps from behind you. The dimming feature comes on Leaving children, helpless adults, and the indicator light illuminates or pets in a vehicle with the each time the vehicle is started. windows closed is dangerous. Cleaning the Mirror They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer Do not spray glass cleaner directly permanent injuries or even death on the mirror. Use a soft towel from heat stroke. Never leave a dampened with water. child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with Power Windows the windows closed in warm or hot weather. { WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or (Continued) Keys, Doors and Windows 1-29

In addition, each door has a switch Express-Down/Up Windows WARNING (Continued) for its own window. The front power Windows with the express feature window switch operates with two allow the windows to be raised and killed if caught in the path of a positions for both up and down lowered all the way without holding closing window. Do not leave movement and the rear power the switch. keys in a vehicle with children. window switch operates with one When there are children in the position for up and two positions for Press or pull the switch fully and rear seat use the window lockout down movement. Press the switch release it to activate the express button to prevent unintentional to the first position to lower the feature. operation of the windows. window to the desired level. Pull the The express mode can be canceled switch up to raise the window. at any time by briefly pressing or The vehicle has Retained pulling the switch. Accessory Power (RAP) that allows you to use the power windows once Express Window Anti-Pinch the ignition has been turned off. Feature For more information, see Retained If any object is in the path of the Accessory Power (RAP) on window when the express-up is page 8‑19. active, the window will stop at the obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will return Driver Side Shown to normal operation once the The power window switches are obstruction or condition is removed. located on the driver door. 1-30 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express Window Anti-Pinch Programming the Power The window is now reprogrammed. Override Windows Repeat the process for the other windows. If the battery on the vehicle has { WARNING been recharged, disconnected, Window Lockout or is not working, you will need to o (Window Lockout): The rear If express override is activated, reprogram each front power window window lockout button is located on the window will not reverse for the express-up feature to work. the driver door near the window automatically. You or others could Before reprogramming, replace or switches. be injured and the window could recharge the vehicle's battery. be damaged. Before you use Press the right side of the button to To program each front window, express override, make sure that disable the rear window controls. follow these steps: all people and obstructions are The light on the button will clear of the window path. 1. With the ignition in ACC/ illuminate, indicating the feature is in ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, use. The rear windows still can be In an emergency, the anti-pinch or when Retained Accessory raised or lowered using the driver feature can be overridden in a Power (RAP) is active, close window switches when the lockout supervised mode. Hold the window all doors. feature is active. switch all the way up to the second 2. Press and hold the power To restore power to the rear position. The window will rise for as window switch until the window windows, press the button again. long as the switch is held. Once the is fully open. The light on the button will go out. switch is released, the express mode is re-activated. 3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed. In this mode, the window can still close on an object in its path. Use 4. Continue holding the switch up care when using the override mode. for approximately two seconds after the window is completely closed. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-31

Sun Visors Roof Press and hold the rear of the switch to open the sunshade. Swing down the visor to block out Press and hold the front of the glare. It can also be detached from Sunroof switch to close the sunshade. the center mount and moved to If the vehicle has a power sunroof it Express-Open: To open the the side to block glare from that will only operate when the ignition is direction. sunshade, fully press and release turned on, or in ACC/ACCESSORY, the rear of the driver side switch. The driver visor may also have or when Retained Accessory Power The sunshade will automatically buttons for a built-in garage door (RAP) is active. See Retained open. To stop the sunshade opener. See Universal Remote Accessory Power (RAP) on partway, press the switch a System on page 4‑61 for more page 8‑19. second time. information. The sunroof switches are located on Express-Close: To close the Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror the overhead console. sunshade, fully press and release Pull the visor down and lift the cover the front of the driver side switch. to access the mirror. A light comes The sunshade will automatically on when the cover is lifted and goes close. To stop the sunshade out when it is closed. partway, press the switch a second time. The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof, but can also be opened manually.

The driver side switch operates the sunshade. 1-32 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express-Close: To close the Anti-Pinch Feature sunroof, fully press and release the If an object is in the path of the front of the driver's side switch. sunroof/sunshade when it is The sunroof will automatically close. closing, the anti-pinch feature will To stop the sunroof partway, press detect the object and stop the the switch a second time. sunroof/sunshade from closing Comfort Stop Feature: The at the point of the obstruction. sunroof has a comfort stop feature The sunroof/sunshade will then which stops the sunroof from return to the full-open position. opening to the full-open position. To close the sunroof/sunshade, From the comfort stop position, see “Express-Close” earlier in this press the rear of the passenger side section. The passenger side switch operates switch a second time to open the the sunroof. sunroof to the full-open position. Express-Open: To open the Vent Feature: Press and hold the sunroof, fully press and release the front of the passenger side switch to rear of the passenger side switch. vent the sunroof. The sunshade will The sunroof will automatically open. automatically open approximately To stop the sunroof partway, press fifteen inches. Press and hold the the switch a second time. rear of the passenger side switch to close the sunroof vent. Seats and Restraints 2-1

Safety Belt Extender ...... 2-25 Child Restraints Seats and Safety System Check ...... 2-25 Older Children ...... 2-43 Restraints Safety Belt Care ...... 2-26 Infants and Young Replacing Safety Belt System Children ...... 2-45 Parts After a Crash ...... 2-26 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-47 Head Restraints Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-49 Airbag System Lower Anchors and Tethers Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Airbag System ...... 2-27 Active Head Restraints ...... 2-3 for Children (LATCH Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-29 System) ...... 2-51 Front Seats When Should an Airbag Replacing LATCH System Seat Adjustment ...... 2-3 Inflate? ...... 2-31 Parts After a Crash ...... 2-57 Power Seat Adjustment ...... 2-4 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Lumbar Adjustment ...... 2-6 Inflate? ...... 2-32 (Rear Seat) ...... 2-57 Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 2-7 How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-7 Restrain? ...... 2-33 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 2-59 Heated and Ventilated Front What Will You See After an Seats ...... 2-9 Airbag Inflates? ...... 2-33 Passenger Sensing Rear Seats System ...... 2-35 Rear Seats ...... 2-10 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 2-40 Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the Safety Belts ...... 2-11 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-40 How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag System Check ...... 2-42 Properly ...... 2-15 Replacing Airbag System Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-20 Parts After a Crash ...... 2-42 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 2-25 2-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. The vehicle's rear seats have head restraints in the outboard seating positions, but they are not adjustable.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are not Adjust the head restraint so that the Pull the head restraint up to raise it. installed and adjusted properly, top of the restraint is at the same To lower the head restraint, press there is a greater chance that height as the top of the occupant's the button, located on the top of the occupants will suffer a neck/ head. This position reduces the seatback, and push the spinal injury in a crash. Do not chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint down. drive until the head restraints for Push down on the head restraint all occupants are installed and after the button is released to make adjusted properly. sure that it is locked in place. The vehicle's head restraints are not designed to be removed. Seats and Restraints 2-3

Active Head Restraints Front Seats To move a manual seat forward or rearward: Active Head Restraint System Seat Adjustment The vehicle has an active head restraint system in the front seating positions. These automatically tilt { WARNING forward to reduce the risk of neck You can lose control of the injury if the vehicle is hit from vehicle if you try to adjust a behind. manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. 2-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment . Raise or lower the rear part of 1: Saves the seating position for the seat cushion by moving the driver 1. Power Seats rear of the horizontal control up or down. 2: Saves the seating position for On vehicles with power seats, the driver 2. controls are located on the outboard . Raise or lower the entire seat by S : Recalls the easy exit position. side of the seats. moving the entire horizontal control up or down. To save your positions in memory: The vertical control is used for 1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback reclining the seatback. See “Power recliner and lumbar, both outside Reclining Seatbacks” under mirrors, and the steering wheel Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑7 to a comfortable position. for more information. 2. Press and hold button 1 until two Memory Seat, Mirrors and beeps sound through the driver Steering Wheel side front speaker to let you know that the position has been On vehicles with the memory stored. package the controls are located on the driver door. This feature is used 3. Repeat the procedure for a to program and recall memory second driver using button 2. . Move the seat forward or settings for the driver seat, outside To recall memory positions, the rearward by sliding the mirror, and the steering wheel vehicle must be in P (Park) for an horizontal control forward or position if the vehicle has the power automatic transmission or the rearward. tilt wheel and telescopic steering parking brake applied for a . Raise or lower the front part of feature. manual transmission. Press and the seat cushion by moving the release either button 1 or button 2. front of the horizontal control up or down. Seats and Restraints 2-5

A single beep will sound. The seat, If something has blocked the driver On vehicles with the Keyless outside mirrors, and steering wheel seat or the steering column while Access System, automatic will move to the position previously recalling a memory position, the adjustment occurs when the ignition stored for the identified driver. recall may stop. Remove the is turned to OFF and the driver door If the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) obstruction, then press the is opened. transmitter is used to enter the appropriate control for the area that A single beep sounds. The driver vehicle and the remote recall is not recalling for two seconds. seat moves back, and if the vehicle memory feature is on, automatic Try recalling the memory position has the power tilt wheel and seat and mirror movement occur. again by pressing the appropriate telescopic steering feature, it moves memory button. If the memory up and forward. On vehicles with the Keyless position is still not recalling, see Access System, automatic your dealer/retailer for service. See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under adjustment occurs when the Vehicle Personalization on driver door is opened. Easy Exit Recall page 4‑51 for more information. To stop recall movement of the S : With the vehicle in P (Park) for For more programming information, memory feature at any time, press an automatic transmission or the see Vehicle Personalization on one of the power seat controls, parking brake applied for a manual page 4‑51. memory buttons, power tilt wheel transmission, press the exit button control, or power mirror buttons. to recall the exit position. If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic seat and power telescopic steering column movement occurs when the key is removed from the ignition. 2-6 Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Adjustment . Press and hold the bottom of the control to decrease support to the top of the seatback and increase support to the bottom of the seatback. . Press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or decrease support to the entire seatback. Side Bolster On vehicles with this feature: A. Seat Cushion Bolster . Press the top or bottom of Adjustment Switch control (A) to increase or The vehicle may have this feature. decrease support in seat B. Lumbar Support Control Switch The driver and passenger seatback cushion bolsters. lumbar support can be adjusted by C. Seatback Bolster Adjustment . Press the top or bottom of the moving the control located on the Switch control (C) to increase or outboard side of the seat cushions. Power Lumbar decrease support in the To increase or decrease support, seatback bolsters. hold the control forward or rearward. On vehicles with this feature: Adjust the seat as needed. . Press and hold the top of the control (B) to increase support to the top of the seatback and decrease support to the bottom of the lumbar. Seats and Restraints 2-7

Thigh Support Reclining Seatbacks If the front passenger seat has a manual reclining seatback, the lever Adjustment Manual Reclining Seatbacks used to operate it is located on the outboard side of the seat. { WARNING To recline the seatback: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving. On vehicles with this feature, adjust the manual leg extension by reaching under it, in the pocketed { WARNING area. Press the release button If either seatback is not locked, it 1. Lift the recline lever. and pull or push to lengthen or shorten it. Release the button to could move forward in a sudden 2. Move the seatback to the lock it in place. stop or crash. That could cause desired position, then release injury to the person sitting there. the lever to lock the seatback in Always push and pull on the place. seatbacks to be sure they are 3. Push and pull on the seatback to locked. make sure it is locked. 2-8 Seats and Restraints

To return the seatback to an upright position: { WARNING 1. Lift the lever fully without Sitting in a reclined position when applying pressure to the your vehicle is in motion can be seatback and the seatback will dangerous. Even if you buckle up, return to the upright position. your safety belts cannot do their 2. Push and pull on the seatback to job when you are reclined make sure it is locked. like this. Power Reclining Seatbacks The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into If the seats have power reclining it, receiving neck or other injuries. seatbacks, use the vertical power . To recline the seatback, press seat control located on the outboard the control toward the rear of The lap belt cannot do its job side of each seat. the vehicle. either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt . To raise the seatback, press the control toward the front of the forces would be there, not at your vehicle. pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Seats and Restraints 2-9

Heated and Ventilated On vehicles with this feature, the buttons are located on the climate Front Seats control panel. z { WARNING (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to heat the seat and If you cannot feel temperature seatback. change or pain to the skin, the { (Ventilated Seat): Press to seat heater may cause burns ventilate the seat. even at low temperatures. A light bar in the climate control To reduce the risk of burns, display shows the setting; high, people with such a condition medium, or low. should use care when using the Do not have a seatback reclined if Press either button to start that the vehicle is moving. seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place feature at the highest setting. Each press of the button, decreases anything on the seat that the setting. insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover or To turn the feature off, press the similar item. This may cause button until the light turns off. the seat heater to overheat. The heated or ventilated seats shut An overheated seat heater may off when the vehicle is turned off. cause a burn or may damage the seat. 2-10 Seats and Restraints

Rear Seats Sedan Wagon To lower one or both of the rear To lower one or both of the rear Notice: Folding a rear seat with seatbacks: seatbacks: the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. The vehicle may have a split folding rear seat. 1. Pull forward on the tab, located on the outboard side of the seatback, to unlock the seatback. 2. Fold the seatback down. This allows access to the trunk. 1. Pull on the lever, located on See Trunk (Sedan) on page 1‑17 the top outboard side of the for more information. seatback, to unlock the seatback. 2. Fold the seatback down. Seats and Restraints 2-11

To return a seatback to the upright Safety Belts position: { WARNING This section of the manual It is extremely dangerous to ride { WARNING describes how to use safety belts properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside If either seatback is not locked, it things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people could move forward in a sudden riding in these areas are more stop or crash. That could cause { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or injury to the person sitting there. killed. Do not allow people to ride Always push and pull on the Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is seatbacks to be sure they are safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and locked. properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using 1. Lift the seatback up and push it safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. back into place. much worse. You can hit things This vehicle has indicators as a 2. Make sure the seatback is inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts. locked into place by pushing and See Safety Belt Reminders on pulling on it. your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the page 4‑21 for additional information. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the same crash, you might not be, other seatback. if you are buckled up. Always When the seatback is not in use, it fasten your safety belt, and check should be kept in the upright, locked that your passenger(s) are position. restrained properly too. 2-12 Seats and Restraints

In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work provinces, the law requires wearing When you ride in or on anything, safety belts. Here is why: you go as fast as it goes. You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people Put someone on it. who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. it is just a seat on wheels. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Seats and Restraints 2-13

Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 2-14 Seats and Restraints

Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and Safety Belts I never drive far from home, why should I wear Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle safety belts? after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even A: You could be whether you are — one that is not your fault — you wearing a safety belt or not. But and your passenger(s) can be your chance of being conscious hurt. Being a good driver does during and after an accident, so not protect you from things you can unbuckle and get out, is beyond your control, such as much greater if you are belted. bad drivers. or the safety belts! And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are Most accidents occur within With safety belts, you slow down upside down. 40 km (25 miles) of home. as the vehicle does. You get more And the greatest number of time to stop. You stop over more Q: If my vehicle has airbags, serious injuries and deaths distance, and your strongest bones why should I have to wear occur at speeds of less than take the forces. That is why safety safety belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). belts make such good sense. A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. Seats and Restraints 2-15

How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your If you slid under it, the belt would passenger(s) wear a safety belt, apply force on your abdomen. Properly there is important information you This could cause serious or even This section is only for people of should know. fatal injuries. The shoulder belt adult size. should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the Be aware that there are special body are best able to take belt things to know about safety belts restraining forces. and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and The shoulder belt locks if there is a infants. If a child will be riding in the sudden stop or crash. vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑43 or Infants and Young Children on page 2‑45. Follow those rules for everyone's protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that Sit up straight and always keep unbelted people are hurt more often your feet on the floor in front of you. in crashes than those who are The lap part of the belt should be wearing safety belts. worn low and snug on the hips, Occupants who are not buckled up just touching the thighs. In a crash, can be thrown out of the vehicle in this applies force to the strong a crash. And they can strike others pelvic bones and you would be less in the vehicle who are wearing likely to slide under the lap belt. safety belts. 2-16 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much It will not give nearly as much protection this way. protection this way. Seats and Restraints 2-17

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously injured if lap belt is too loose. In a crash, your belt is buckled in the wrong you could slide under the lap place like this. In a crash, the belt belt and apply force on your would go up over your abdomen. abdomen. This could cause The belt forces would be there, serious or even fatal injuries. not on the pelvic bones. This The lap belt should be worn could cause serious internal low and snug on the hips, injuries. Always buckle your belt just touching the thighs. into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. 2-18 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. Seats and Restraints 2-19

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured by you wear the shoulder belt under not wearing the lap-shoulder belt your arm. In a crash, your body properly. In a crash, you would would move too far forward, not be restrained by the shoulder which would increase the chance belt. Your body could move of head and neck injury. Also, the too far forward increasing the belt would apply too much force chance of head and neck injury. to the ribs, which are not as You might also slide under the strong as shoulder bones. lap belt. The belt force would then You could also severely injure be applied right on the abdomen. internal organs like your liver or That could cause serious or fatal spleen. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across go over the shoulder and across the chest. the chest. 2-20 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Lap-Shoulder Belt { WARNING All seating positions in the vehicle You can be seriously injured by a have a lap-shoulder belt. twisted belt. In a crash, you would The following instructions explain not have the full width of the belt how to wear a lap-shoulder belt to spread impact forces. If a belt properly. is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is dealer/retailer to fix it. adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it A: The belt is twisted across get twisted. the body. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. Seats and Restraints 2-21

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section for use and important safety information.

3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should Pull up on the latch plate to return to its stowed position. make sure it is secure. If the belt Before a door is closed, be sure the is not long enough, see Safety safety belt is out of the way. If a Belt Extender on page 2‑25. door is slammed against a safety Position the release button on belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. the buckle so that the safety belt 5. To make the lap part tight, could be quickly unbuckled if pull up on the shoulder belt. necessary. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants. 2-22 Seats and Restraints

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners The vehicle has a shoulder belt This vehicle has safety belt height adjuster for the driver and pretensioners for front outboard right front passenger seating occupants. Although the safety belt positions. pretensioners cannot be seen, they Adjust the height so that the are part of the safety belt assembly. shoulder portion of the belt is They can help tighten the safety centered on the shoulder. The belt belts during the early stages of a should be away from the face and moderate to severe frontal or neck, but not falling off the shoulder. near frontal crash if the threshold Improper shoulder belt height conditions for pretensioner adjustment could reduce the activation are met. And, if the vehicle has side impact airbags, effectiveness of the safety belt in Push down on the release button (A) safety belt pretensioners can help a crash. and move the height adjuster to the tighten the safety belts in a side or desired position. The adjuster can rear crash. be moved up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, After the height adjuster is set to the They will need to be replaced, and desired position, try to move it down probably other new parts for the without pressing the release button vehicle's safety belt system. to make sure it has locked into See Replacing Safety Belt System position. Parts After a Crash on page 2‑26. Seats and Restraints 2-23

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Here is how to install a comfort Guides guide to the safety belt: This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides. If not, they are available through your dealer/retailer. The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head. 2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip. 2-24 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. belt and the guide on top. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed. Seats and Restraints 2-25

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check to protect the mother. When a safety Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts, including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors and occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are working properly. be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer/ retailer to have it repaired. Torn or If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten frayed safety belts may not protect around you, you should use it. you in a crash. They can rip apart But if a safety belt is not long under impact forces. If a belt is torn enough, your dealer/retailer will or frayed, get a new one right away. order you an extender. When you Make sure the safety belt reminder go in to order it, take the heaviest light is working. See Safety Belt coat you will wear, so the extender Reminders on page 4‑21 for more will be long enough for you. To help information. avoid personal injury, do not let Keep safety belts clean and dry. someone else use it, and use it only See Safety Belt Care on for the seat it is made to fit. The A pregnant woman should wear a page 2‑26. lap-shoulder belt, and the lap extender has been designed for portion should be worn as low as adults. Never use it for securing possible, below the rounding, child seats. To wear it, attach it to throughout the pregnancy. the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. 2-26 Seats and Restraints

Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of safety belts may not be necessary. Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that Crash were used during any crash may { WARNING have been stressed or damaged. { WARNING See your dealer/retailer to have the Do not bleach or dye safety belts. safety belt assemblies inspected or It may severely weaken them. A crash can damage the safety replaced. In a crash, they might not be able belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be to provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash. serious injury or even death in a Have the safety belt pretensioners crash. To help make sure the checked if the vehicle has been in a safety belt systems are working crash, or if the airbag readiness light properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 4‑21. possible. Seats and Restraints 2-27

Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label airbags: near the deployment opening. { WARNING . A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or . A frontal airbag for the right front killed in a crash if you are not passenger. part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel wearing your safety belt — even if . A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger. you have airbags. Airbags are airbag for the driver. designed to work with safety With seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them. . A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will Also, airbags are not designed to airbag for the right front appear on the side of the seatback passenger. closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only . A roof-rail airbag for the driver With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an and the passenger seated AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑31. directly behind the driver. headliner or trim. Wearing your safety belt during a . A roof-rail airbag for the right Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance front passenger and the the protection provided by safety of hitting things inside the vehicle passenger seated directly belts. Even though today's airbags or being ejected from it. Airbags behind the right front passenger. are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an are “supplemental restraints” to inflating bag, all airbags must inflate the safety belts. Everyone in your very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. 2-28 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING { WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against, faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag Anyone who is up against, or very when it inflates can be seriously close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster, or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but which shows the airbag symbol. close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants. The system checks the airbag be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt electrical system for malfunctions. of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is The light tells you if there is an Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young electrical problem. See Airbag position before and during a children and infants need the Readiness Light on page 4‑21 crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint for more information. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in while still maintaining control of your vehicle. To read how, see the vehicle. Older Children on page 2‑43 or Occupants should not lean on or Infants and Young Children on sleep against the door or side page 2‑45. windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. Seats and Restraints 2-29

Where Are the Airbags?

Driver Side shown, Passenger The right front passenger frontal Side similar airbag is in the instrument panel on The driver's frontal airbag is in the the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door. 2-30 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

If something is between an Do not use seat accessories that occupant and an airbag, the block the inflation path of a airbag might not inflate properly seat-mounted side impact airbag. or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury Never secure anything to the roof or even death. The path of an of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags inflating airbag must be kept by routing a rope or tie down clear. Do not put anything through any door or window between an occupant and an opening. If you do, the path of an airbag, and do not attach or put inflating roof-rail airbag will be Driver Side shown, blocked. Passenger Side similar anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. right front passenger, and second row outboard passengers are in the (Continued) ceiling above the side windows. Seats and Restraints 2-31

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at Thresholds can also vary with Inflate? different crash speeds. specific vehicle design. For example: Frontal airbags are not intended to Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear inflate in moderate to severe object, the airbags could inflate impacts, or in many side impacts. frontal or near-frontal crashes to at a different crash speed than if In addition, the vehicle has help reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. injuries mainly to the driver's or right dual-stage frontal airbags. front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that Dual-stage airbags adjust the However, they are only designed deforms, the airbags could restraint according to crash severity. to inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed Your vehicle has electronic frontal predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object sensors, which help the sensing threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform. system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could severe frontal impact. For moderate airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide inflate at a level less than full object (like a wall). deployment. For more severe frontal Whether your frontal airbags will impacts, full deployment occurs. or should deploy is not based on . If the vehicle goes into an object how fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could The vehicle has seat-mounted It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed side impact and roof-rail airbags. the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight See Airbag System on page 2‑27. quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object. 2-32 Seats and Restraints

Seat-mounted side impact and In any particular crash, no one What Makes an Airbag roof-rail airbags are intended to can say whether an airbag should inflate in moderate to severe side have inflated simply because of the Inflate? crashes. In addition, these roof-rail damage to a vehicle or because In a deployment event, the sensing airbags are intended to inflate of what the repair costs were. system sends an electrical signal during a rollover or in a severe For frontal airbags, inflation is triggering a release of gas from the frontal impact. Seat-mounted side determined by what the vehicle hits, inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the impact and roof-rail airbags will the angle of the impact, and how airbag causing the bag to break out inflate if the crash severity is above quickly the vehicle slows down. of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the system's designed threshold For seat-mounted side impact and the airbag, and related hardware are level. The threshold level can vary roof-rail airbags, deployment is all part of the airbag module. with specific vehicle design. determined by the location and Frontal airbag modules are located severity of the side impact. Roof-rail airbags are not inside the steering wheel and intended to inflate in rear impacts. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag instrument panel. For vehicles with A seat-mounted side impact airbag deployment is determined by the seat-mounted side impact airbags, is intended to deploy on the side direction of the roll. there are airbag modules in the side of the vehicle that is struck. Both of the front seatbacks closest to the roof-rail airbags will deploy when door. For vehicles with roof-rail either side of the vehicle is struck or airbags, there are airbag modules in if the sensing system predicts that the ceiling of the vehicle, near the the vehicle is about to roll over, or in side windows that have occupant a severe frontal impact. seating positions. Seats and Restraints 2-33

How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See After are designed to help contain the Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the an Airbag Inflates? In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the After the frontal airbags and near frontal collisions, even belted first and second rows. The rollover seat-mounted side impact airbags occupants can contact the steering capable roof-rail airbags are inflate, they quickly deflate, so wheel or the instrument panel. designed to help reduce the risk of quickly that some people may not In moderate to severe side full or partial ejection in rollover even realize an airbag inflated. collisions, even belted occupants events, although no system can Roof-rail airbags may still be at least can contact the inside of the prevent all such ejections. partially inflated for some time after vehicle. But airbags would not help in many they deploy. Some components of Airbags supplement the protection types of collisions, primarily the airbag module may be hot for provided by safety belts. Frontal because the occupant's motion is several minutes. For location of the airbags distribute the force of the not toward those airbags. See When airbag modules, see What Makes impact more evenly over the Should an Airbag Inflate? on an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑32. occupant's upper body, stopping page 2‑31 for more information. the occupant more gradually. Airbags should never be regarded Seat-mounted side impact and as anything more than a supplement roof-rail airbags distribute the force to safety belts. of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body. 2-34 Seats and Restraints

The parts of the airbag that come In many crashes severe enough to into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) inflate the airbag, windshields are but not too hot to touch. There may broken by vehicle deformation. be some smoke and dust coming get out of the vehicle after an Additional windshield breakage from the vents in the deflated airbag inflates, then get fresh air may also occur from the right front airbags. Airbag inflation does not by opening a window or a door. passenger airbag. prevent the driver from seeing out of If you experience breathing . Airbags are designed to inflate the windshield or being able to steer problems following an airbag only once. After an airbag the vehicle, nor does it prevent deployment, you should seek inflates, you will need some people from leaving the vehicle. medical attention. new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the { WARNING The vehicle has a feature that may airbag system will not be there automatically unlock the doors, turn to help protect you in another When an airbag inflates, there the interior lamps on, and turn the crash. A new system will include may be dust in the air. This dust hazard warning flashers on when airbag modules and possibly could cause breathing problems the airbags inflate. You can lock the other parts. The service manual for people with a history of doors, turn the interior lamps off, for your vehicle covers the need asthma or other breathing trouble. and turn the hazard warning to replace other parts. To avoid this, everyone in the flashers off by using the controls for vehicle should get out as soon as those features. it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-35

. The vehicle has a crash sensing Passenger Sensing The words ON and OFF, or the and diagnostic module which symbol for on and off, will be visible records information after a System during the system check. If the crash. See Vehicle Data The vehicle has a passenger vehicle has remote start, and it is Recording and Privacy on sensing system for the right front being used to start the vehicle from page 12‑15 and Event Data passenger position. The passenger a distance, you may not see the Recorders on page 12‑15. airbag status indicator will be visible system check. When the system . Let only qualified technicians on the instrument panel when the check is complete, either the word work on the airbag systems. vehicle is started. ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or Improper service can mean that off, will be visible. See Passenger an airbag system will not work Airbag Status Indicator on properly. See your dealer/retailer page 4‑22. for service. The passenger sensing system turns off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain United States conditions. The driver airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbags and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system.

Canada 2-36 Seats and Restraints

The passenger sensing system A label on the sun visor says, works with sensors that are part of “Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) the right front passenger seat. the front.” This is because the risk to The sensors are designed to detect the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing the presence of a properly-seated if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag, no front passenger frontal airbag { WARNING system is fail-safe. No one can should be enabled (may inflate) guarantee that an airbag will not or not. A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual According to accident statistics, restraint can be seriously circumstance, even though the children are safer when properly injured or killed if the right front airbag is turned off. passenger airbag inflates. secured in a rear seat in the correct Secure rear-facing child This is because the back of the child restraint for their weight restraints in a rear seat, even if rear-facing child restraint would and size. the airbag is off. If you secure a be very close to the inflating We recommend that children be forward-facing child restraint in airbag. A child in a forward-facing secured in a rear seat, including: the right front seat, always move child restraint can be seriously an infant or a child riding in a the front passenger seat as far injured or killed if the right front rear-facing child restraint; a child back as it will go. It is better to passenger airbag inflates and the riding in a forward-facing child seat; secure the child restraint in a passenger seat is in a forward an older child riding in a booster rear seat. seat; and children, who are large position. enough, using safety belts. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-37

The passenger sensing system is The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING passenger airbag if: right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever . The right front passenger seat is comes on and stays on, it means unoccupied. person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front that something may be wrong . The system determines an infant passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help is present in a child restraint. avoid injury to yourself or others, When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right . A right front passenger takes system has allowed the airbag to be away. See Airbag Readiness his/her weight off of the seat for enabled, the on indicator will light Light on page 4 21 for more a period of time. and stay lit to remind you that the ‑ airbag is active. information, including important . Or, if there is a critical problem safety information. with the airbag system or the For some children, including passenger sensing system. children in child restraints, and for When the passenger sensing very small adults, the passenger system has turned off the right front sensing system may or may not passenger frontal airbag, the off turn off the right front passenger indicator will light and stay lit to frontal airbag, depending upon remind you that the airbag is off. the person’s seating posture and See Passenger Airbag Status body build. Everyone in the vehicle Indicator on page 4‑22. who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. 2-38 Seats and Restraints

If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Child Restraint restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle seatback is not the vehicle. pushing the child restraint into 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion. from the seat such as blankets, Also make sure the child cushions, seat covers, seat restraint is not trapped under heaters, or seat massagers. the vehicle head restraint. 4. Reinstall the child restraint If this happens, adjust the head following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints provided by the child restraint on page 2‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting manufacturer and refer to 6. Restart the vehicle. in the right front passenger seat, Securing Child Restraints but the off indicator is lit, it could (Rear Seat) on page 2‑57 or The passenger sensing system be because that person is not Securing Child Restraints may or may not turn off the sitting properly in the seat. (Front Passenger Seat) on airbag for a child in a child page 2‑59. restraint depending upon the child's seating posture and body build. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Seats and Restraints 2-39

If this happens, use the following Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the steps to allow the system to detect System Operation performance of the passenger that person and enable the right sensing system. Here is how: front passenger frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat . The passenger sensing system 1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and may turn off the passenger 2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the the seat. If this happens, the off cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. indicator will be lit, and the heaters, or seat massagers. See “Safety Belts” and “Child airbag readiness light on the Restraints” in the Index for instrument panel will also be lit. 3. Place the seatback in the fully additional information about the . upright position. Liquid pooled on the seat that importance of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it 4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such as (turn on) the passenger airbag extended. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat while a child restraint or child 5. Restart the vehicle and have the massagers can affect how well occupant is on the seat. If the person remain in this position for the passenger sensing system passenger airbag is turned on, two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that the on indicator will be lit. indicator is lit. you not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install a vehicle. See Adding Equipment to child restraint or allow anyone to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on occupy the seat. See Airbag page 2‑40 for more information Readiness Light on page 4‑21 about modifications that can affect for important safety information. how the system operates. 2-40 Seats and Restraints

The on indicator may be lit if an Your dealer/retailer and the service Adding Equipment to the object, such as a briefcase, manual have information about handbag, grocery bag, laptop or servicing the vehicle and the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle other electronic device, is put on airbag system. To purchase a Q: Is there anything I might add an unoccupied seat. If this is not service manual, see Service to or change about the vehicle desired remove the object from Publications Ordering Information on that could keep the airbags the seat. page 12‑12. from working properly? A: Yes. If you add things that { WARNING { WARNING change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the or side sheet metal, they may passenger seat or between the ignition is turned off and the keep the airbag system from passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag working properly. Changing or seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper moving any parts of the front proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing system. are close to an airbag when it sensing and diagnostic module, inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. steering wheel, instrument They are probably part of the panel, roof-rail airbag modules, Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow ceiling headliner or pillar garnish Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and trim, overhead console, front Airbags affect how the vehicle make sure the person performing sensors, side impact sensors, should be serviced. There are work for you is qualified to do so. rollover sensor module, or airbag parts of the airbag system in wiring can affect the operation of several places around the vehicle. the airbag system. Seats and Restraints 2-41

In addition, the vehicle has a This could either prevent proper Q: Because I have a disability, passenger sensing system for deployment of the passenger I have to get my vehicle the right front passenger airbag(s) or prevent the modified. How can I find out position, which includes sensors passenger sensing system whether this will affect my that are part of the passenger from properly turning off the airbag system? seat. The passenger sensing passenger airbag(s). See A: If you have questions, system may not operate properly Passenger Sensing System on call Customer Assistance. if the original seat trim is page 2‑35. The phone numbers and replaced with non-GM covers, If you have questions, addresses for Customer upholstery or trim, or with GM call Customer Assistance. Assistance are in Step Two covers, upholstery or trim The phone numbers and of the Customer Satisfaction designed for a different vehicle. addresses for Customer Procedure in this manual. Any object, such as an Assistance are in Step Two See Customer Satisfaction aftermarket seat heater or a of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 12‑1. comfort enhancing pad or Procedure in this manual. device, installed under or on top See Customer Satisfaction In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information of the seat fabric, could also Procedure on page 12‑1. interfere with the operation of about the location of the airbag the passenger sensing system. If the vehicle has rollover sensors, sensing and diagnostic roof-rail airbags, see Different module and airbag wiring. Size Tires and Wheels on page 9‑77 for additional important information. 2-42 Seats and Restraints

Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash See your dealer/retailer for service. regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the { WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on airbag readiness light is working. after the vehicle is started or comes See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag page 4‑21 for more information. airbag systems in your vehicle. system may not work properly. A damaged airbag system may Have the vehicle serviced right Notice: If an airbag covering is away. See Airbag Readiness Light not work properly and may damaged, opened, or broken, the on page 4‑21 for more information. airbag may not work properly. not protect you and your Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure your airbag have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon as Inflate? on page 2‑32. See your possible. dealer/retailer for service. Seats and Restraints 2-43

Child Restraints Use a booster seat with a Q: What is the proper way to lap-shoulder belt until the child wear safety belts? Older Children passes the below fit test: A: An older child should wear a . Sit all the way back on the seat. lap-shoulder belt and get the Do the knees bend at the seat additional restraint a shoulder edge? If yes, continue. If no, belt can provide. The shoulder return to the booster seat. belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on snugly below the hips, just the shoulder? If yes, continue. touching the top of the thighs. If no, try using the rear safety This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. belt comfort guide. See “Rear It should never be worn over the Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal page 2‑20 for more information. If the shoulder belt still does not injuries in a crash. Older children who have outgrown rest on the shoulder, then return Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort booster seats should wear the to the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 20. vehicle's safety belts. . Does the lap belt fit low and ‑ The manufacturer's instructions snug on the hips, touching the that come with the booster seat, thighs? If yes, continue. If no, state the weight and height return to the booster seat. limitations for that booster. . Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. 2-44 Seats and Restraints

According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued) properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint The child could move too far system secured in a rear seating forward increasing the chance of position. head and neck injury. The child In a crash, children who are not might also slide under the lap buckled up can strike other people belt. The belt force would then be who are buckled up, or can be applied right on the abdomen. thrown out of the vehicle. Older That could cause serious or fatal children need to use safety belts injuries. The shoulder belt should properly. go over the shoulder and across the chest. { WARNING { WARNING

Never do this. Never do this. Never allow two children to wear Never allow a child to wear the the same safety belt. The safety safety belt with the shoulder belt belt can not properly spread the behind their back. A child can be impact forces. In a crash, the two seriously injured by not wearing children can be crushed together the lap-shoulder belt properly. and seriously injured. A safety In a crash, the child would not be belt must be used by only one restrained by the shoulder belt. person at a time. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-45

Infants and Young Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) Children children, but not for young children Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint. state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained every Canadian province says properly can strike other people, children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle. restrained while in a vehicle. { WARNING { WARNING Never do this. Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash. allow children to play with the (Continued) safety belts. 2-46 Seats and Restraints

For most basic types of child { WARNING restraints, there are many different models available. When Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, be Children who are up against, sure it is designed to be used in or very close to, any airbag when a motor vehicle. If it is, the it inflates can be seriously injured restraint will have a label saying or killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards. seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and Q: What are the different types of child restraint in a rear seat. If you height limitations for a particular add-on child restraints? must secure a forward-facing child restraint. In addition, there child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which are many kinds of restraints seat, always move the front are purchased by the vehicle's available for children with passenger seat as far back as it owner, are available in four basic special needs. will go. types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. Seats and Restraints 2-47

Child Restraint Systems { WARNING { WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low on because an infant's neck is not the hip bones, as it should. fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash, the rest of its body. In a crash, an the belt would apply force on a infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A) always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 2-48 Seats and Restraints

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH system, following the (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Seats and Restraints 2-49 the LATCH system. See Lower Keep in mind that an unsecured Where to Put the Anchors and Tethers for Children child restraint can move around in a Restraint (LATCH System) on page 2‑51 for collision or sudden stop and injure more information. Children can be people in the vehicle. Be sure to According to accident statistics, endangered in a crash if the child properly secure any child restraint children and infants are safer when restraint is not properly secured in in the vehicle — even when no child properly restrained in a child the vehicle. is in it. restraint system or infant restraint When securing an add-on child system secured in a rear seating Securing the Child Within the position. restraint, refer to the instructions Child Restraint that come with the restraint which We recommend that children and may be on the restraint itself or in a child restraints be secured in a rear booklet, or both, and to this manual. { WARNING seat, including: an infant or a child The child restraint instructions are A child can be seriously injured or riding in a rear-facing child restraint; important, so if they are not killed in a crash if the child is not a child riding in a forward-facing available, obtain a replacement child seat; an older child riding in a properly secured in the child copy from the manufacturer. booster seat; and children, who are restraint. Secure the child large enough, using safety belts. properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint. 2-50 Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says, When securing a child restraint in a “Never put a rear-facing child WARNING (Continued) rear seating position, study the restraint in the front.” This is instructions that came with the because the risk to the rear-facing Even if the passenger sensing child restraint to make sure it is child is so great, if the airbag system has turned off the right compatible with this vehicle. deploys. front passenger frontal airbag, no Wherever a child restraint is system is fail-safe. No one can installed, be sure to secure the { WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not child restraint properly. deploy under some unusual A child in a rear-facing child circumstance, even though it is Keep in mind that an unsecured restraint can be seriously turned off. child restraint can move around in a injured or killed if the right front collision or sudden stop and injure Secure rear-facing child passenger airbag inflates. people in the vehicle. Be sure to restraints in a rear seat, even This is because the back of the properly secure any child restraint if the airbag is off. If you secure in the vehicle even when no child rear-facing child restraint would — a forward-facing child restraint in is in it. be very close to the inflating the right front seat, always move airbag. A child in a forward-facing the front passenger seat as far child restraint can be seriously back as it will go. It is better to injured or killed if the right front secure the child restraint in a passenger airbag inflates and the rear seat. passenger seat is in a forward position. See Passenger Sensing System (Continued) on page 2‑35 for additional information. Seats and Restraints 2-51

Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors a top tether, you must also use Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top This system is designed to make tether and anchor. installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a child Lower anchors (A) are metal bars the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH built into the vehicle. There are child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint two lower anchors for each with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with LATCH seating position that will Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the accommodate a child restraint with child restraint is properly installed child restraint and its attachments. lower attachments (B). using the anchors, or use the The following explains how to vehicle's safety belts to secure the attach a child restraint with these restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle. that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments. 2-52 Seats and Restraints

Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have Lower Anchor and Top Tether a single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and A top tether (A, C) anchors the top follow the instructions for your Rear Seat of the child restraint to the vehicle. child restraint. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating A top tether anchor is built into If the child restraint does not have a positions with top tether anchors. the vehicle. The top tether top tether, one can be obtained, in attachment (B) on the child restraint kit form, for many child restraints. j (Lower Anchor): Seating connects to the top tether anchor in Ask the child restraint manufacturer positions with two lower anchors. the vehicle in order to reduce the whether or not a kit is available. forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Seats and Restraints 2-53

The top tether anchors for a sedan are located under the tether covers, on the rear seatback filler panel. For the wagon, the outboard top tether anchors are located under the tether covers behind the rear To assist you in locating the lower seatback. The wagon's center top anchors, each seating position with tether anchor is under the tether lower anchors has two labels, near cover, located on the vehicle floor, the crease between the seatback behind the rear seatback. Be sure to and the seat cushion. For a wagon use an anchor located on the same the lower anchors are beneath side of the vehicle as the seating zippers, located near the labels. Sedan position where the child restraint will Open the zippers to access the be placed. lower anchors. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. To assist you in locating the top Accident statistics show that tether anchors, the top tether anchor children are safer if they are symbol is located on the cover. restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put Wagon the Restraint on page 2‑49 for additional information. 2-54 Seats and Restraints

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH { WARNING WARNING (Continued) System Do not attach more than one child belts behind the child restraint so { restraint to a single anchor. children cannot reach them. Pull WARNING Attaching more than one child the shoulder belt all the way out restraint to a single anchor could of the retractor to set the lock, If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment not attached to anchors, the child if your vehicle has one, after the to come loose or even break child restraint has been installed. restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the Notice: Do not let the LATCH child could be seriously injured or risk of serious or fatal injuries attachments rub against the killed. Install a LATCH-type child during a crash, attach only one vehicle’s safety belts. This may restraint properly using the child restraint per anchor. damage these parts. If necessary, anchors, or use the vehicle's move buckled safety belts to safety belts to secure the avoid rubbing the LATCH restraint, following the instructions { WARNING attachments. that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this Do not fold the empty rear seat Children can be seriously injured with a safety belt buckled. This manual. or strangled if a shoulder belt is could damage the safety belt or wrapped around their neck and the seat. Unbuckle and return the the safety belt continues to safety belt to its stowed position, tighten. Buckle any unused safety before folding the seat. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-55

1. Attach and tighten the lower 2. If the child restraint manufacturer 2.4. Route, attach and tighten attachments to the lower recommends that the top tether the top tether according to anchors. If the child restraint be attached, attach and tighten your child restraint does not have lower the top tether to the top tether instructions and the attachments or the desired anchor, if equipped. Refer to the following instructions: seating position does not have child restraint instructions and lower anchors, secure the child the following steps: restraint with the top tether and 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer 2.2. Press the ribbed area of the instructions and the instructions cover to open the cover and in this manual. expose the anchor. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for 2.3. If you have an adjustable the desired seating head restraint, raise the position. head restraint. 1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower If the position you are using attachments on the child does not have a headrest restraint to the lower or head restraint and you anchors. are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. 2-56 Seats and Restraints

If the position you are using If the position you are using If the position you are using does not have a headrest has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or or head restraint and you head restraint and you are head restraint and you are are using a dual tether, using a dual tether, route using a single tether, route route the tether over the the tether around the the tether over the headrest seatback. headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Seats and Restraints 2-57

Replacing LATCH System If the vehicle has the LATCH system If the child restraint has the LATCH and it was being used during a system, see Lower Anchors and Parts After a Crash crash, new LATCH system parts Tethers for Children (LATCH may be needed. System) on page 2‑51 for how and { WARNING New parts and repairs may be where to install your child restraint necessary even if the LATCH using LATCH. If a child restraint is A crash can damage the LATCH secured in the vehicle using a system in the vehicle. A damaged system was not being used at the time of the crash. safety belt and it uses a top tether, LATCH system may not properly see Lower Anchors and Tethers for secure the child restraint, Securing Child Restraints Children (LATCH System) on resulting in serious injury or even page 2‑51 for top tether anchor death in a crash. To help make (Rear Seat) locations. sure the LATCH system is When securing a child restraint in a Do not secure a child restraint in a working properly after a crash, rear seating position, study the position without a top tether anchor see your dealer/retailer to have instructions that came with the if a national or local law requires the system inspected and any child restraint to make sure it is that the top tether be anchored, or if necessary replacements made as compatible with this vehicle. the instructions that come with the soon as possible. child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. 2-58 Seats and Restraints

If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 2‑49. 1. Put the child restraint on 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt the seat. buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Position the release button on set the lock. the lap and shoulder portions of the buckle so that the safety belt the vehicle's safety belt through could be quickly unbuckled if or around the restraint. The child necessary. restraint instructions will show you how. Seats and Restraints 2-59

6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions (Front Passenger Seat) regarding the use of the top This vehicle has airbags. A rear tether. See Lower Anchors and seat is a safer place to secure a Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. System) on page 2‑51 for more See Where to Put the Restraint on information. page 2‑49 7. Push and pull the child restraint In addition, the vehicle has a in different directions to be sure passenger sensing system which is it is secure. designed to turn off the front To remove the child restraint, passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and Sensing System on page 2 35 and on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. ‑ Passenger Airbag Status Indicator shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a top on page 4 22 for more information, tighten the lap portion of the belt, tether anchor, disconnect it. ‑ including important safety and feed the shoulder belt back information. into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 2-60 Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH “Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 2‑51 for how and if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the front where to install the child restraint passenger frontal airbag, no using LATCH. If a child restraint is { WARNING system is fail-safe. No one can secured using a safety belt and it guarantee that an airbag will not uses a top tether, see Lower A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual Anchors and Tethers for Children restraint can be seriously injured circumstance, even though it is (LATCH System) on page 2‑51 for or killed if the front passenger turned off. top tether anchor locations. airbag inflates. This is because Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not secure a child seat in a the back of the rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the position without a top tether anchor restraint would be very close to airbag is off. If you secure a if a national or local law requires the inflating airbag. A child in a that the top tether be anchored, or if forward-facing child restraint in forward-facing child restraint can the instructions that come with the the front seat, always move the be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint say that the top strap front passenger seat as far back front passenger airbag inflates must be anchored. as it will go. It is better to secure and the passenger seat is in a the child restraint in a rear seat. In Canada, the law requires that forward position. forward-facing child restraints have (Continued) See Passenger Sensing System a top tether, and that the tether be on page 2‑35 for additional attached. information. Seats and Restraints 2-61

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt vehicle is started. See buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to Passenger Airbag Status Position the release button on set the lock. Indicator on page 4‑22. the buckle, so that the safety 2. Put the child restraint on belt could be quickly unbuckled the seat. if necessary. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 2-62 Seats and Restraints

If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑35 for more information. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and 6. To tighten the belt, push down let it return to the stowed position. on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Storage 3-1

Storage Storage Cupholders Compartments The vehicle has cupholders located in front of the center console. Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage Push down on the cover to open. Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 3-1 There are also cupholders in the Glove Box ...... 3-1 Your vehicle has a storage area rear center armrest. Pull the armrest Cupholders ...... 3-1 located below the climate control down to use. Center Console Storage ...... 3-1 systems. To access, push on the Additional Storage Features cover. Center Console Storage Cargo Cover ...... 3-2 Glove Box Your vehicle has a center console Cargo Management System with an upper and lower storage (Wagon Only) ...... 3-3 To open, press the button. Use the area. To access the upper storage Cargo Net (Wagon) ...... 3-4 key to lock and unlock. The glove area, lift the driver side lever on the Convenience Net (Sedan) . . . . . 3-6 box has a shelf that can be removed front of the console and lift the Roof Rack System by pulling it out. cover. To access the lower storage Roof Rack System (Wagon) . . . 3-6 area, lift the passenger side lever on the center console. There is an additional storage area behind the center console. To access, push the cover. 3-2 Storage

Additional Storage 3. Make sure the cartridge is properly installed by pulling it Features slightly up, it should be firmly fitted. Cargo Cover 4. Grasp the handle and unroll the The cargo cover can be used to cover. Latch the posts into the cover items in the cargo area of sockets on the inside of the the vehicle. vehicle to secure it. To remove the cargo cover, do the following: 1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully roll it To install the cargo cover: back up. 1. Hold the cartridge so that the 2. Pull the handle (A) back and pull out shade faces backwards. remove it from the pin (B) on the 2. Align the cartridge over the trim panel. Repeat this on the pin (B) on both sides. Press the other side. cartridge down and turn it slightly forward until it clicks. Storage 3-3

Cargo Management { WARNING System (Wagon Only) An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. Someone could be injured. If the cover is removed, always store it in the proper storage location. When it is replaced, always be sure that it is securely reattached. The cover can be opened to two positions to allow access to the storage area. Press on the bottom of load floor Some items may be stored in the handle assembly to lift the top on cargo area when the cover is the handle. Pull up on the handle to closed. open the cargo management system. 3-4 Storage

D-Ring Sliders Cargo Net (Wagon) There are four D-Ring sliders that move along rails on both sides of { WARNING the cargo management area. These can be used as tie-downs Do not stack items higher than when storing cargo. the upper end of the cargo net or hang anything from the net. Avoid Installing D-Ring Sliders items that have sharp edges or that apply excessive force to the net. If items are not properly stored, damage to the net could occur and items can be thrown The loop of the D-Ring slider must about the vehicle. You or other be facing inward towards the could be injured. Always store storage area and the ring must be in items behind the net. the up position for proper usage. For vehicles equipped with a cargo Push the button to move the D-Ring net, it can be used to store light slider either towards the front or the loads, keeping them from falling rear of the vehicle. The rings can be over or being thrown into the cabin locked into various positions along during heavy braking. To install the D-Ring slider (A), the rail. insert it into the channel (B) located The net should not be overloaded or in the middle of each rail. used to store heavy loads. Storage 3-5

2. There are four tether positions for the lower hook straps. In the front position, the seat backs should be down for the net to properly hold items.

4. The net can also be mounted to 1. There are four installation the tethers on the back of the openings in the roof, two located rear seats when the seats are in front of and two behind the upright. rear seats. Insert the top corners of the cargo net into the large opening 3. Mount the cargo net to the rear in the roof and secure by sliding seat tethers located on the front them into the small opening. of the bottom cushions. 3-6 Storage

Convenience Net (Sedan) Roof Rack System Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of the Roof Rack System vehicle. Put small loads behind the (Wagon) net. It can also be positioned into an envelope style to hold smaller items. The net is not for heavier loads. { WARNING Store items as far forward as If something is carried on you can. top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack — like paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can 5. Pull on the straps to tighten catch it while the vehicle is being the net. driven. The item being carried Put light loads behind the net to could be violently torn off, and keep them from falling over or this could cause a collision, and being thrown into the cabin damage the vehicle. Never carry during heavy braking. The net something longer or wider than should not be overloaded or the roof rack on top of the vehicle used to store heavy loads. unless using a GM Certified accessory carrier. Storage 3-7

For vehicles with a roof rack, the To prevent damage or loss of cargo Installation of Crossrails rack can be used to load items. when driving, check to make sure For roof racks that do not have crossrails and cargo are securely crossrails included, GM Certified fastened. Loading cargo on the roof crossrails can be purchased as an rack will make the vehicle’s center accessory. See your dealer/retailer of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, for additional information. sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden Notice: Loading cargo on the braking or abrupt maneuvers, roof rack that weighs more than otherwise it may result in loss of 75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the control. If driving for a long distance, rear or sides of the vehicle may on rough roads, or at high speeds, damage the vehicle. Load cargo occasionally stop the vehicle to so that it rests evenly between make sure the cargo remains in the crossrails, making sure to its place. fasten cargo securely. Do not exceed the maximum vehicle A. Crossrails capacity when loading the vehicle. B. Crossrail End For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Vehicle C. Siderail Cover Load Limits on page 8‑12. 1. Siderail covers (C) must be removed for installing the crossrails (A). 2. To remove siderail covers, start at the back of the vehicle and pull straight up. 3-8 Storage

3. Store the siderail covers in a place where it can be laid flat. Do not stack any items on top of the cover.

6. The crossrail supports are 7. Locate the forward or rearward labeled with an arrow that needs most cut-out (A) in the siderail to point toward the front of the channel. vehicle. When the lever on the 8. Insert both crossrail ends into crossrail support is in the down the cut-outs, making sure the 4. Identify front and rear crossrail position a pin (A) will be visible arrows on the crossrail ends are by the size of the crossrail on the bottom of the assembly. pointed towards the front of the support. To install the crossrail support, vehicle. move the lever into the forward 5. The front crossrail support (A) is upper position. The pin (A) smaller than the rear crossrail should no longer be visible. support (B). Storage 3-9

10. Move the levers on both Removing the Crossrails crossrail supports to the down 1. Start with either crossrail position. Slide the crossrail assembly, slide both levers into assembly back and forth until the upper most position, moving the crossrail pin engages. the lever from the rear to the 11. Push back and forth again to front of the vehicle. make sure the pins have 2. Slide the crossrail assembly until engaged into the slots. it is in the cut-out area or the Make sure both crossrails are siderail channel. locked into the same hole 3. Remove the crossrail from the position on each side of the vehicle. vehicle. 9. Levers must still be in the 4. Repeat steps 1 3 for the other forward up position. For front – crossrail assembly. crossbar, slide the crossrail assembly (A) forward until the 5. Reinstall the siderail covers crossrail end is past the channel making sure they are fully cut-out area (B). For rear seated in the siderail channel. crossbar, slide the crossrail assembly (A) rearward until the entire crossrail support is in first position to the rear of the channel cut-out area (B). 3-10 Storage

2 NOTES Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instruments and Warning Lights, Gages, and Malfunction Indicators Indicator Lamp ...... 4-23 Controls Warning Lights, Gages, and Brake System Warning Indicators ...... 4-14 Light ...... 4-26 Instrument Cluster ...... 4-15 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Instrument Panel Overview Speedometer ...... 4-17 Warning Light ...... 4-27 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4 Odometer ...... 4-17 Up-Shift Light ...... 4-28 Trip Odometer ...... 4-17 Traction Control System ® Controls Tachometer ...... 4-17 (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . 4-28 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6 Fuel Gage ...... 4-17 Engine Coolant Temperature Steering Wheel Controls ...... 4-7 Boost Gage ...... 4-18 Warning Light ...... 4-29 Horn ...... 4-7 Engine Speed Limiter ...... 4-19 Tire Pressure Light ...... 4-29 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-8 Engine Oil Pressure Gage . . . 4-19 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-30 Rear Window Wiper/ Engine Coolant Security Light ...... 4-30 Washer ...... 4-9 Temperature Gage ...... 4-20 High-Beam on Light ...... 4-30 Headlamp Washer ...... 4-10 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 4-21 Fog Lamp Light ...... 4-31 Compass ...... 4-11 Airbag Readiness Light ...... 4-21 Lamps on Reminder ...... 4-31 Clock ...... 4-12 Passenger Airbag Status Cruise Control Light ...... 4-31 Power Outlets ...... 4-12 Indicator ...... 4-22 Information Displays Cigarette Lighter ...... 4-13 Charging System Light ...... 4-23 Ashtrays ...... 4-14 Driver Information Center (DIC) ...... 4-31 4-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Messages Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-42 Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Messages ...... 4-36 Lamp Messages ...... 4-44 Vehicle Personalization ...... 4-51 Battery Voltage and Charging Object Detection System ® Messages ...... 4-45 OnStar System Messages ...... 4-37 ® Brake System Messages . . . . 4-38 Ride Control System OnStar System ...... 4-59 Compass Messages ...... 4-39 Messages ...... 4-45 Universal Remote System Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-48 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-39 Universal Remote System . . . 4-61 Anti-Theft Alarm System Door Ajar Messages ...... 4-39 Universal Remote System Messages ...... 4-48 Engine Cooling System Programming ...... 4-61 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-48 Messages ...... 4-40 Universal Remote System Tire Messages ...... 4-48 Engine Oil Messages ...... 4-40 Operation ...... 4-65 Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-41 Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-49 Fuel System Messages ...... 4-42 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 4-50 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 4-50 Instruments and Controls 4-3

2 NOTES 4-4 Instruments and Controls

Instrument Panel Overview

CTS Shown, CTS-V Similar Instruments and Controls 4-5

A. Air Vents on page 7‑6. K. Hazard Warning Flashers on R. Steering Wheel Adjustment on B. Driver Information Center (DIC) page 5‑4. page 4‑6. on page 4‑31. L. Navigation Display Brightness S. Horn on page 4‑7. C. Instrument Panel Illumination Control (If Equipped). See T. Steering Wheel Controls on Navigation System Manual. Control on page 5‑5. page 4‑7. D. Turn and Lane-Change Signals M. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑9 U. Heated and Ventilated Front (Base Audio System) or on page 5‑4. Seats on page 2‑9. Navigation/Radio System E. Instrument Cluster on (If Equipped). See Navigation V. Dual Automatic Climate Control page 4‑15. System Manual. System on page 7‑1. F. Windshield Wiper/Washer on N. Parking Brake (Manual) on W. Parking Brake (Manual) on page 4‑8. Rear Window page 8‑34 or Parking Brake page 8‑34 or Parking Brake Wiper/Washer on page 4‑9 (Electric) on page 8‑35. (Electric) on page 8‑35. (If Equipped). O. Hood on page 9‑5. X. Shift Lever. See Automatic G. Navigation Button (If Equipped). Transmission on page 8‑26 or See Navigation System Manual. P. Cruise Control on page 8‑41. Manual Transmission on Traction Control System (TCS) page 8‑30. H. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable Button (CTS-V Model on page 8‑37. Magnetic Ride Only). See Traction Control Y. Instrument Panel Storage on Control on page 8‑40 (CTS-V System (TCS) on page 8‑37. page 3‑1. Power Outlets on Model Only). page 4‑12. Q. Tap Shift Controls (CTS-V Model I. Clock on page 4‑12. Only). See Automatic Z. Glove Box on page 3‑1. J. Passenger Sensing System on Transmission on page 8‑26. page 2‑35. 4-6 Instruments and Controls

Controls Power Tilt Wheel Steering Wheel Adjustment A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

The tilt and telescope lever is on the left side of the steering column. For vehicles with this feature, the To tilt and telescope the steering power tilt wheel control is on the left wheel, pull the lever down. Then side of the steering column. move the steering wheel up or down or backward or forward into a To operate the power tilt feature, comfortable position. Pull the lever push the control up or down to tilt up to lock the steering wheel in the steering wheel up or down. place. Push the control forward or rearward to move the steering wheel toward the front or rear of the vehicle. Instruments and Controls 4-7

. For vehicles without a navigation Steering Wheel Controls y / c z (Previous/Next): Press to go to the previous or next radio system, press and hold g for station stored as a favorite, or the two seconds to interact with ® previous or next track of a CD. OnStar or Bluetooth. See the OnStar® System on page 4‑59, Press to interact with the Bluetooth® or Bluetooth on page 6‑37 for system. See Bluetooth on more information about these page 6‑37 for more information. features. + e − e (Volume): Press to . For vehicles with a navigation increase or to decrease the volume. system, OnStar, or Bluetooth, b g (Mute/Speech Recognition/ press and hold g for Push to Talk): Press and release two seconds and say “hands to silence the vehicle speakers only. free” to interact with OnStar or The audio of the wireless and wired Bluetooth. See the OnStar® Some audio steering wheel controls headphones, if the vehicle has System on page 4‑59, could differ depending on the these features, does not mute. or Bluetooth on page 6‑37 for vehicle's options. Controls that can Press and release b g again, to more information about these be adjusted at the steering wheel turn the sound on. features. may include: . For vehicles with a navigation SRCE (Source): Press to switch Horn between the radio AM, FM, system, press and hold g for two seconds to initiate speech Press near the horn symbols or XM (if equipped), CD, HDD press on the steering wheel pad to recognition. See “Speech (if equipped), auxiliary input jack, sound the horn. DVD (if equipped), and USB Recognition” in the Navigation (if equipped). System manual for more information. 4-8 Instruments and Controls

Windshield Wiper/Washer The windshield wiper lever is on the Clear snow and ice from the wiper right side of the steering column. blades before using them. If frozen Move the windshield wiper lever to to the windshield, carefully loosen or select the wiper speed. thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced. For more 7 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly information, see Wiper Blade move the lever down and release. Replacement on page 9‑33. Several wipes, hold the lever down. Heavy snow or ice can overload the T (Off): Turns the wipers off. wiper motor. A circuit breaker will & (Adjustable Interval Wipes): stop the motor until it cools down. For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the Wiper Arm Assembly Protection adjustable interval wiper band to set the frequency of wipes. When using an automatic car wash, 6 move the windshield wiper lever to Sedan Model shown (Adjustable Interval Wiper the OFF position. This disables the Band): Turn the band up for more windshield wipes and/or rear wipers, frequent wipes or down for less if equipped. frequent wipes. The wiper operations return to 1 : Slow wipes. normal when the transmission is no 2 : Fast wipes. longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased. If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds while you are driving, the exterior lamps come on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO. See “Wiper Activated Headlamps” for more Wagon Model shown information. Instruments and Controls 4-9

Windshield Washer Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid Rear Window displays on the Driver Information Wiper/Washer { WARNING Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low. See Driver Information For vehicles with a rear window In freezing weather, do not use Center (DIC) on page 4‑31. wiper/washer, the controls are on the end of the windshield wiper your washer until the windshield See Washer Fluid on page 9‑25 for is warmed. Otherwise the washer information on filling the windshield lever. fluid can form ice on the washer fluid reservoir. windshield, blocking your vision. If the headlamps are on while the windshield is being washed, the Sedan Model headlamp washers, if the vehicle K (Washer Fluid): Press the has them, will also turn on. See button with this symbol, on the end “Headlamp Washer” following for of the windshield washer lever, to more information. wash the windshield. The washer fluid sprays onto the windshield and Wiper Activated Headlamps the wipers run for a few cycles to This feature activates the clear the windshield. Press and headlamps and parking lamps after hold K for more wash cycles. the windshield wipers have been in use for about six seconds. For this Wagon Model Press the upper or lower portion of feature to work, the exterior lamp the button to control the rear wiper Pull the lever toward you to spray control must be in AUTO. and rear wiper delay. washer fluid on the windshield. The wiper-activated headlamps The system turns off when the The spray continues until the lever immediately turn off, when the is released. The wipers will run a button is returned to the middle ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF or position. few times. the windshield wiper control is turned off. 4-10 Instruments and Controls

Z (Rear Wiper Delay Short): Headlamp Washer Press the washer button at the end Sets a five second delay between of the windshield wiper lever, to For vehicles with headlamp washers wipes. wash the headlamps. Both the 5 they clear debris from the headlamp headlamps and the windshield will (Rear Wiper Delay Long): Sets lenses. be washed. After the first wash, the a ten second delay between wipes. headlamps will not be washed until = (Rear Washer): Push the the fifth press of the windshield windshield wiper lever forward to washer button. spray washer fluid on the rear The headlamps must be on to be window. The lever returns to its washed. If the headlamps are off, starting position when released. only the windshield will be washed The windshield washer reservoir is when the washer button is pressed. used for the windshield and the rear If the washer fluid is low, the window. Check the fluid level in the headlamp washers will not work. reservoir if either washer is not See Windshield Wiper/Washer on working. See Washer Fluid on page 4‑8 for more information. page 9‑25. The headlamp washers are beneath { WARNING the headlamps.

In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. Instruments and Controls 4-11

Compass Compass Calibration The vehicle may have a compass in The compass can be manually the Driver Information Center (DIC). calibrated. Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean Compass Zone and safe location, such as an open The zone is set to zone eight. If you parking lot, where driving the do not live in zone eight or drive out vehicle in circles is not a danger. of the area, the variance needs to It is suggested to calibrate away be changed to the appropriate zone. from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or other industrial To adjust for compass variance, use structures, if possible. the following procedure: If CAL appears in the DIC display, 2. Find the vehicle's current Compass Variance (Zone) the compass should be calibrated. Procedure location and variance zone number on the map. If the DIC display does not show a 1. Do not set the compass zone heading, for example, N for North, Zones 1 through 15 are when the vehicle is moving. On or the heading does not change available. an automatic transmission after making turns, there may be a vehicle, only set it when the 3. Press the set/reset button to strong magnetic field interfering with vehicle is in P (Park). On a scroll through and select the the compass. Interference may be manual transmission vehicle, appropriate variance zone. caused by a magnetic antenna only set it when the vehicle is 4. Press the trip/fuel button until mount, magnetic note pad holder, stopped. the vehicle heading, for or any other magnetic item. Turn off Press the vehicle information example, N for North, is the vehicle, move the magnetic button until Press To Change displayed in the DIC. item, then turn on the vehicle and Compass Zone displays. calibrate the compass. 5. Calibrate the compass. See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following. 4-12 Instruments and Controls

To calibrate the compass, use the 4. The DIC will display Calibrating Holding either button down will following procedure: Drive In Circles. Drive the cause the clock to advance vehicle in tight circles at less faster. Release the button before Compass Calibration Procedure than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the desired time is reached. 1. Before calibrating the compass, the calibration. The DIC will 3. Push and release either button check that the compass is set to display Calibration Complete for to adjust the time by one minute the correct variance zone. See a few seconds when the increments until the desired time “Compass Variance (Zone) calibration is complete. The DIC is reached. Procedure” earlier in this display will then return to Press section. To Calibrate Compass. Power Outlets Do not operate any switches such as window, sunroof, Clock Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical climate controls, seats, etc. The analog clock is located on the during the calibration procedure. equipment, such as a cellular instrument panel above the radio. telephone. 2. Press the vehicle information The clock is not connected with any button until Press To Calibrate other vehicle system and runs by There are three accessory power Compass displays. itself. To adjust the clock: outlets. There is an outlet located in the front storage area below the 3. Press the set/reset button to 1. Locate the adjustment buttons climate control system, one inside start the compass calibration. directly below the clock face. the center console storage bin, and 2. Push and hold the right one on the rear of the center adjustment button to move the console. clock hands forward or the left For CTS Wagon model only, there is adjustment button to make the an additional accessory power clock hands go backward. outlet located near the rear cargo net. Instruments and Controls 4-13

To use an outlet, remove the Notice: Adding any electrical Cigarette Lighter protective cap. When not in use, equipment to the vehicle can always cover the outlet with the damage it or keep other The vehicle may have a cigarette protective cap. The accessory components from working as lighter. To use the lighter, push it in power outlet is operational at all they should. The repairs would all the way and let go. When it is times. not be covered by the vehicle ready, it will pop back out by itself. Notice: If electrical devices are warranty. Do not use equipment Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter left plugged into a power outlet, exceeding maximum amperage in while it is heating does not let the battery may drain causing the rating of 20 amperes. Check with the lighter back away from the vehicle not to start or damage to your dealer/retailer before adding heating element when it is hot. the battery. This would not be electrical equipment. Damage from overheating can covered by the vehicle warranty. Notice: Improper use of the occur to the lighter or heating Always unplug all electrical power outlet can cause damage element, or a fuse could be devices when turning off the not covered by the vehicle blown. Do not hold a cigarette vehicle. warranty. Do not hang any type of lighter in while it is heating. Certain electrical accessories may accessory or accessory bracket not be compatible with the from the plug because the power accessory power outlet and could outlets are designed for result in blown vehicle or adapter accessory power plugs only. fuses. If you experience a problem see your dealer/retailer for additional information on accessory power outlets. 4-14 Instruments and Controls

Ashtrays Warning Lights, When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while The vehicle may have two Gages, and Indicators driving, or when one of the gages removable ashtrays. One ashtray shows there may be a problem, Warning lights come on when there can be placed into the instrument check the section that explains what could be a problem with a vehicle panel storage compartment and the to do. Follow this manual's advice. function. Some warning lights come other into the center console rear Waiting to do repairs can be costly on briefly when the engine is started compartment. and even dangerous. to indicate they are working. To empty the ashtrays, hold on to the edges of the bin and pull straight Gages can indicate when there out. To reinstall, push the tray back could be a problem with a vehicle into place. function. Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a Notice: If papers, pins, or other problem with the vehicle. flammable items are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray. Instruments and Controls 4-15

Instrument Cluster

United States Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Canada and Manual Similar 4-16 Instruments and Controls

United States V-Series Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Canada and Manual Similar Instruments and Controls 4-17

Speedometer For vehicles that have the Fuel Gage navigation system, see your The speedometer shows the Navigation System manual for vehicle's speed in both kilometers more information. per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph). Tachometer Odometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per The odometer shows how far the minute (rpm). vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles. Notice: If the engine is operated with the tachometer in the shaded If this vehicle has to have a new warning area, the vehicle could odometer installed, the new one be damaged, and the damages may read the correct mileage. This would not be covered by the is because the vehicle computer vehicle warranty. Do not operate When the ignition is on, the fuel has stored the mileage in memory. the engine with the tachometer in gage tells you about how much fuel the shaded warning area. you have left in your tank. Trip Odometer The CTS-V tachometer has tracer An arrow on the fuel gage indicates The trip odometer can record the lights that follow the movement of the side of the vehicle the fuel door number of miles or kilometers the tachometer indicator. The tracer is on. traveled for up to two trips. lights also flash when it is time to When the indicator nears empty, the The trip odometer is part of the up-shift to avoid the engine speed low fuel light comes on. There is still Driver Information Center (DIC), limit. See Automatic Transmission a little fuel left in the vehicle, but the for more information see Driver on page 8‑26 or Manual fuel tank should be filled soon. Information Center (DIC) on Transmission on page 8‑30 for more information. page 4‑31. 4-18 Instruments and Controls

The Fuel Level Low message . The gage moves a little while appears in the Driver Information turning a corner or speeding up. Center (DIC) and a single chime . The gage takes a few seconds sounds. See Fuel System to stabilize after the ignition is Messages on page 4‑42 for more turned on, and will go back to information. empty when the ignition is Here are four things that some turned off. owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage: Boost Gage . At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. Canada . It takes a little more or less fuel For the CTS-V, this gage is located to fill up than the gage indicated. in the instrument panel cluster. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, This gage indicates positive but it actually took a little more manifold pressure which is the or less than half the tank's induction air pressure level in the capacity to fill the tank. manifold before it enters the combustion chamber. This gage reads zero under light throttle before United States boost is generated. This gage automatically resets to zero every time the engine is started. Instruments and Controls 4-19

Engine Speed Limiter Engine Oil Pressure Gage This feature prevents the engine speed from reaching an unsafe level. If the level is too high, the throttle closes or limits the fuel supply until the engine speed returns to a safe level. Throttle operation and fuel supply returns to normal when engine speed is lowered. For the CTS-V, the tachometer tracer lights flashes prior to reaching Canada engine speed limit. The tracer lights also flash on automatic transmission United States For vehicles with an engine oil vehicles while in the DSC or Tap pressure gage. It shows the engine Shift modes. oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but if readings are outside the normal operating range, the oil pressure light will come on. See Engine Oil Pressure Light on page 4‑30 for more information. 4-20 Instruments and Controls

A reading outside the normal Engine Coolant operating range may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some Temperature Gage other problem causing low oil pressure. Oil should be checked as soon as possible. See Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine under Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑31 and Engine Oil on page 9‑10.

{ WARNING Canada Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant become so hot that it catches fire. United States Someone could be burned. Check overheats the engine coolant temperature warning light will come the oil as soon as possible and on. See Engine Coolant have the vehicle serviced. Temperature Warning Light on page 4 29 and Engine Overheating Notice: Lack of proper engine oil ‑ on page 9 23 for more information. maintenance can damage the ‑ engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. Instruments and Controls 4-21

Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on Driver Safety Belt Reminder if an object is put on the seat such Light as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other electronic There is a driver safety belt device. To turn off the warning light reminder light on the instrument and or chime, remove the object panel cluster. from the seat or buckle the safety belt. When the engine is started this light and the chime comes on and stays Airbag Readiness Light on for several seconds to remind This light shows if there is an the passenger to fasten their safety electrical problem. The system belt. The light also begins to flash. check includes the airbag sensor, When the engine is started this light This cycle repeats if the passenger the pretensioners, the airbag and a chime come on and stay on remains unbuckled and the vehicle modules, the wiring and the crash for several seconds to remind is moving. sensing and diagnostic module. For drivers to fasten their safety belts. more information on the airbag If the passenger safety belt is The light also begins to flash. system, see Airbag System on buckled, neither the chime nor the page 2 27. This cycle repeats if the driver light comes on. ‑ remains unbuckled and the vehicle is moving. If the driver safety belt is already buckled, neither the light nor chime come on. 4-22 Instruments and Controls

Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator Indicator will light the words ON and OFF, The vehicle has the passenger or the symbols for on and off, for sensing system. See Passenger several seconds as a system check. Sensing System on page 2‑35 for If the vehicle has remote start, and it The airbag readiness light comes on important safety information. The is being used to start the vehicle and stays on for several seconds instrument panel has a passenger from a distance, you may not see when the vehicle is started. Then airbag status indicator. the system check. Then, after the light goes out. several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, { WARNING or either the on or off symbol, to let you know the status of the right front If the airbag readiness light stays passenger frontal airbag. on after the vehicle is started or If the word ON or the on symbol is comes on while driving, it means United States lit on the passenger airbag status the airbag system might not be indicator, it means that the right working properly. The airbags in front passenger frontal airbag is the vehicle might not inflate in a enabled (may inflate). crash, or they could even inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is without a crash. To help avoid lit on the passenger airbag status injury, have the vehicle serviced indicator, it means that the right away. passenger sensing system has Canada turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag. Instruments and Controls 4-23

If, after several seconds, both status Charging System Light If a short distance must be driven indicator lights remain on, or if there with the light on, be sure to turn off are no lights at all, there may be a all accessories, such as the radio problem with the lights or the and air conditioner. passenger sensing system. See your dealer/retailer for service. Malfunction Indicator Lamp { WARNING The charging system light comes on A computer system called OBD II If the airbag readiness light ever briefly when the ignition is turned on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second comes on and stays on, it means but the engine is not running, as a Generation) monitors operation of that something may be wrong check to show the light is working. the fuel, ignition, and emission with the airbag system. To help It should go out when the engine is control systems. It ensures that avoid injury to yourself or others, started. emissions are at acceptable levels have the vehicle serviced right for the life of the vehicle, helping to If the light stays on, or comes on produce a cleaner environment. away. See Airbag Readiness while driving, there may be a Light on page 4‑21 for more problem with the electrical charging information, including important system. Have it checked by your safety information. dealer/retailer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery. When this light comes on, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays a message. This light comes on when the ignition is on, but the engine is not See Battery Voltage and Charging running, as a check to show it is Messages on page 4‑37. working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer. 4-24 Instruments and Controls

If the check engine light comes on Notice: Modifications made to the The following can prevent more and stays on, while the engine is engine, transmission, exhaust, serious damage to the vehicle: running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed. an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of the required. original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations. Malfunctions often are indicated by those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades. Performance Criteria (TPC) can the system before any problem is . If towing a trailer, reduce the apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light amount of cargo being hauled as can prevent more serious damage soon as it is possible. to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to If the light continues to flash, when diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. vehicle warranty. This could also Find a safe place to park the Notice: If the vehicle is result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at continually driven with this light required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the on, after a while, the emission Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, controls might not work as well, Accessories and Modifications follow the previous steps and see the vehicle's fuel economy might on page 9‑3. your dealer/retailer for service as not be as good, and the engine soon as possible. might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a could lead to costly repairs that malfunction in one of two ways: Light On Steady: An emission might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition control system malfunction has vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire been detected on the vehicle. increases vehicle emissions and Diagnosis and service might be could damage the emission control required. system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. Instruments and Controls 4-25

An emission system malfunction . Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and might be corrected. with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs causes the engine not to run as . Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and may Some state/provincial and local installed. See Filling the Tank on cause: stalling after start-up, governments have or might begin page 8‑52. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is programs to inspect the emission system can determine if the changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment on the vehicle. fuel cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, Failure to pass this inspection could improperly installed. A loose or or stumbling on acceleration. prevent getting a vehicle missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away registration. evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up. A few driving trips with the cap Here are some things to know to properly installed should turn the If one or more of these help the vehicle pass an inspection: light off. conditions occurs, change the . The vehicle will not pass this fuel brand used. It will require at . If the vehicle has been driven inspection if the check engine least one full tank of the proper light is on with the engine through a deep puddle of water, fuel to turn the light off. the vehicle's electrical system running, or if the ignition is might be wet. The condition is See Specifications on placed in ON/RUN and the light usually corrected when the page 8‑50. is not on. electrical system dries out. A If none of the above have made few driving trips should turn the the light turn off, your dealer/retailer light off. can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. 4-26 Instruments and Controls

. The vehicle will not pass this Brake System When the ignition is on, the brake inspection if the OBD II system warning light will also come (on-board diagnostic) system Warning Light on when the parking brake is set. determines that critical emission This vehicle's hydraulic brake control systems have not been The light will flash or stay on if the system is divided into two parts. parking brake is not fully released. completely diagnosed by the If one part is not working, the other system. The vehicle would be part can still work and stop the If the light stays on after the parking considered not ready for vehicle. For good braking both parts brake is fully released there is a inspection. This can happen if need to be working well. base brake problem. the battery has recently been If the warning light comes on, there replaced or if the battery has run { CAUTION down. The diagnostic system is is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away. designed to evaluate critical The brake system might not be emission control systems during working properly if the brake normal driving. This can take system warning light is on. several days of routine driving. Driving with the brake system If this has been done and the warning light on can lead to a vehicle still does not pass the crash. If the light is still on after inspection for lack of OBD II the vehicle has been pulled off system readiness, your United States Canada the road and carefully stopped, dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection. This light should come on briefly have the vehicle towed for when the ignition is placed in service. ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. Instruments and Controls 4-27

For vehicles with the Electric Park does not come on then, have it fixed Antilock Brake System Brake (EPB), this red brake warning so it will be ready to warn if there is light comes on when the park brake a problem. (ABS) Warning Light is applied. If the light continues If this park brake light comes on flashing after the park brake is there is a problem with a system on released, or while driving, there is a the vehicle that is causing the park problem with the Electric Parking brake system to work at a reduced Brake system. level. The vehicle can still be driven, If the light does not come on, but should be taken to a dealer/ or remains flashing, see you retailer For vehicles with the Antilock Brake dealer/retailer. See Brake Assist (Except CTS-V) System (ABS), this light comes on on page 8‑37 for more information. briefly when the engine is started. If the light does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light comes on For vehicles with the Electric Park while driving, stop as soon as it Brake (EPB), this park brake status is safely possible and turn the light should come on briefly when ignition off. A chime may also sound ignition is placed in ON/RUN. If it when the light comes on steady. 4-28 Instruments and Controls

Then start the engine again to reset Up-Shift Light Traction Control System the system. If the ABS light stays ® on, or comes on again while driving, (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle does not The vehicle may have an up-shift have antilock brakes and there is a light, it shows when to shift to the problem with the regular brakes. The Traction Control System next higher gear for best fuel (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light See Brake System Warning Light economy. on page 4‑26. should come on briefly when the See Manual Transmission on engine is started. For vehicles with a Driver page 8‑30 for more information. Information Center (DIC), see Driver If it does not, have the vehicle Information Center (DIC) on For the CTS-V, the tracer lights serviced by your dealer/retailer. page 4‑31 for all brake related DIC function as a performance up-shift If the system is working normally the messages. light. indicator light then goes off. These tracers flash to indicate when If the light comes on or stays on to shift to the next higher gear to while driving, there may be a avoid the engine speed limit. See problem with the TCS/StabiliTrak Automatic Transmission on and the vehicle may need service. page 8‑26 or Manual Transmission When this warning light is on, the on page 8‑30 for more information. system does not limit wheel spin. Adjust driving accordingly. Instruments and Controls 4-29

See Traction Control System (TCS) Stop the vehicle and turn off the When the Light is On Steady on page 8‑37 and StabiliTrak engine to avoid damage to the This indicates that one or more of System on page 8‑38 for more engine. A warning chime sounds the tires are significantly information. when this light is on. underinflated. See Engine Overheating on Engine Coolant A tire pressure message in the page 9‑23 for more information. Driver Information Center (DIC), can Temperature Warning accompany the light. See Tire Light Tire Pressure Light Messages on page 4‑48 for more information. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the tire loading information label. See Tire Pressure on page 9‑66 for more information. When the Light Flashes First and The engine coolant temperature For vehicles with a tire pressure Then is On Steady warning light comes on briefly when monitoring system, this light comes the engine is started. on briefly when the engine is This indicates that there may be a started. It provides information problem with the Tire Pressure If it does not, have the vehicle about tire pressures and the Tire Monitor System. The light flashes serviced by your dealer/retailer. Pressure Monitoring System. for about a minute and stays on If the system is working normally the steady for the remainder of the indicator light then goes off. ignition cycle. This sequence If the light comes on and stays on repeats with every ignition cycle. while driving, the vehicle may have See Tire Pressure Monitor a problem with the cooling system. Operation on page 9‑69 for more information. 4-30 Instruments and Controls

Engine Oil Pressure Light Security Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come on briefly as the engine is started. Someone could be burned. Check If it does not come on have the the oil as soon as possible and This light flashes when the security vehicle serviced by your dealer/ system is activated. have the vehicle serviced. retailer. For more information, see Vehicle Notice: Lack of proper engine oil If the light comes on and stays on, it Security on page 1‑23. maintenance can damage the means that oil is not flowing through engine. The repairs would not be the engine properly. The vehicle High-Beam on Light covered by the vehicle warranty. could be low on oil and might have Always follow the maintenance some other system problem. See schedule in this manual for your dealer/retailer. changing engine oil.

The high-beam on light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 5‑2 for more information. Instruments and Controls 4-31

Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the status of many of your vehicle's systems. The DIC is also The fog lamp light comes on when This light comes on whenever the used to display warning/status the fog lamps are in use. cruise control is set. messages. All messages appear in The light goes out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise the DIC display located at the lamps are turned off. See Fog control is turned off. See Cruise bottom of the instrument panel Lamps on page 5‑5 for more Control on page 8‑41 for more cluster. The DIC buttons are located information. information. on the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. Lamps on Reminder The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC displays the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The top line of the DIC display shows the DIC information. The bottom line of the DIC display This light comes on when the shows the compass. The compass taillamps are on. displays in the trip/fuel menus and in some vehicle information menus. 4-32 Instruments and Controls

If a problem is detected, a warning 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button y z (Menu Up/Down): Press this message appears on the display. to scroll through the trip and fuel button to scroll up and down the Take any message that appears on displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display menu items. the display seriously and remember Menu Items” following for more that clearing the message only information on these displays. Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items makes the message disappear, and T 3 (Trip/Fuel): The following does not correct the problem. (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll through the display menu items can be DIC Operation and Displays vehicle information displays. See displayed by pressing the trip/fuel “Vehicle Information Display Menu button: Items” following for more information Odometer on these displays. This display shows the distance the U (Customization): Press this vehicle has been driven in either button to scroll through each of the miles (mi) or kilometers (km). customization features. See Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑51 for Trip A or Trip B more information on the These displays show the current customization features. distance traveled since the last V (Set/Reset): Press this button to reset for each trip odometer in either reset certain DIC features and to miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both acknowledge DIC warning odometers can be used at the same messages and clear them from the time. Each trip odometer can be The Driver Information Center (DIC) DIC display. reset to zero separately by pressing has different displays which can be and holding the set/reset button for accessed by pressing the DIC a few seconds while the desired trip buttons located on the instrument odometer is displayed. panel, next to the steering wheel. Instruments and Controls 4-33

Fuel Range AVG (Average) Economy To reset the timer to zero, press and This display shows the approximate This display shows the approximate hold the set/reset button after the number of remaining miles (mi) or average miles per gallon (mpg) or timer has been stopped. kilometers (km) you can drive liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Inst (Instantaneous) Economy without refilling the fuel tank. This This number is calculated based on estimate is based on the current the number of mpg (L/100 km) This display shows the current fuel driving conditions and changes if recorded since the last time this economy in either miles per the driving conditions change. For display was reset. To reset this gallon (mpg) or liters per example, if you are driving in traffic display to zero, press the set/reset 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This and making frequent stops, the button. number reflects only the fuel display may read one number, but if economy that the vehicle has right you enter the freeway, the number Timer now and changes frequently as may change even though you still This display can be used like a driving conditions change. Unlike have the same amount of fuel in the stopwatch. You can record the time average economy, this display fuel tank. This is because different it takes to travel from one point to cannot be reset. driving conditions produce different another. To access the timer, press AVG (Average) Speed fuel economies. Generally, freeway the trip/fuel button until Timer This display shows the average driving produces better fuel 00:00:00 displays. economy than city driving. speed of the vehicle in either miles To turn on the timer, press the per hour (mph) or kilometers per Once the range drops below about set/reset button until the timer hour (km/h). This average is 30 miles (48 km) remaining, the starts. calculated based on the various display shows Low Range. To turn off the timer, press the vehicle speeds recorded since the If the vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel set/reset button again. The timer last reset of this display. To reset Level Low message displays. See stops and displays the end timing this display to zero, press the “Fuel Level Low” under Fuel System value. set/reset button. Messages on page 4‑42 for more information. 4-34 Instruments and Controls

Speedometer When the oil life is depleted, the Parking Assist This display shows a digital Change Engine Oil Soon message If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic speedometer in the DIC. The speed appears on the display. You should Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, displays in either miles per change the oil as soon as possible. this display allows the system to be hour (mph) or kilometers per In addition to the engine oil life turned on or off. Once in this hour (km/h). To change the units system monitoring the oil life, display, press the set/reset button to additional maintenance is from English to metric, see “Units” select between On or Off. The later in this section. recommended in the Maintenance URPA system automatically turns Schedule in this manual. See back on after each vehicle start. Blank Display Scheduled Maintenance on When the URPA system is turned This display shows no information. page 10‑3 and Engine Oil on off and the vehicle is shifted out of page 9‑10. P (Park), the DIC displays the Vehicle Information Display The Oil Life must be reset after Parking Assist Off message as a Menu Items each oil change. It does not reset reminder that the system has been T (Vehicle Information): The itself. Avoid accidental resetting of turned off. See Object Detection following display menu items can be the Oil Life system. It cannot be System Messages on page 4‑45 displayed by pressing the vehicle reset accurately until the next oil and Ultrasonic Parking Assist on information button: change. To reset the engine oil life page 8‑44 for more information. system, See Engine Oil Life System Tire Pressure Oil Life Remaining on page 9‑12. The display shows If the vehicle has this display, it 100% when the system is reset. The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC. The tire shows the estimated oil life Units remaining. If you see 99% Oil Life pressure is shown in either Remaining on the display, that This display allows you to select pounds per square inch (psi) or means that 99% of the current oil between English or Metric units of kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle life remains. measurement. Once in this display, information button until the DIC press the set/reset button to select displays Front Tire PSI (kPa) Left ## between English or Metric units. Right ##. Press the vehicle Instruments and Controls 4-35 information button again until the Calibrate Compass (RKE) System Operation (Keyless DIC displays Rear Tire PSI (kPa) The vehicle may have this feature. Access) on page 1‑7 for Left ## Right ##. The compass can be manually instructions on matching a keyless If a low tire pressure condition is calibrated. To calibrate the compass access transmitter to the vehicle. detected by the system while through the DIC, see “DIC To match an RKE transmitter to the driving, a message advising you to Compass” later in this section. vehicle: add air to a specific tire appears in Change Compass Zone 1. Press the vehicle information the display. See Tire Pressure on button until Press To Relearn page 9‑66 and Tire Messages on The vehicle may have this feature. Remote Key displays. page 4‑48 for more information. To change the compass zone through the DIC, see “DIC 2. Press the set/reset button until Battery Voltage Compass” later in this section. Remote Key Learning Active is This display shows the current displayed. Relearn Remote Key battery voltage. The vehicle's 3. Press and hold the lock and charging system regulates voltage If the vehicle has the Remote unlock buttons on the first based on the state of the battery. Keyless Entry (RKE) system, this transmitter at the same time for The battery voltage may fluctuate display allows you to match the about 15 seconds. when viewing this information on the transmitter to the vehicle. This DIC. This is normal. procedure will erase all previously On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitter If there is a problem with the battery learned transmitters. Therefore, they must be relearned as additional learned will match driver 1 and charging system, the charging the second will match driver 2. system light illuminates and/or the transmitters. DIC displays a message. See If the vehicle has the keyless A chime sounds indicating that Charging System Light on access system, see the Keyless the transmitter is matched. page 4‑23, Battery Voltage and Access information for Remote Charging Messages on page 4‑37 Keyless Entry (RKE) System and Battery Load Management on Operation (Key Access) on page 5‑6 for more information. page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry 4-36 Instruments and Controls

4. To learn additional transmitters Lateral Acceleration (CTS-V Only) Vehicle Messages at this time, repeat Step 3. Lateral acceleration is a measure of Messages are displayed on the DIC Each vehicle can have a how hard you are taking a corner. to notify the driver that the status of maximum of eight learned For example, when you are turning the vehicle has changed and that transmitters. right you will feel your body push to some action may be needed by the the left. This force is measured in a 5. To exit the programming mode, driver to correct the condition. "g". This gage will display from you must cycle the key to Multiple messages may appear one 0.0 g to 2.0 g. LOCK/OFF. after another. Trans (Transmission) Temp Blank Display Some messages may not require (Temperature) (CTS-V Only) This display shows no information. immediate action, but you can V This display shows the transmission DIC Compass press (Set/Reset) to fluid temperature in either degrees acknowledge that you received the Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees The vehicle may have a compass in messages and to clear them from Celsius (°C). the Driver Information Center (DIC). the display. See Compass on page 4‑11 for Oil Pressure (CTS-V Only) information. Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they This display shows the oil pressure are more urgent. These messages in either pounds per square require action before they can be inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). cleared. You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. Instruments and Controls 4-37

The following are the possible pressing the vehicle information To help the generator recharge the messages that can be displayed button until Battery Voltage is battery quickly, you can reduce the and some information about them. displayed. load on the electrical system by turning off the accessories. Battery Volts Low Battery Voltage and The normal battery voltage range is Charging Messages This message displays when the 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor electrical system is charging less battery voltage on the DIC by Battery Saver Active than 10 volts or the battery has pressing the vehicle information been drained. This message displays when the button until Battery Voltage is system detects that the battery If this message appears displayed. immediately after starting the voltage is dropping below expected Service Battery Charging levels. The battery saver system engine, it is possible that the starts reducing certain features of generator can still recharge the System the vehicle that you may be able to battery. The battery should recharge This message displays when there notice. At the point that the features while driving, but may take a few is a problem with the generator and are disabled, this message is hours to do so. Consider using an battery charging systems. Driving displayed. It means that the vehicle auxiliary charger to boost the with this problem could drain the is trying to save the charge in the battery after returning home or to a battery. Turn off all unnecessary battery. final destination. Make sure you accessories. Stop and turn off the follow the manufacturer's Turn off all unnecessary vehicle as soon as it is safe to do instructions. accessories to allow the battery to so. Have the electrical system recharge. If this message appears while checked by your dealer/retailer. driving or after starting the vehicle Under certain conditions, the The normal battery voltage range is and stays on, have it checked charging system light may also turn 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor immediately to determine the cause on in the instrument panel cluster. battery voltage on the DIC by of this problem. See Charging System Light on page 4‑23 for more information. 4-38 Instruments and Controls

Brake System Messages Press Brake To Start Engine Service Brake Assist (Automatic Transmission Only) Park Brake Released This message displays if there is a If the vehicle has the keyless problem with the brake system. The For vehicles with the Electric access system, this message brake system warning light and the Parking Brake, this message displays if you try to start the engine antilock brake system (ABS) displays when the parking brake without having the brake pressed. warning light may also display on has been released from the set The brake needs to be pressed the instrument panel cluster. See position. See the Electric Parking when starting the engine. See Brake System Warning Light on Brake information under Parking Ignition Positions (Key Access) on page 4‑26 and Antilock Brake Brake (Manual) on page 8‑34 or page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions System (ABS) Warning Light on Parking Brake (Electric) on (Keyless Access) on page 8‑19 for page 4‑27 for more information. page 8‑35 for more information. more information. Stop as soon as possible and turn Park Brake Set off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle Release Park Brake Switch and check for the message on the For vehicles with the Electric For vehicles with the Electric DIC display. If the message displays Parking Brake, this message Parking Brake, this message immediately or again after you begin displays when the parking brake displays if the Park Brake switch is driving, the brake system needs has been applied to the set position. pulled while the vehicle is moving. service. See your dealer/retailer as See the Electric Parking Brake See the Electric Parking Brake soon as possible. See Antilock information under Parking Brake information under Parking Brake Brake System (ABS) on page 8‑33 (Manual) on page 8‑34 or Parking (Manual) on page 8‑34 or Parking for more information. Brake (Electric) on page 8‑35 for Brake (Electric) on page 8‑35 for Service Brake System more information. more information. This message displays, while the ignition is on, when the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on. See Instruments and Controls 4-39

Brake System Warning Light on Compass Messages Door Ajar Messages page 4‑26 for more information. This message may also be Calibrating Drive In Circles Driver Door Open displayed for other brake system This message displays when This message displays when the problems. Have the brake system calibrating the compass. Drive the driver door is not closed completely. serviced by your dealer/retailer as vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph Close the door completely. soon as possible. (8 km/h) to complete the calibration. Hood Open Service Park Brake See “DIC Compass” under Driver Information Center (DIC) on This message displays when the For vehicles with the Electric page 4‑31 for more information. hood is not closed completely. Make Parking Brake, this message sure that the hood is closed displays if a problem is detected Calibration Complete completely. with the electric parking brake This message displays when the system. See your dealer/retailer for compass calibration is complete. Left Rear Door Open service. See “DIC Compass” under Driver This message displays when the Step On Brake To Release Information Center (DIC) on driver side rear door is not closed Park Brake page 4‑31 for more information. completely. Make sure that the door is closed completely. For vehicles with the Electric Cruise Control Messages Parking Brake, this message Passenger Door Open displays if you try to release the Cruise Set To XXX MPH (km/h) This message displays when the park brake system without first This message displays whenever passenger side front door is not pressing the brake pedal. See the the cruise control is set. See Cruise closed completely. Make sure that Electric Parking Brake information Control on page 8 41 for more the door is closed completely. under Parking Brake (Manual) on ‑ information. page 8‑34 or Parking Brake (Electric) on page 8‑35 for more information. 4-40 Instruments and Controls

Rear Access Open (Wagon) See Engine Coolant Temperature This message displays when the Gage on page 4 20. To avoid engine coolant temperature is too This message displays when the ‑ added strain on a hot engine, the air hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to liftgate is not closed completely. conditioning compressor idle until it cools down. If the Make sure that the liftgate is closed automatically turns off. When the message does not clear in a few completely. coolant temperature returns to minutes or if the overheat light stays Right Rear Door Open normal, the air conditioning on, shut the vehicle off and have it compressor turns back on. You can serviced before driving again. See This message displays when the continue to drive the vehicle. Engine Coolant Temperature passenger side rear door is not Warning Light on page 4‑29. closed completely. Make sure that If this message continues to appear, the door is closed completely. have the system repaired by your See Overheated Engine Protection dealer/retailer as soon as possible Operating Mode on page 9‑24 for Trunk Open (Sedan) to avoid damage to the engine. information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. This message displays when the Engine Overheated Idle Engine trunk is not closed completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed Notice: If you drive your vehicle Engine Oil Messages completely. while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may Change Engine Oil Soon Engine Cooling System occur. If an overheat warning When this message displays, it Messages appears on the instrument panel means that service is required for cluster and/or DIC, stop the the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. Engine Hot A/C (Air vehicle as soon as possible. Do See Scheduled Maintenance on Conditioning) Off not increase the engine speed page 10‑3 and Engine Oil on above normal idling speed. See page 9‑10 for more information. This message displays when the Engine Overheating on page 9‑23 engine coolant becomes hotter than for more information. the normal operating temperature. Instruments and Controls 4-41

When you reset the Change Engine Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine Engine Power Messages Oil Soon message by clearing it Notice: If you drive your vehicle from the display, you still must reset Engine Power Is Reduced while the engine oil pressure is the engine oil life system separately. low, severe engine damage may This message displays when the For more information on resetting occur. If a low oil pressure engine power is being reduced to the engine oil life system, see warning appears on the protect the engine from damage. Engine Oil Life System on instrument panel cluster and/or There could be several malfunctions page 9 12. ‑ DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as that might cause this message. Engine Oil Low Add Oil possible. Do not drive the vehicle Reduced engine power can affect until the cause of the low oil the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If the vehicle has an oil level sensor, pressure is corrected. See Engine If this message is on, but there is no this message displays if the oil level Oil on page 9‑10 for more reduction in performance, proceed in the vehicle is low. Check the oil information. to your destination. The level and correct it as necessary. performance may be reduced the You may need to let the vehicle cool This message displays when the next time the vehicle is driven. The or warm up and cycle the ignition to vehicle's engine oil pressure is low. vehicle may be driven at a reduced be sure this message clears. The oil pressure light may also speed while this message is on, but appear on the instrument panel acceleration and speed may be This message clears itself after cluster. See Engine Oil Pressure 10 seconds, until the next ignition reduced. Anytime this message Light on page 4‑30. See Engine Oil cycle. See Engine Oil on page 9 10 stays on, the vehicle should be ‑ on page 9‑10 for more information. for additional information. taken to your dealer/retailer for Stop the vehicle immediately, as service as soon as possible. engine damage can result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible when this message is displayed. 4-42 Instruments and Controls

Fuel System Messages Electronic Key Already Known devices are cell phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios, If the vehicle has the keyless Fuel Level Low power inverters, or similar items. access system, this message Try moving the keyless access This message displays when the displays if you try to match a transmitter away from these vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel transmitter that has already been devices when starting the tank as soon as possible. A chime learned. See the Keyless Access vehicle. In addition, PDA devices may sound when this message information for Remote Keyless and remote garage and gate displays. See Filling the Tank on Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key openers may also generate page 8‑52. Access) on page 1 5 or Remote ‑ Electromagnetic Interference Keyless Entry (RKE) System Tighten Gas Cap (EMI) that may interfere with the Operation (Keyless Access) on keyless access transmitter. Do This message displays when the page 1 7 for more information. ‑ not carry the keyless access fuel cap has not been fully transmitter in the same pocket or tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to Electronic Key Not Detected bag as these devices. ensure that it is on and tightened If the vehicle has the keyless properly. access system, this message . The vehicle is experiencing displays if the vehicle does not Electromagnetic Interference Key and Lock Messages detect the presence of a transmitter (EMI). Some locations, such as when you have attempted to start airports, automatic toll booths, Accessory Mode Active the vehicle or a vehicle door has and some gas stations have EMI If the vehicle has the keyless just closed. The following conditions fields which may interfere with access system, this message may cause this message to appear: the keyless access transmitter. displays when the accessory mode . Driver-added equipment plugged is active. See Ignition Positions (Key into the accessory power outlet Access) on page 8‑18 or Ignition on the center console is causing Positions (Keyless Access) on interference. Examples of these page 8‑19 for more information. Instruments and Controls 4-43

Electronic Key Not Detected Learn Delay Active Wait Restart Allowed XX Min (Minutes) If the vehicle has the keyless If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this message access system, this message displays when the keyless access displays when matching new transmitter is not detected inside the transmitters to the vehicle. See the vehicle while you are trying to turn Keyless Access information for the ignition off. The vehicle may be Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) near a strong radio antenna signal System Operation (Key Access) on causing the keyless access system page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry to be jammed. If you have the (RKE) System Operation (Keyless keyless access transmitter with you, Access) on page 1‑7 for more If moving the transmitter to get out of the vehicle and lock the information. different locations within the doors. If you do not have the vehicle does not help, place the keyless access transmitter with you, Maximum # Electronic Keys transmitter in the center console you will be able to start the vehicle Learned transmitter pocket with the again within five minutes, or until the If the vehicle has the keyless buttons facing the front of the vehicle's content theft deterrent access system, this message vehicle and then start the system is armed. See Starting the displays when the maximum vehicle. Engine on page 8‑20 for more number of transmitters have been . The vehicle's battery voltage is information. learned. See the Keyless Access low. The battery voltage must be information for Remote Keyless above 10 volts for the keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key access transmitter to be Access) on page 1‑5 or Remote detected properly. Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) on page 1‑7 for more information. 4-44 Instruments and Controls

Press Start Control To Remote Key Learning Active Rotate Control To Off Position Learn Keys If the vehicle has the Remote If the vehicle has the keyless If the vehicle has the keyless Keyless Entry (RKE) system, this access system, this message access system, this message message displays while matching displays when the ignition is in displays when matching new new transmitters to the vehicle. See ACC/ACCESSORY and the shift transmitters to the vehicle. See the “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your lever has just been moved to Keyless Access information for Vehicle” under the Key Access P (Park). The message displays as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) information for Remote Keyless a reminder to turn the ignition off. To System Operation (Key Access) on Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key avoid draining the battery, make page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry Access) on page 1‑5 or Remote sure the ignition is turned off before (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Keyless Entry (RKE) System leaving the vehicle. Access) on page 1‑7 for more Operation (Keyless Access) on information. page 1‑7 and Driver Information Service Keyless Start System Center (DIC) on page 4‑31 for If the vehicle has the keyless Ready To Learn more information. access system, this message Electronic Key # X displays when there is a problem Replace Battery In Remote Key If the vehicle has the keyless with this feature. See your dealer/ access system, this message This message displays when the retailer. displays while matching new battery in the Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to the vehicle. See the (RKE) or keyless access transmitter Lamp Messages Keyless Access information for needs to be replaced. To replace Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the battery, see “Battery AFL (Adaptive Forward System Operation (Key Access) on Replacement” under Remote Lighting) Lamps Need Service page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry Keyless Entry (RKE) System This message displays when the (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Operation (Key Access) on Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) Access) on page 1‑7 for more page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry system is disabled and needs information. (RKE) System Operation (Keyless service. See your dealer/retailer. Access) on page 1‑7. Instruments and Controls 4-45

See Adaptive Forward Lighting Object Detection System Ride Control System (AFL) on page 5‑4 for more information. Messages Messages Automatic Light Control Off Parking Assist Off All Wheel Drive Off This message displays when the If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic If the vehicle has the All-Wheel automatic headlamps are turned off. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, Drive (AWD) system, this message after the vehicle has been started, displays when there is a temporary Automatic Light Control On this message displays to remind the condition making the AWD system driver that the URPA system has unavailable. The vehicle will run in This message displays when the been turned off. Press the set/reset 2WD. This could be caused by: automatic headlamps are turned on. button to acknowledge this message . Loss of wheel or vehicle speed Turn Signal On and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system back on, see . AWD system overheat This message displays as a “Parking Assist” under Driver . Certain vehicle electrical reminder to turn off the turn signal if Information Center (DIC) on you drive the vehicle for more than conditions page 4‑31. See Ultrasonic Parking about 1.6 km (1 mile) with a turn Assist on page 8‑44 for more This message turns off when the signal on. A multiple chime sounds information. above conditions are no longer when this message displays. present and by resetting the Service Parking Assist warning message. If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic To reset the warning message, turn Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, the ignition off and then back on this message displays if there is a again after 30 seconds. If the problem with the URPA system. See message stays on, see your dealer/ Ultrasonic Parking Assist on retailer right away. See All-Wheel page 8‑44 for more information. Drive on page 8‑32 for more See your dealer/retailer for service. information. 4-46 Instruments and Controls

Service All Wheel Drive notice that the effort required to Service Suspension System steer the vehicle increases or feels This message displays if a problem This message displays when there heavier, but you will still be able to occurs with the All-Wheel Drive is a problem with the Magnetic Ride steer the vehicle. See Steering on (AWD) system. The vehicle will run Control system. See Magnetic Ride page 8‑5. in 2WD. This could be caused by: Control on page 8‑40 for more information. Have the vehicle . An electronics problem Service Stabilitrak serviced by your dealer/retailer. . An AWD system oil overheat This message displays if there has been a problem detected with the Service Traction Control . Worn out or overheated clutch StabiliTrak® system. The TCS/ This message displays when there plates StabiliTrak warning light on the is a problem with the Traction . instrument panel cluster also Various electrical issues Control System (TCS). The TCS/ comes on. If this message appears, stop as StabiliTrak warning light on the soon as possible and turn off the If this message comes on while you instrument panel cluster also comes ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the are driving, pull off the road as soon on. When this message displays, vehicle and check for the message as possible and stop carefully. Try the system will not limit wheel spin. on the DIC display. If the message resetting the system by turning the Adjust your driving accordingly. See is still displayed or appears again ignition off then back on. If this your dealer/retailer for service. See when you begin driving, the system message still stays on or comes Traction Control System (TCS) on needs service. See your dealer/ back on again while you are driving, page 8‑37 for more information. retailer right away. the vehicle needs service. Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by Stabilitrak Competitive Mode Service Power Steering your dealer/retailer as soon as This message displays when the This message displays if a problem possible. See StabiliTrak System on Competitive Driving mode is is detected with the speed variable page 8‑38 for more information. selected. When in this mode, the assist steering system. When this Traction Control System (TCS) will message is displayed, you may not be operating and the TCS/ StabiliTrak warning light will turn on. Instruments and Controls 4-47

Adjust your driving accordingly. See on. To turn the StabiliTrak system The message turns off as soon as “Competitive Driving Mode” under on or off, see StabiliTrak System on the conditions that caused the Traction Control System (TCS) on page 8‑38. message to be displayed are no page 8‑37 for more information. There are several conditions that longer present. Stabilitrak Not Ready can cause this message to appear. Suspension Mode Sport This message may display after first . One condition is overheating, (CTS-V Only) driving the vehicle and exceeding which could occur if StabiliTrak This message will be displayed 30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds. activates continuously for an when sport mode is selected using The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light extended period of time. the Magnetic Ride Control button in on the instrument panel cluster also . The message also displays if the the center of the instrument panel. comes on. The StabiliTrak system is brake system warning light is on. See Magnetic Ride Control on not functional until the message has See Brake System Warning page 8‑40 for more information. turned off. See StabiliTrak System Light on page 4‑26. on page 8‑38 for more information. Suspension Mode Tour . The message could display if the (CTS-V Only) Stabilitrak Off stability system takes longer than usual to complete its This message will be displayed This message displays when you diagnostic checks due to driving when touring mode is selected turn off StabiliTrak, or when the conditions. using the Magnetic Ride Control stability control has been button in the center of the automatically disabled. The TCS/ . The message displays if an instrument panel. See Magnetic StabiliTrak warning light on the engine or vehicle related Ride Control on page 8‑40 for more instrument panel cluster also problem has been detected and information. comes on. the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer. To realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak 4-48 Instruments and Controls

Airbag System Messages Immobilizer Operation (Keyless Have the climate control system Access) on page 1‑25 for more serviced by your dealer/retailer if Service Air Bag information. you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency. This message displays when there Start Aborted By Theft is a problem with the airbag system. Deterrent Service Vehicle Soon Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately. See This message displays if there is a This message displays when a Airbag Readiness Light on communication problem between non-emissions related malfunction page 4‑21 for more information. the keyless access system and the occurs. Have the vehicle serviced vehicle. The vehicle cannot be by your dealer/retailer as soon as Anti-Theft Alarm System started when this message displays. possible. See your dealer/retailer for service. Messages Tire Messages Theft Attempted Service Theft Deterrent System This message displays if the Service Tire Monitor System This message displays when there theft-deterrent system has detected This message displays if a part on is a problem with the theft-deterrent a break-in attempt while you were the Tire Pressure Monitor System system programmed in the key. away from the vehicle. See (TPMS) is not working properly. The A fault has been detected in the Anti-Theft Alarm System on tire pressure light also flashes and system which means that the page 1‑23 for more information. then remains on during the same system is disabled and it is not ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure protecting the vehicle. The vehicle Service Vehicle Messages Light on page 4‑29. Several usually restarts; however, you may conditions may cause this message want to take the vehicle to your Service A/C System to appear. See Tire Pressure dealer/retailer before turning off the Monitor Operation on page 9‑69 for engine. See Immobilizer Operation This message displays when the electronic sensors that control the more information. If the warning (Key Access) on page 1‑24 or air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. Instruments and Controls 4-49 comes on and stays on, there may The low tire pressure warning light Transmission Messages be a problem with the TPMS. See will also come on. See Tire your dealer/retailer. Pressure Light on page 4‑29. Differential Hot, Reduce Speed (CTS-V Only) Tire Learning Active If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you This message displays and a chime This message displays when the can. Inflate the tires by adding air sounds if the differential fluid Tire Pressure Monitor System until the tire pressure is equal to the temperature exceeds 150°C (TPMS) is re-learning the tire values shown on the Tire Loading (300°F). Driving aggressively or at positions on the vehicle. The tire Information label. See Tires on high speeds can cause the positions must be re-learned after page 9‑58, Vehicle Load Limits on differential fluid temperature to be rotating the tires or after replacing a page 8‑12, and Tire Pressure on higher than normal. If this message tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on page 9‑66. appears, you may continue to drive page 9‑73, Tire Pressure Monitor If the vehicle does not have a spare at a slower speed. If you have been System on page 9‑68, and Tire operating the vehicle under normal tire, the message will display “Use Pressure on page 9‑66 for more driving conditions, the vehicle may information. Inflator Kit in Trunk”. Use the inflator kit to inflate the tires to the correct need service. See your dealer/ Tire Low Add Air To Tire pressure. See Tire Sealant and retailer for an inspection. On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Compressor Kit on page 9‑84 for To acknowledge the message, Monitor System (TPMS), this more information. press V . The message reappears message displays when the More than one tire pressure and a chime sounds every pressure in one or more of the message can be received at a time. two minutes until this condition vehicle’s tires is low. This message To read the other messages, press changes. If you do not clear the also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT the set/reset button. message, it will remain on until the FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT condition changes. The DIC display also shows the tire REAR to indicate the location of the pressure values. See Driver low tire. Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑31. 4-50 Instruments and Controls

Service Transmission Sport Mode Speed Limited To This message displays when there This message displays when the XXX MPH (km/h) is a problem with the vehicle's vehicle is in sport mode. The This message displays when the transmission. Have the vehicle transmission gear position will also vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph serviced by your dealer/retailer. be displayed when DSC is in use. (128 km/h) because the vehicle See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” detects a problem in the speed Shift To Park (Automatic under Automatic Transmission on variable assist steering, magnetic Transmission Only) page 8‑26 for more information. ride control, or automatic leveling control systems. Have the vehicle If the vehicle has the keyless Transmission Hot Idle Engine access system, this message serviced by your dealer/retailer. displays if the vehicle is not in This message displays when the P (Park) while the engine is being transmission fluid in the vehicle is Washer Fluid Messages turned off. The vehicle will be in too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shift to idle until the transmission cools Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid lever is moved to P (Park), the down or until this message is This message displays when the ignition needs to be turned off. If the removed. vehicle is low on windshield washer ignition is not turned off, the vehicle fluid. Refill the windshield washer will remain in ACC/ACCESSORY. Vehicle Speed Messages fluid reservoir as soon as possible. To avoid draining the battery, turn See Washer Fluid on page 9‑25 for the ignition to off before leaving the Ice Possible Drive With Care more information. vehicle. This message displays when the outside temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly. Instruments and Controls 4-51

Vehicle 2. Press the customization Press the customization button until button to enter the feature the Display Language screen Personalization settings menu. appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access Vehicle customization allows certain Feature Settings Menu Items the settings for this feature. Then features to be programmed for one press the menu up/down button to preferred setting. The following are customization features that allow you to program scroll through the following settings: Only the customization options settings to the vehicle: English (default): All messages available will be displayed on will appear in English. the DIC. Display In English Deutsch: All messages will appear The default settings were preset This feature will only display if a in German. when the vehicle left the factory, but language other than English has may have been changed. been set. This feature allows for Italiano: All messages will appear changing the language of the DIC in Italian. The customization preferences are messages back to English. automatically recalled. Francais: All messages will appear Press the customization button until in French. To change customization V preferences, use the following the Press To Display In English Espanol: All messages will appear procedure. screen appears on the DIC display. in Spanish. Press the set/reset button once to Entering the Feature select English as the language in Portugese: All messages will Settings Menu which all DIC messages will appear. appear in Portugese. 1. Turn the ignition on. Display Language Arabic: All messages will appear in Arabic. To avoid excessive drain on the This feature allows you to select the battery, it is recommended that language in which the DIC Chinese: All messages will appear the headlamps are turned off. messages will appear. in Chinese. Japanese: All messages will appear in Japanese. 4-52 Instruments and Controls

No Change: No change will be At Vehicle Speed (default on Press the customization button until made to this feature. The current Manual Transmission): The Auto Door Unlock appears on the setting will remain. vehicle's doors automatically lock DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the when the vehicle speed is above button once to access the settings set/reset button while the desired 5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds. for this feature. Then press the setting is displayed on the DIC. No Change: No change will be menu up/down button to scroll made to this feature. The current through the following settings: Auto Door Lock setting will remain. Off: None of the doors will This feature allows you to select To select a setting, press the automatically unlock. when the vehicle's doors will set/reset button while the desired Driver Only At Off: Only the automatically lock. See Automatic setting is displayed on the DIC. driver's door will unlock when the Door Locks on page 1‑15 for more ignition is turned off. information. Auto Door Unlock All At Off (default on Manual Press the customization button until This feature allows you to select Transmission): All of the doors will Auto Door Lock appears on the DIC whether or not the door(s) will unlock when the ignition is display. Press the set/reset button automatically unlock. It also allows turned off. once to access the settings for this you to select which doors and when feature. Then press the menu they will automatically unlock. See All In Park (default on Automatic up/down button to scroll through Automatic Door Locks on Transmission) (Automatic the following settings: page 1‑15 for more information. Transmission Only): All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is Shift Out Of Park (default on shifted into P (Park). Automatic Transmission) (Automatic Transmission Only): No Change: No change will be The vehicle's doors automatically made to this feature. The current lock when the doors are closed and setting will remain. the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Instruments and Controls 4-53

To select a setting, press the Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ set/reset button while the desired Remote Door Lock appears on the reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. button once to access the settings Remote Door Lock Feedback for this feature. Then press the Remote Door Unlock Feedback This feature allows you to select the menu up/down button to scroll This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Off: There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or when you press the lock button on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter, or when the transmitter. keyless access transmitter, or when the vehicle is automatically locked the vehicle is automatically using the Keyless Locking feature. Lights Only: The exterior lamps unlocked using the Keyless Unlock You will not receive feedback when will flash when you press the lock feature. You will not receive locking the vehicle with the button on the transmitter. feedback when unlocking the transmitter if the doors are open. Horn Only: The horn will sound on vehicle with the transmitter if the See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the second press of the lock button doors are open. See Remote System Operation (Key Access) on on the transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Key Access) on (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Horn & Lights (default): The page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry Access) on page 1‑7 or “Keyless exterior lamps will flash when you (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Locking” later in this section for press the lock button on the Access) on page 1‑7 or “Keyless more information. transmitter, and the horn will sound Unlock” later in this section for more when the lock button is pressed information. again within five seconds of the previous command. No Change: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. 4-54 Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until Press the customization button until periods after unlocking the vehicle Remote Door Unlock appears on Exit Lighting appears on the DIC using the Remote Keyless Entry the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button (RKE) or keyless access transmitter. button once to access the settings once to access the settings for this Press the customization button until for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the menu up/ Approach Lighting appears on the menu up/down button to scroll down button to scroll through the DIC display. Press the set/reset through the following settings: following settings: button once to access the settings Lights Off: The exterior lamps will Off: The exterior lamps will not for this feature. Then press the not flash when you press the unlock turn on. menu up/down button to scroll button on the transmitter. 10 Seconds (default): The exterior through the following settings: Lights On (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 10 seconds. Off: The exterior lights will not turn lamps will flash when you press the 30 Seconds: The exterior lamps on when you unlock the vehicle with unlock button on the transmitter. will stay on for 30 seconds. the transmitter. No Change: No change will be 2 Minutes: The exterior lamps will On (default): If it is dark enough made to this feature. The current stay on for two minutes. outside, the exterior lights will turn setting will remain. on briefly when you unlock the No Change: No change will be vehicle with the transmitter. To select a setting, press the made to this feature. The current set/reset button while the desired setting will remain. The lights will remain on for setting is displayed on the DIC. 20 seconds or until the lock button To select a setting, press the on the transmitter is pressed, or the Exit Lighting set/reset button while the desired vehicle is no longer off. See Remote This feature allows you to select the setting is displayed on the DIC. Keyless Entry (RKE) System amount of time you want the Approach Lighting Operation (Key Access) on exterior lamps to remain on when it page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry is dark enough outside. This This feature allows you to select (RKE) System Operation (Keyless happens after the key is turned from whether or not to have the exterior Access) on page 1‑7 for more ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. lights turn on briefly during low light information. Instruments and Controls 4-55

No Change: No change will be To select a setting, press the set/ if needed. A person approaching the made to this feature. The current reset button while the desired outside of the locked vehicle without setting will remain. setting is displayed on the DIC. an authorized keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able To select a setting, press the Keyless Locking set/reset button while the desired to open the door, even with a setting is displayed on the DIC. If the vehicle has the keyless transmitter in the vehicle. See the access system, this feature allows Keyless Access information for Factory Settings you to select whether the doors Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) This feature allows you to set all of automatically lock during normal System Operation (Key Access) on the customization features back to vehicle exit. When the ignition is page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry their factory default settings. turned off and all doors become (RKE) System Operation (Keyless closed, the vehicle will determine Access) on page 1‑7 for more Press the customization button until how many keyless access information. Factory Settings appears on the transmitters remain in the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset You may temporarily disable the interior. If at least one keyless keyless locking feature by pressing button once to access the settings access transmitter has been for this feature. Then press the the door unlock switch for removed from the interior of the three seconds on an open door. menu up/down button to scroll vehicle, the doors will lock after through the following settings: Keyless locking will then remain several seconds. disabled until a door lock switch is Restore All (default): The For example, if there are two pressed or until the power mode customization features will be set to keyless access transmitters in the transitions from the off power mode. their factory default settings. vehicle and one is removed, the To select whether the horn sounds No Change: The customization other will be locked in. The keyless or the lights flash when the vehicle access transmitter locked in the features will not be set to their is locked, see “Remote Door Lock” factory default settings. vehicle can still be used to start the earlier in this section. vehicle or unlock the doors, 4-56 Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until Keyless Unlock feature. Then press the menu Keyless Locking appears on the If the vehicle has the keyless up/down button to scroll through the DIC display. Press the set/reset access system, this feature allows following settings: button once to access the settings you to select which doors will Entry Door Only: Only the driver's for this feature. Then press the automatically unlock when you door will automatically unlock when menu up/down button to scroll approach the vehicle with the you approach the vehicle with the through the following settings: keyless access transmitter and keyless access transmitter and Off (default): The keyless locking open the driver's door. See the open the driver's door. feature will be disabled. Keyless Access information for All Doors (default): All doors will On: The keyless locking feature will Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) automatically unlock when you be enabled. System Operation (Key Access) on approach the vehicle with the page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry The doors will automatically lock keyless access transmitter and (RKE) System Operation (Keyless open the driver's door. several seconds after you turn the Access) on page 1‑7 for more ignition off, remove a keyless information. No Change: No change will be access transmitter from the interior made to this feature. The current of the vehicle, and close all of the To select whether the lights flash setting will remain. doors. when the vehicle is unlocked, see “Remote Door Unlock” earlier in this To select a setting, press the No Change: No change will be section. set/reset button while the desired made to this feature. The current setting is displayed on the DIC. setting will remain. Press the customization button until Keyless Unlock appears on the DIC Chime Volume To select a setting, press the display. Press the set/reset button This feature allows you to select the set/reset button while the desired once to access the settings for this setting is displayed on the DIC. volume level of the chime. Instruments and Controls 4-57

Press the customization button until feature. See the “Memory Seat” parked and the driver door is Chime Volume appears on the DIC information under Power Seat opened, or after pressing the easy display. Press the set/reset button Adjustment on page 2‑4 for more exit seat button. once to access the settings for this information. The automatic easy exit seat feature. Then press the menu up/ Press the customization button until movement will only occur one time down button to scroll through the Easy Exit Recall appears on the after the driver door is opened. Also following settings: DIC display. Press the set/reset the driver's seat, outside mirrors and Normal: The chime volume will be button once to access the settings steering wheel will automatically set to a normal level. for this feature. Then press the move to the stored driving position Loud: The chime volume will be menu up/down button to scroll when the unlock button on the set to a loud level. through the following settings: keyless access transmitter is pressed or when the driver door is No Change: No change will be Automatic Off (default): No automatic seat exit recall or remote opened. The steering column will made to this feature. The current also move on vehicles with the setting will remain. memory recall will occur. The easy exit seat recall will only occur after power tilt and telescopic steering There is no default for chime pressing the easy exit seat button. feature. volume. The volume will stay at the The automatic memory recall will Automatic On (Key Access): If last known setting. only occur after pressing the the features are enabled though the To select a setting, press the set/ memory buttons. Easy Exit Setup menu, the driver's reset button while the desired Automatic On (Keyless Access): seat will move back, and if the setting is displayed on the DIC. If the features are enabled though vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, the Easy Exit Recall the Easy Exit Setup menu, the driver's seat will move back, and if power steering column will move up If the vehicle has this feature, it the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and forward when the key is allows you to select your preference and telescopic steering feature, the removed from the ignition or after for the automatic easy exit seat power steering column will move up pressing the easy exit seat button. feature and the remote memory and forward when the vehicle is 4-58 Instruments and Controls

The automatic easy exit seat Easy Exit Setup All (default): The driver's seat and movement will only occur one time If the vehicle has this feature, it the steering wheel tilt and steering after the key is removed from the allows you to select which areas will column telescope features will ignition. If the automatic movement recall with the automatic easy exit recall, if the vehicle has this option. has already occurred, and you put seat feature. The remote memory No Change: No change will be the key back in the ignition and recall feature is unaffected by this made to this feature. The current remove it again, the seat and selection. It also allows you to turn setting will remain. steering column will stay in the off the automatic easy exit feature. original exit position, unless a To select a setting, press the set/ See the “Memory Seat” information reset button while the desired memory recall took place prior to under Power Seat Adjustment on removing the key again. setting is displayed on the DIC. page 2‑4 and “Easy Exit Recall” Also, the driver's seat, outside earlier for more information. Exiting the Feature mirrors and steering wheel will Press the customization button until Settings Menu automatically move to the stored Easy Exit Setup appears on the DIC The feature settings menu will be driving position when the unlock display. Press the set/reset button button on the Remote Keyless Entry exited when any of the following once to access the settings for this occurs: (RKE) transmitter is pressed. The feature. Then press the menu up/ steering column will also move on down button to scroll through the . The vehicle is no longer in vehicles with the power tilt and following settings: ON/RUN. telescopic steering feature. Off: No automatic seat exit will . The trip/fuel or vehicle No Change: No change will be recall. information DIC buttons are made to this feature. The current pressed. setting will remain. Tilt/Telescope: The steering wheel tilt and steering column telescope . The end of the feature settings To select a setting, press the set/ features will recall. menu is reached and exited. reset button while the desired . A 40 second time period has setting is displayed on the DIC. elapsed with no selection made. Instruments and Controls 4-59

® OnStar System ] : Push this red emergency For a full description of OnStar button to get priority help from services and system limitations, see specially trained OnStar emergency the OnStar Owner's Guide in the advisors. glove box. X : Push this button for hands-free, OnStar service is subject to the voice-activated calling and to give OnStar terms and conditions voice commands for turn-by-turn included in the OnStar Subscriber navigation. Information. ® OnStar uses several innovative Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar service cannot work unless technologies and live advisors to Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, the vehicle is in a place where provide a wide range of safety, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside OnStar has an agreement with a security, navigation, diagnostics, Assistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigation wireless service provider for service and calling services. and Hands-Free Calling are in that area. OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in Automatic Crash Response available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available on all a place where the wireless service In a crash, built in sensors can vehicles. For more information see provider OnStar has hired for that automatically alert an OnStar the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit area has coverage, network advisor who is immediately www.onstar.com (U.S.) or capacity and reception when the connected to the vehicle to see if www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact service is needed, and technology you need help. OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR that is compatible with the OnStar (1‐888‐466‐7827) or service. Not all services are How OnStar Service Works available everywhere, particularly in TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to Q remote or enclosed areas, or at all : This blue button connects you speak with an OnStar advisor times. to a specially trained OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. to verify your account information and to answer questions. 4-60 Instruments and Controls

The OnStar system can record and The vehicle must have a working Your Responsibility transmit vehicle information. This electrical system, including Increase the volume of the radio if information is automatically sent to adequate battery power, for the the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. an OnStar call center when Q is OnStar equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar cannot If the light next to the OnStar pressed, ] is pressed, or if the control that may prevent OnStar buttons is red, the system may not airbags or ACR system deploy. This from providing OnStar service at be functioning properly. Press Q information usually includes the any particular time or place. Some vehicle's GPS location and, in the and request a vehicle diagnostic. examples are damage to important If the light appears clear (no light is event of a crash, additional parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, information regarding the crash that appearing), your OnStar tall buildings, tunnels, weather or subscription has expired and all the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the wireless phone network congestion. direction from which the vehicle was services have been deactivated. hit). When the virtual advisor feature OnStar Steering Wheel Press Q to confirm that the OnStar of OnStar hands-free calling is Controls equipment is active. used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location so they This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute can provide services where it is button that can be used to interact located. with OnStar hands-free calling. See Steering Wheel Controls on Location information about the page 4‑7 for more information. vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed On some vehicles, the mute button and available. can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information. Instruments and Controls 4-61

Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door, Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park System opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing the and reverse feature. This includes garage door opener motor-head or See Radio Frequency Statement on any garage door opener model gate motor-head. Be sure that page 12 16 for information ‑ manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the regarding Part 15 of the Federal garage door or gate that is being Communications Commission (FCC) Read the instructions completely programmed. Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry before attempting to program the and Science Canada. Universal Home Remote. Because It is recommended that a new of the steps involved, it may be battery be installed in your Universal Remote System helpful to have another person hand-held transmitter for quicker available to assist you with and more accurate transmission of Programming programming the Universal Home the radio-frequency signal. Remote. Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed This system provides a way to Universal Home Remote buttons replace up to three remote control should be erased for security transmitters used to activate purposes. See Erasing Universal devices such as garage door “ Home Remote Buttons later in this openers, security systems, and ” section. home automation devices. 4-62 Instruments and Controls

Programming the Universal To program up to three devices: Do not hold down the buttons for Home Remote System longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program For questions or help programming the remaining two Universal the Universal Home Remote Home Remote buttons. System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to www.homelink.com. 2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about 3 to 8 cm Programming a garage door opener (1 to 3 inches) away from the involves time-sensitive actions, so Universal Home Remote buttons read the entire procedure before while keeping the indicator starting. Otherwise, the device will light in view. The hand-held time out and the procedure will have transmitter was supplied by the to be repeated. manufacturer of your garage door opener receiver (motor 1. From inside the vehicle, press head unit). and hold down the two outside buttons at the same time, releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step will erase the factory settings or all previously programmed buttons. Instruments and Controls 4-63

3. At the same time, press and 4. The indicator light on the . If the Universal Home hold both the Universal Home Universal Home Remote will Remote indicator light Remote button to be used to flash slowly at first and then blinks rapidly for control the garage door and the rapidly after Universal Home two seconds and then hand-held transmitter button. Do Remote successfully receives turns to a constant light, not release the Universal Home the frequency signal from the continue with the Remote button or the hand-held hand-held transmitter. Release programming Steps 6 transmitter button until Step 4 both buttons. through 8. has been completed. 5. Press and hold the newly-trained It may be helpful to have Some entry gates and garage Universal Home Remote button another person assist with door openers may require and observe the indicator light. the remaining steps. substitution of Step 3 with the . If the indicator light stays procedure noted in “Gate on continuously, the Operator and Canadian programming is complete Programming” later in this and the garage door should section. move when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released. There is no need to continue programming Steps 6 through 8. 4-64 Instruments and Controls

7. Firmly press and release the The Universal Home Remote “Learn” or “Smart” button. After should now activate the you press this button, you will garage door. have 30 seconds to complete To program the remaining two Step 8. Universal Home Remote buttons, 8. Immediately return to the begin with Step 2 of “Programming vehicle. Firmly press and hold the Universal Home Remote the Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, button, selected in Step 3 to as this will erase all previous control the garage door, for programming from the Universal two seconds, and then release Home Remote buttons. it. If the garage door does not 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have move, press and hold the same been completed, locate inside button a second time for the garage the garage door two seconds, and then release opener receiver (motor-head it. Again, if the door does not unit). Locate the “Learn” or move, press and hold the same “Smart” button. The name and button a third time for color of the button may vary by two seconds, and then release. manufacturer. Instruments and Controls 4-65

Gate Operator and Canadian If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System Programming having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by Operation If you have questions or need using the “Programming Universal help programming the Universal Using Universal Remote Home Remote” procedures, Home Remote System, call regardless of where you live, Press and hold the appropriate 1-800-355-3515 or go to replace Step 3 under “Programming Universal Remote button for at least www.homelink.com. Universal Home Remote” with the half of a second. The indicator light Canadian radio-frequency laws following: will come on while the signal is being transmitted. require transmitter signals to time Continue to press and hold the out or quit after several seconds of Universal Home Remote button transmission. This may not be long while you press and release every enough for Universal Home Remote two seconds (cycle) the hand-held to pick up the signal during transmitter button until the programming. Similarly, some U.S. frequency signal has been gate operators are manufactured to successfully accepted by the time out in the same manner. Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” to complete the training procedure. 4-66 Instruments and Controls

Erasing Universal Remote Reprogramming a Single Buttons Universal Remote Button All programmed buttons should be To reprogram any of the three erased when the vehicle is sold or Universal Remote buttons, repeat the lease ends. the programming instructions earlier To erase all programmed buttons on in this section, beginning with the Universal Remote device: Step 2. For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 12‑3.

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. Lighting 5-1

Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control ...... 5-5 Exterior Lamp Controls Exterior Lighting Reading Lamps ...... 5-5 The exterior lamp control is Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 5-1 Lighting Features Exterior Lamps Off located towards the end of the Entry Lighting ...... 5-6 turn signal/lane change lever. Reminder ...... 5-2 Parade Dimming ...... 5-6 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Battery Load Management . . . . 5-6 O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn Changer ...... 5-2 Battery Power Protection ...... 5-7 the band with this symbol on it to Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Exterior Lighting Battery operate the exterior lamps. Daytime Running Saver ...... 5-7 Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-3 The exterior lamp control has Adaptive Forward four positions: Lighting (AFL) ...... 5-4 O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-4 the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Turn and Lane-Change AUTO (Automatic): Turns the Signals ...... 5-4 headlamps on and off automatically, Fog Lamps ...... 5-5 depending upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle. 5-2 Lighting

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass parking lamps together with the following: Low-Beam Changer This feature allows the high-beam headlamps to be used to signal the . Sidemarker Lamps Push the turn signal/lane change lever away from you to turn the high driver in front of you that you want . Taillamps beams on. Pull the lever towards to pass. . License Plate Lamps you and then release it to return to Pull and hold the turn signal/lane low beams. change lever toward you to use this . Instrument Panel Lights If the vehicle is turned off while the feature. When this is done the 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the high beams are on, they will come following will occur: headlamps, together with the on the next time the vehicle is . If the headlamps are off, previously listed lamps and lights. started. in low-beam or in Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, Exterior Lamps Off the high-beam headlamps will Reminder turn on. They will stay on as long as the lever is held there. A warning chime will sound if the Release the lever to turn exterior lamp control is left on in them off. either the headlamp or parking lamp position and the driver's door is . If the headlamps are already in This indicator light turns on in the opened with the ignition off. high-beam mode, they will instrument panel cluster when the remain on high-beam. high beam headlamps are on. Lighting 5-3

Daytime Running When DRL's are on, only the Make sure the instrument panel reduced intensity low-beam brightness lever is in the full bright Lamps (DRL) headlamps or dedicated DRL's will position. See Instrument Panel Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can be on. The other exterior lamps and Illumination Control on page 5‑5. make it easier for others to see the the instrument panel cluster will not Turning the exterior lamp control to front of your vehicle during the day. be on. off or to the low-beam headlamp Fully functional daytime running When the exterior lamp control is in position will turn off the DRL. If the lamps are required on all vehicles AUTO and it is dark enough outside, parking lamps or the fog lamps were first sold in Canada. the DRL turns off and the low-beam turned on instead, the DRL will still The DRL system will make either headlamps will turn on. When it is turn off. the reduced intensity low-beam bright enough outside, the low-beam This will work regardless of gear headlamps or dedicated DRL's headlamps will go off, and the DRL position and whether or not the come on when the following will turn back on. If the vehicle is parking brake is set. conditions are met: started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes . It is still daylight and the ignition on immediately. Once the vehicle is in ON/RUN or START. leaves the garage, it takes about . The exterior lamp control is in off one minute for the automatic or AUTO and the headlamps headlamp system to change to are off. DRL if it is light outside. During that . The automatic transmission is delay, the instrument panel cluster not in P (Park). may not be as bright as usual. 5-4 Lighting

Adaptive Forward Hazard Warning Flashers Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Lighting (AFL) | Hazard Warning Flasher: change. Hold it briefly until the lane The Adaptive Forward Lighting Press this button located on the change is complete. The arrow will System (AFL) pivots the headlamps instrument panel near the audio automatically flash three times. horizontally to provide greater road system, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. The lever returns to its starting illumination while turning. To enable position when it is released. AFL, set the exterior lamp switch on This warns others that you are the multifunction lever to the AUTO having trouble. Press again to turn If after signaling a turn or lane position. Moving the switch out of the flashers off. change the arrow flashes rapidly or the AUTO position will deactivate does not come on, a signal bulb the system. AFL will operate when Turn and Lane-Change may be burned out. the vehicle speed is greater than Signals Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb 2 mph (3 km/h). AFL will not is not burned out, check the fuse. operate when the transmission is in See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately page 9‑41. operable after starting the vehicle; driving a short distance is required Turn Signal On Chime to calibrate the AFL. See Exterior If the turn signal is left on for about Lamp Controls on page 5‑1. 1.6 km (1 mile), a warning chime will An arrow on the instrument panel sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON cluster flashes in the direction of the message will appear on the Driver turn or lane change. Information Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under Driver Move the lever all the way up or Information Center (DIC) on down to signal a turn. page 4‑31 for more information. Lighting 5-5

Fog Lamps Interior Lighting Reading Lamps Use the fog lamps for better vision The reading lamps are located on in foggy or misty conditions. The fog Instrument Panel the overhead console. These lamps lamp control is located on the turn Illumination Control come on automatically when any signal/multifunction lever. door is opened. The instrument panel brightness # (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp knob is located on the instrument For manual operation, press the band on the lever up to # and panel to the left of the steering button next to each lamp to turn it release it, to turn the fog lamps on column. on or off. or off. The band will return to its D (Instrument Panel If the reading lamps are left on, they original position. Brightness): Turn the knob automatically shut off 10 minutes The parking lamps must be on for clockwise or counterclockwise to after the ignition has been the fog lamps to work. brighten or dim the lights. Turn the turned off. If the high-beam headlamps are knob completely clockwise to turn turned on, the fog lamps will also on the interior lamps. turn off. They will turn back on again when you change back to low-beam headlamps. Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps. 5-6 Lighting

Lighting Features Parade Dimming Battery Load This feature does not let the Management Entry Lighting instrument panel backlight dim The vehicle has Electric Power The entry lighting system turns on during daylight hours while the Management (EPM) that estimates the reading and dome lamps and key is in the ignition and the the battery's temperature and state the backlighting to the exterior lamp headlamps are on. Parade dimming of charge. It then adjusts the voltage control, when a door is opened or automatically works with the light for best performance and extended if the transmitter unlock button sensor, located on top of the life of the battery. dashboard. If it is dark enough is pressed. If activated by the When the battery's state of charge transmitter, the lighting stays on for outside and the parking lamps are on, the backlight on the instrument is low, the voltage is raised slightly about 25 seconds. The entry lighting to quickly bring the charge back up. system uses the light sensor on the panel can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel brightness When the state of charge is high, instrument panel; so it must be dark the voltage is lowered slightly to outside in order for the lamps to knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lighting. prevent overcharging. If the vehicle turn on. The lamps turn off about has a voltmeter gage or a voltage 25 seconds after the last door is See Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 5‑5. display on the Driver Information closed. They dim then turn off if the Center (DIC), you may see the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. voltage move up or down. This is They immediately turn off if the normal. If there is a problem, an power locks are used. alert will be displayed. The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. Lighting 5-7

This is because the generator Normally, these actions occur in they automatically time-out after (alternator) may not be spinning fast steps or levels, without being about 20 minutes. To reset the enough at idle to produce all the noticeable. In rare cases at the battery protection, all of the power that is needed for very high highest levels of corrective action, above lamps must be turned off electrical loads. this action may be noticeable to the or the ignition must be in the A high electrical load occurs when driver. If so, a Driver Information ACC/ACCESSORY position. several of the following are on, such Center (DIC) message might be as: headlamps, high beams, fog displayed, such as BATTERY Exterior Lighting Battery lamps, rear window defogger, SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY Saver climate control fan at high speed, VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. The exterior lamps turn off about heated seats, engine cooling fans, If one of these messages displays, 10 minutes after the ignition is trailer loads, and loads plugged into it is recommended that the driver turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking accessory power outlets. reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See Driver Information lamps or headlamps have been left EPM works to prevent excessive Center (DIC) on page 4‑31. on. This protects against draining discharge of the battery. It does this the battery. The battery saver by balancing the generator's output Battery Power Protection does not work if the headlamps are and the vehicle's electrical needs. turned on after the ignition is turned It can increase engine idle speed to This feature helps to prevent battery to LOCK/OFF. generate more power, whenever drain if accessory lamps are left on. To keep the lamps on for more than needed. It can temporarily reduce If accessory lamps such as the 10 minutes, turn the lamps back on the power demands of some vanity mirror, cargo, reading, with the exterior lamp control. accessories. console, or glove box are left on, 5-8 Lighting

2 NOTES Infotainment System 6-1

Introduction For more information, see Defensive Infotainment Driving on page 8‑3. Read the following pages to System Notice: Contact your dealer/ become familiar with the audio retailer before adding any system's features. equipment. Introduction Introduction ...... 6-1 { WARNING Adding audio or communication Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-2 equipment could interfere with Operation ...... 6-2 Taking your eyes off the road the operation of the vehicle's for extended periods could cause engine, radio, or other systems, Radio a crash resulting in injury or and could damage them. Follow AM-FM Radio ...... 6-9 death to you or others. Do not federal rules covering mobile Satellite Radio ...... 6-11 give extended attention to radio and telephone equipment. Radio Reception ...... 6-15 entertainment tasks while driving. The vehicle has Retained Diversity Antenna System . . . 6-15 Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, Audio Players This system provides access to the audio system can be played CD Player ...... 6-16 many audio and non audio listings. even after the ignition is turned off. CD/DVD Player ...... 6-19 To minimize taking your eyes off the See Retained Accessory Power MP3 ...... 6-23 road while driving, do the following (RAP) on page 8‑19 for more Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . 6-27 while the vehicle is parked: information. Auxiliary Devices ...... 6-35 . Become familiar with the Phone operation and controls of the Bluetooth ...... 6-37 audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. 6-2 Infotainment System

Navigation/Radio System Operation For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

Full View of Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar Infotainment System 6-3

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble: 1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob until the tone control tabs display. 2. Continue pressing the TUNE/ TONE knob, or press the softkey Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio, Hard Drive Device (HDD), under the desired tab to highlight the desired tone setting. and USB 3. To increase the highlighted The vehicle may have one of these Turning the System On or Off setting, do one of the following: radios as its audio system. . Turn the TUNE/TONE knob VOL P (Volume/Power): Press to clockwise. If the vehicle does not have one of turn the system on and off. these radio systems, it may have a . Press the \ FWD button. navigation radio system. See the Volume Control Navigation System manual for more . Press the ¨ SEEK button. information on the navigation audio VOL P (Volume/Power): Turn system. clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. 6-4 Infotainment System

4. To decrease the highlighted 2. Continue pressing the TUNE/ To quickly adjust all speaker and setting, do one of the following: TONE knob, or press the softkey tone controls to the middle position, under the desired tab to highlight press the TUNE/TONE knob for . Turn the TUNE/TONE knob counterclockwise. the desired tone setting. more than two seconds. 3. To increase the highlighted Digital Signal . Press the s REV button. setting, do one of the following: Processing (DSP) . Press the © SEEK button. . Turn the TUNE/TONE knob If the radio has this feature, it has To quickly adjust bass, midrange, clockwise. either a Bose® sound system or a ® ® or treble to the middle position, . Press the \ FWD button. Bose 5.1 Cabin Surround sound press the softkey under the BASS, system. DSP is used to provide a MID, or TREB tab for more than . Press the ¨ SEEK button. choice of different listening experiences. two seconds. A beep may sound 4. To decrease the highlighted and the level adjusts to the middle setting, do one of the following: To choose a DSP setting: position. . Turn the TUNE/TONE knob 1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to To quickly adjust all tone and counterclockwise. display the tone/speaker, and speaker controls to the middle DSP labels. position, press the TUNE/TONE . Press the s REV button. knob for more than two seconds. 2. Press the pushbutton located . Press the © SEEK button. under the DSP label. Adjusting the Speakers 3. Press the Back button to exit the (Balance/Fade) To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, press the display. To return to the original BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To pushbutton positioned under the display, repeatedly press the adjust balance or fade: BAL or FADE label for more than Back button or wait for the display to time out. 1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob two seconds. A beep may sound until the speaker control tabs and the level adjusts to the middle display. position. Infotainment System 6-5

The DSP settings available are: If the vehicle is equipped with Configuring the Number of the Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® Favorite Pages . Normal: Select for normal mode, this provides the best sound sound system, the radio The number of favorites pages can quality for all seating positions. can support the playback of be setup using the CONFIG button. 5.1 Surround Sound DVD-A To setup the number of favorites . Driver: Select to adjust the discs or DTS 5.1 Surround pages: audio for the driver to receive Sound CD discs. When a the best possible sound quality. 5.1 Surround Sound formatted 1. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio setup menu. . Rear: Select to adjust the audio disc is playing, DSP options for the rear seat passengers to available are: 2. Press the softkey located below receive the best possible sound ‐ 5.1 Surround + Normal: Best the FAV tab. quality. for all seating positions. 3. Select the desired number of ® . Centerpoint : Select to 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best for favorites pages by pressing the ® ® ‐ enable Bose Centerpoint . the rear seating position. softkey located below the Centerpoint® produces a displayed page numbers. System Settings full vehicle surround sound 4. Press the FAV button, or let the listening experience from CD, CONFIG: Press to adjust the menu time out, to return to the non-5.1 surround sound DVD-A, number of favorites pages, auto original main radio screen MP3/WMA, AUX (auxiliary) volume, XM (if equipped), and HDD showing the radio station input, or XM digital audio source (if available) settings. The FAV, frequency tabs and to begin and will deliver five independent AUTO VOL, XM (if equipped), HDD the process of programming audio channels from (if available), and Back tabs display. favorites for the chosen number conventional two channel Press the softkey located under the of pages. stereo recording. Back tab to go back to the previous This feature is not available in display. AM/FM radio mode. 6-6 Infotainment System

Speed Compensated Noise Compensation Technology music is much louder than the Volume (SCV) If the vehicle has the Radio with background noise, there may be little or no adjustments by A Radio with SCV automatically DVD Audio, HDD, and USB, it ® ® AudioPilot . For additional adjusts the sound to compensate for has Bose AudioPilot noise ® road and wind noise as the vehicle compensation technology. information on AudioPilot , visit www.bose.com/audiopilot. speeds up or slows down, so that When turned on, AudioPilot® the volume is consistent while continuously adjusts the audio Radio Message driving. To activate SCV: system equalization, to compensate Locked: Displays when the 1. Set the radio volume to the for background noise. THEFTLOCK® system has locked desired level. To activate AudioPilot®: up the infotainment system. Take 2. Press the CONFIG button to the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for 1. Press the CONFIG button to service. display the radio setup menu. display the radio setup menu. If any error occurs repeatedly or 3. Press the softkey under the 2. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOL tab on the radio if an error cannot be corrected, AUTO VOL label on the radio contact your dealer/retailer. display. display. 4. Press the softkey under the 3. Press either the On or Off label Other Information desired Speed Compensated located under the AUTO VOL The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, display to turn this feature on or and USB utilizes Gracenote® or High) to select the level of off. The display times out after technology to provide Song, Artist, radio volume compensation. approximately 10 seconds. Album, and Genre information for The display times out after many CD audio discs and is approximately 10 seconds. Each This feature is most effective at capable of playing DVD-A and DTS higher setting allows for more lower radio volume settings where encoded discs, (DTS and DTS radio volume compensation at background noise can affect how Digital Surround are registered faster vehicle speeds. the music being played through the vehicle's audio system is heard. At trademarks of Digital Theater higher volume settings, where the Systems, Inc.). Infotainment System 6-7

Dolby and the double-D symbol are Some services supplied under and/or file identification and obtain trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. license from Open Globe, Inc. for music-related information, including Manufactured under license from U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. name, artist, track, and title Dolby Laboratories. Gracenote and CDDB are registered information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded Gracenote® Database trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and databases (collectively, “Gracenote Gracenote Music Recognition Servers ) and to perform other the “Powered by Gracenote” logo ” Service, Music recognition are trademarks of Gracenote. functions. technology, and related data are You may use Gracenote Data only provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote If you require more information regarding the use of the Gracenote by means of the intended End-User is the industry standard in music functions of this application or recognition technology and related Service, visit: www.gracenote.com/ corporate. device. You agree that you will use content delivery. For more Gracenote Data, the Gracenote information, visit For the data provided by Software, and Gracenote ® www.gracenote.com. Gracenote Music Recognition Servers for your own personal CD and music-related data Service, the content is not non-commercial use only. You agree from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © necessarily guaranteed 100%. not to assign, copy, transfer or 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Regarding the use of Gracenote transmit the Gracenote Software or Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Music Recognition Service. When any Gracenote Data to any third Gracenote. This product and this product is used, it is necessary party. service may practice one or more to agree to the following articles. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR of the following U.S. Patents: This application or device contains EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, #5,987,525; #6,061,680; THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, #6,154,773, #6,161,132, software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and The software from Gracenote (the PERMITTED HEREIN. other patents issued or pending. “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc 6-8 Infotainment System

You agree that your non-exclusive The purpose of a randomly Gracenote is not obligated to license to use the Gracenote Data, assigned numeric identifier is to provide you with new enhanced or the Gracenote Software, and allow the Gracenote service to additional data types or categories Gracenote Servers will terminate if count queries without knowing that Gracenote may provide in the you violate these restrictions. If your anything about who you are. For future and is free to discontinue its license terminates, you agree to more information, see the web page services at any time. cease any and all use of the for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL Gracenote Data, the Gracenote the Gracenote service. WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR Software, and Gracenote Servers. The Gracenote Software and each IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT Gracenote reserves all rights in item of Gracenote Data are licensed NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED Gracenote Data, the Gracenote to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no WARRANTIES OF Software, and the Gracenote representations or warranties, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS Servers, including all ownership express or implied, regarding the FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, rights. accuracy of any Gracenote Data TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. Under no circumstances will from in the Gracenote Servers. GRACENOTE DOES NOT Gracenote become liable for any Gracenote reserves the right to WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT payment to you for any information delete data from the Gracenote WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR that you provide. You agree that Servers or to change data USE OF THE GRACENOTE Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its categories for any cause that SOFTWARE OR ANY rights under this Agreement against Gracenote deems sufficient. GRACENOTE SERVER. you directly in its own name. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE No warranty is made that the BE LIABLE FOR ANY The Gracenote service uses a Gracenote Software or Gracenote CONSEQUENTIAL OR unique identifier to track queries for Servers are error-free or that INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR statistical purposes. functioning of Gracenote Software FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR or Gracenote Servers will be LOST REVENUES. uninterrupted. Infotainment System 6-9

Radio ¨ SEEK/ © SEEK: Press to go Selecting a Station to the previous or to the next radio Seek Tuning station and stay there. AM-FM Radio If the radio station is not known: The radio only tunes into stations Control Buttons with a strong signal that are in the Briefly press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK. The buttons used to control the selected band. The radio automatically searches for radio are: FAV: Press to open the the next receivable station. If the FM/AM: Press to choose between favorites list. radio does not find a station, it FM and AM. switches automatically to a more Softkeys: Press to select preset sensitive search level. If it still does m : Press to choose the XM™ band stations. not find a station, the frequency that (if equipped). Radio Data System (RDS) was last active begins to play. TUNE: Turn to search for stations. The audio system has a Radio If the radio station is known: MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise or Data System (RDS) feature. RDS Press and hold ¨ SEEK or counterclockwise to scroll through is available for use only on FM © SEEK until the desired station the station list. Press the MENU/ stations that broadcast RDS on the pop-up frequency display is SELECT knob to select the desired information. This system relies upon almost reached, then release the station. receiving specific information from button. INFO: Press to display additional these stations and only works when information that may be available for the information is available. While Manual Tuning the current song. When information the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS Turn the TUNE knob to select the is not available, No Information station, the station name or call frequency on the pop-up display. displays. letters display. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. 6-10 Infotainment System

Storing a Radio Station as a To store a station as a favorite, 4. Press the FAV button, or let the Favorite perform the following steps: menu time out, to return to the 1. Tune to the desired radio station. original main radio screen Drivers are encouraged to set up showing the radio station their radio station favorites while the 2. Press the FAV button to display frequency labels and to begin vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite the page where the station is to the process of programming stations using the presets, favorites be stored. favorites for the chosen number button, and steering wheel controls, of pages. if the vehicle has this feature. 3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds. FAV (Favorites): A maximum of Time-shifting — Pause and When that softkey is pressed Rewind Live FM/AM 36 stations can be programmed as and released, the radio recalls favorites using the six softkeys the station that was set. The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, below the radio station frequency and USB has the ability to rewind 4. Repeat the steps for each radio tabs on the display and by using 60 minutes of FM/AM and XM station to be stored as a favorite. the radio favorites page button (if equipped) content. While listening (FAV button). Press the FAV button The number of favorites pages can to the radio, the content from the to go through up to six pages of be setup using the CONFIG button. current station is always being favorites, each having six favorite To setup the number of favorites buffered to the HDD. stations available per page. Each pages, perform the following steps: page of favorites can contain any Press r / j (play/pause) To pause 1. Press the CONFIG button to combination of AM, FM, or XM the radio. The radio display will display the radio setup menu. stations. show the Time Shift buffer status 2. Press the softkey located below bar. The status bar shows the the FAV label. amount of content that is stored in the buffer and the current pause 3. Select the desired number of point. favorites pages by pressing the softkey located below the displayed page numbers. Infotainment System 6-11

To resume playback from When the radio station is Satellite Radio the current pause point, changed, the buffer is cleared and Vehicles with an XM Satellite press / j again. The radio will automatically restarted for the ™ r Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite no longer be playing “live” radio. current station. You cannot rewind to content from a previously tuned Radio subscription can receive XM Instead, time shifted content is programming. being played from the buffer. When station. the radio is playing time shifted Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not XM Satellite Radio Service content from the buffer, a buffer available while recording or while XM is a satellite radio service that is status bar shows below the station other sources of playback are based in the 48 contiguous United number on the left side of screen. selected. States and 10 Canadian provinces. Press and hold the REV or FWD Pausing AM/FM or XM™ XM Satellite Radio has a wide buttons to rewind or fast forward (if equipped) with the Vehicle variety of programming and through the time shift buffer. Hold Turned Off commercial-free music, FWD until the end of the currently coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality recorded buffer to resume “live” If AM/FM or XM is paused when the sound. A service fee is required radio playback. With “live” radio vehicle is turned off, the radio will to receive the XM service. For playing, the radio display will no continue to buffer the current radio more information, contact XM longer show the buffer bar below station for up to one hour. If the at www.xmradio.com or call the station number. vehicle is turned back on within 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and one hour, the radio will automatically On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD www.xmradio.ca or call resume playback from the pause 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. button multiple times to rewind or point. fast forward. Each press will rewind or fast forward 30 seconds of content. On XM, press the REV or FWD button multiple time to jump to the previous or next song or commercial. 6-12 Infotainment System

Control Buttons XM Categories Selecting a Station by Station List The buttons used to control the XM stations are organized in The infotainment system can list all radio are: categories. XM stations. m : Press to choose the XM™ band Removing or Adding Categories To select a station from the (if equipped). station list: 1. Press the CONFIG button. TUNE: Turn to search for stations. 1. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob and 2. Press the softkey below the highlight the desired station. MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise or XM tab. counterclockwise to scroll through 2. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to the category list. Press the MENU/ 3. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or select the station. SELECT knob to select the desired the MENU/SELECT knob to Selecting a Station by Category category. scroll through the available categories. The infotainment system can list XM INFO: Press to display additional stations by genre. information that may be available for 4. Press any softkey below the the current song. When information Remove or Add tab to add or To select a station from the is not available, No Information remove the displayed category. category list: displays. 5. Press any softkey below the 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob ¨ SEEK/ © SEEK: Press to go Restore All tab to restore all and highlight the desired genre, to the previous or to the next radio removed categories. then press the MENU/SELECT station. Selecting an XM Station knob to select the genre. 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob FAV: Press to open the Seek Tuning favorites list. and highlight the desired station, then press the MENU/SELECT Softkeys: Press to select preset Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK to go knob to select the station. stations. to the next or previous station. Infotainment System 6-13 m : Press to switch to XM mode. favorites, each having six favorite The number of favorites pages can Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to stations available per page. Each be setup using the CONFIG button. select from a list of available XM page of favorites can contain any To setup the number of favorites stations. Turn the TUNE/TONE combination of AM, FM, or XM pages, perform the following steps: knob until the desired station is stations. 1. Press the CONFIG button to highlighted. Press the TUNE/TONE To store a station as a favorite, display the radio setup menu. knob to select the highlighted perform the following steps: station. The highlighted station will 2. Press the softkey located below also automatically be selected if the 1. Tune to the desired radio station. the FAV label. TUNE/TONE is released and no 2. Press the FAV button to display 3. Select the desired number of longer turned. the page where the station is to favorites pages by pressing the be stored. softkey located below the Storing an XM Station as a displayed page numbers. Favorite 3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the Drivers are encouraged to set up When that softkey is pressed menu time out, to return to the their radio station favorites while the and released, the radio recalls original main radio screen vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite the station that was set. showing the radio station stations using the presets, favorites frequency labels and to begin button, and steering wheel controls, 4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored as a favorite. the process of programming if the vehicle has this feature. favorites for the chosen number FAV (Favorites): A maximum of of pages. 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six softkeys below the radio station frequency tabs on the display and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of 6-14 Infotainment System

XM Messages Channel Unauth: This channel is CAT Not Found: There are no blocked or cannot be received with channels available for the selected XL (Explicit Language your XM Subscription package. category. The system is working Channels): These channels, or properly. any others, can be blocked at a Channel Unavail: This previously customer's request, by calling assigned channel is no longer XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). assigned. Tune to another station. in the vehicle could have previously If this station was one of the been in another vehicle. For security XM Updating: The encryption code presets, choose another station for purposes, XM receivers cannot be in the receiver is being updated, and that preset button. swapped between vehicles. If this no action is required. This process message is received after having should take no longer than No Artist Info: No artist the vehicle serviced, check with 30 seconds. information is available at this time on this channel. The system is your dealer/retailer. No XM Signal: The system is working properly. XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, functioning correctly, but the vehicle this message alternates with the is in a location that is blocking the No Title Info: No song title XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. XM signal. When the vehicle is information is available at this time ™ ™ This label is needed to activate the moved into an open area, the signal on this channel. The system is service. should return. working properly. Unknown: If this message is Loading XM: The audio system is No CAT Info: No category received when tuned to channel 0, acquiring and processing audio and information is available at this time there could be a receiver fault. text data. No action is needed. This on this channel. The system is Consult with your dealer/retailer. message should disappear shortly. working properly. Check XM Receivr: If this Channel Off Air: This channel is No Information: No text or message does not clear within a not currently in service. Tune in to informational messages are short period of time, the receiver another channel. available at this time on this channel. The system is working could have a fault. Consult with your properly. dealer/retailer. Infotainment System 6-15

XM Not Available: If this message AM Cellular Phone Usage does not clear within a short period The range for most AM stations is Cellular phone usage may cause of time, the receiver could have a greater than for FM, especially at interference with the vehicle's radio. fault. Consult with your dealer/ night. The longer range can cause This interference may occur when retailer. station frequencies to interfere making or receiving phone calls, with each other. For better radio charging the phone's battery, Radio Reception reception, most AM radio stations or simply having the phone on. This Frequency interference and static boost the power levels during the interference can cause an increased can occur during normal radio day, and then reduce these levels level of static while listening to the reception if items such as cell phone during the night. Static can also radio. If static is received while chargers, vehicle convenience occur when things like storms and listening to the radio, unplug the accessories, and external electronic power lines interfere with radio cellular phone and turn it off. devices are plugged into the reception. When this happens, try accessory power outlet. If there is reducing the treble on the radio. Diversity Antenna System interference or static, unplug the XM Satellite Radio Service The multi-band antenna is located item from the accessory power ™ on the roof of the vehicle. The outlet. XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from antenna is used for the AM/FM FM coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous radio, OnStar, the XM Satellite Radio Service System, and GPS; if United States, and in Canada. Just FM signals only reach about 16 to the vehicle has these features. as with FM, tall buildings or hills can 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the Keep the antenna clear of radio has a built-in electronic circuit interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and obstructions for clear reception. that automatically works to reduce If the vehicle has a sunroof, the out. In addition, traveling or standing interference, some static can occur, performance of the AM/FM radio, especially around tall buildings or under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss OnStar, XM system, and GPS may hills, causing the sound to fade in be affected if the sunroof is open. and out. of the XM signal for a period of time. 6-16 Infotainment System

Audio Players the surface. Pick up discs by While using the CD player, use grasping the outer edges or the only CDs in good condition CD Player edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at If the surface of a disc is soiled, a time, and keep the CD player The Infotainment system's CD take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen and the loading slot free of player can play audio CDs and a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral foreign materials, liquids, and MP3 CDs. detergent solution mixed with water, debris. CDs that are 8 cm (3 in.) in diameter and clean it. Make sure the wiping Control Buttons will not work in the CD player. process starts from the center to the edge. The buttons used to control the CD Care of CDs player are: Care of the CD Player If playing a CD, the sound quality CD: Press to play a CD when can be reduced due to disc quality, Do not add labels to a disc, it could listening to the radio. The disc and/ the method of recording, the get caught in the CD player. If a or track number displays when a CD quality of the music that has been label is needed, label the top of the is in the player. recorded disc with a marking pen. recorded, and the way the disc © SEEK ¨ : Press to select has been handled. Handle discs The use of disc lens cleaners for tracks. carefully. Store CDs in their original discs is not advised, due to the risk TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press cases or other protective cases and of contaminating the lens of the disc to select tracks. away from direct sunlight and dust. optics with lubricants internal to the The CD player scans the bottom CD player mechanism. MENU/SELECT: Turn and then surface of the disc. If the surface of press to select. a disc is damaged, such as cracked, Notice: If a label is added to a broken, or scratched, the disc may CD, or more than one CD is s REV (Fast Reverse): Press not play properly or not at all. Do inserted into the slot at a time, and hold to reverse playback quickly not touch the bottom side of a disc or an attempt is made to play within a track. while handling it; this could damage scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. Infotainment System 6-17

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Inserting a CD (Six-Disc CD To insert multiple CDs: and hold to advance playback Player) 1. Press and hold this button for quickly within a track. ^ (Load) : Press to load CDs into five seconds. A beep sounds ^ (Load) : Press to load CDs into the CD player. This CD player holds and Load All Discs displays. the Six-Disc CD player. up to six CDs. 2. Follow the displayed instruction Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc. To insert one CD: on when to insert the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs. For the Six-Disc CD player, press 1. Press and release the load and hold for two seconds to eject all button. 3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading more CDs. discs. 2. Wait for the message to insert Inserting a CD (Single Disc the disc. If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD in the player, it stays in Player) 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD the player. When the ignition or With the printed side facing up, partway into the slot, label side radio is turned on, the CD starts insert a CD into the audio CD slot up. The player pulls the CD in. playing where it stopped, if it was until it is drawn in. The CD track A Shuffle label and the DISC the last selected audio source. icon displays. number and a Shuffle label displays When a CD is inserted, the disc and begins playback. 4. Press the pushbutton located number displays on the upper right If the ignition or radio is turned off below the Shuffle label to play side of the screen and the track while a CD in the player, it stays in the tracks of a current disc in number displays at the left and the player. When the ignition or random order. Press the center of the screen. The Shuffle radio is turned on, the CD starts pushbutton again to turn Shuffle and Disc labels appear below. Press playing where it stopped, if it was off. Shuffle Off displays. the pushbuttons located under the the last selected audio source. 5. The CD resumes normal Disc label to change to another disc. playback. 6-18 Infotainment System

The CD begins playback of the first To use the TUNE/TONE knob or the For vehicles with a Radio with track on the selected disc. As each MENU SELECT knob: Six-Disc CD player, the shuffle new track starts to play the track Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or the feature only works on the disc that number displays in the left and MENU/SELECT knob to highlight is currently playing. center of the screen. the desired track then press the Playing an MP3/WMA Disc Playing a CD TUNE/TONE knob or MENU/ SELECT knob to select the track. CD players with the MP3 feature are Selecting a CD Track capable of playing an MP3/WMA Fast Forward and Rewind CD-R or CD-RW disc, see MP3 on Tracks can be selected using the page 6‑23 for more information. seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob, s REV (Fast Reverse): Press or the MENU/SELECT knob. and hold to reverse playback quickly Disc Messages within a track. Sound is heard at a To use the seek buttons: reduced volume and the elapsed DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the disc ejects, it Press the © SEEK button to go to time of the track displays. Release to resume playing the track. could be for one of the following the start of the current track, if more reasons: than five seconds have played. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press . Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to and hold to advance playback The radio system does not quickly within a track. Sound is support the playlist format, the the next track. If SEEK or © ¨ heard at a reduced volume and the compressed audio format, or the SEEK is held, or pressed multiple elapsed time of the track displays. data file format. times, the player continues moving Release to resume playing the . It is very hot. When the backward or forward through the track. tracks on the CD. temperature returns to normal, Playing Tracks in Random Order the disc should play. Press the softkey under the Shuffle tab to play the tracks of a CD in random order. Press again to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays. Infotainment System 6-19

. The road is very rough. When CD/DVD Player The CD/DVD player scans the the road becomes smoother, the bottom surface of the disc. If the disc should play. The Infotainment system's CD/DVD surface of a disc is damaged, such player can play audio discs and . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, as cracked, broken, or scratched, MP3 discs. or upside down. the disc may not play properly or not Discs that are 8 cm (3 in.) in at all. Do not touch the bottom side . The air is very humid. If so, wait diameter will not work in the CD/ of a disc while handling it; this could about an hour and try again. DVD player. damage the surface. Pick up discs . There could have been a by grasping the outer edges or the The CD/DVD player does not problem while burning the disc. edge of the hole and the outer edge. support the playback of DVD video . The label could be caught in the discs. If DVD video disc is inserted If the surface of a disc is soiled, CD/DVD-A player. into the player, the radio displays take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral If the disc is not playing correctly, for “Read Error Please Check Disc” detergent solution mixed with water, any other reason, try a known and ejects the disc. and clean it. Make sure the wiping good disc. Care of CDs and DVDs process starts from the center to If any error occurs repeatedly or if If playing a CD/DVD, the sound the edge. an error cannot be corrected, quality can be reduced due to disc Care of the CD/DVD Player contact your dealer/retailer. If the quality, the method of recording, the radio displays an error message, quality of the music that has been Do not add labels to a disc, it could write it down and provide it to your recorded, and the way the disc get caught in the CD/DVD player. dealer/retailer when reporting the has been handled. Handle discs If a label is needed, label the top problem. carefully. Store CDs and DVDs of the recorded disc with a in their original cases or other marking pen. protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. 6-20 Infotainment System

The use of disc lens cleaners for TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press While recording a disc to HDD, the discs is not advised, due to the risk to select tracks. fast forward does not function. of contaminating the lens of the disc MENU/SELECT: Turn and then Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc. optics with lubricants internal to the press to select. CD/DVD player mechanism. Inserting a Disc s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to Notice: If a label is added to a reverse playback quickly within a With the printed side facing up, CD, or more than one CD is track. Sound is heard at a reduced insert a disc into the audio CD/DVD inserted into the slot at a time, volume. Press once to change slot until it is drawn in. The disc or an attempt is made to play playback to a speed of 2X. Each track number and a Shuffle label scratched or damaged CDs, the successive press changes playback displays and begins playback. CD player could be damaged. to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. If the ignition or radio is turned off While using the CD player, use while a disc in the player, it stays in only CDs in good condition Press r / j to resume normal the player. When the ignition or without any label, load one CD at playback. The elapsed time of the radio is turned on, the disc starts a time, and keep the CD player track displays. playing where it stopped, if it was and the loading slot free of While recording a disc to HDD, the the last selected audio source. foreign materials, liquids, and fast reverse does not function. debris. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to Playing a CD Control Buttons advance playback quickly within a Selecting a CD Track track. Sound is heard at a reduced The buttons used to control the volume. Press once to change Tracks can be selected using the CD/DVD player are: playback to a speed of 2X. Each seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob, CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to successive press changes playback or the MENU/SELECT knob. switch between CD/DVD, auxiliary to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. To use the seek buttons: input, and USB devices. Press / j to resume normal r Press the © SEEK button to go to © SEEK ¨ : Press to select playback. The elapsed time of the the start of the current track, if more track displays. tracks. than five seconds have played. Infotainment System 6-21

Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Selecting a DVD-A Track the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ and hold to advance playback Tracks can be selected using the SEEK is held, or pressed multiple quickly within a track. Sound is seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob, times, the player continues moving heard at a reduced volume and the or the MENU/SELECT knob. elapsed time of the track displays. backward or forward through the To use the seek buttons: tracks on the CD. Release to resume playing the track. Press SEEK button to go to the To use the TUNE/TONE knob: © Playing Tracks in Random Order start of the current track, if more Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to than five seconds have played. Press the softkey under the Shuffle highlight the desired track then Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to press the TUNE/TONE knob to tab to play the tracks of a CD in select the track. random order. Press again to turn the next track. If the © SEEK or Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays. ¨ SEEK button is held, or pressed To use the MENU/SELECT knob: multiple times, the player continues Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc moving backward or forward highlight the desired track then The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, through the tracks within the current press the MENU/SELECT knob to and USB is capable of playing DVD group. ® select the track. audio discs in the Bose 5.1 Cabin To use the TUNE/TONE knob: surround sound system. Fast Forward and Rewind Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to Insert the DVD audio disc into the s REV (Fast Reverse): Press display a list of all tracks in all CD/DVD player. DVD AUDIO groups on the DVD audio disc and and hold to reverse playback quickly displays and playback begins. The within a track. Sound is heard at a to highlight tracks. Stop turning the Group and track number displays TUNE/TONE knob or press the reduced volume and the elapsed during playback. time of the track displays. Release TUNE/TONE knob to start playback to resume playing the track. of the highlighted track. 6-22 Infotainment System

To use the MENU/SELECT knob: \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to Press the softkey under the c tab Press the softkey under the Menu advance playback quickly within a again while in DVDPreStop, tab to display a list of all Groups. To track. Sound is heard at a reduced “DVDStop” displays. Press change Groups, turn the MENU/ volume. Press once to change the r / j button while in DVDStop SELECT knob to highlight the playback to a speed of 2X. Each to begin playback from the desired Group. Press the MENU/ successive press changes playback beginning of the DVD audio disc. SELECT knob to select it. Playback to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. begins from track 1 of the Press r / j to resume normal Press the r / j button during DVD highlighted Group. playback. The elapsed time of the audio playback to pause or resume track displays. playback. Fast Forward and Rewind While recording a disc to HDD, the Selecting DVD Audio Streams s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to fast forward does not function. reverse playback quickly within a Each DVD audio Group may contain track. Sound is heard at a reduced Playing Tracks in Random Order audio content that is encoded in one volume. Press once to change or two formats. For example, a Press the softkey under the Shuffle playback to a speed of 2X. Each particular Group may have both a tab to begin random playback of all successive press changes playback 5.1 surround audio stream and a songs in the current Group. Press to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. 2.0 stereo audio stream available. again to turn off random playback. Press r / j to resume normal Press the softkey located under the playback. The elapsed time of the Stopping DVD Audio Playback Audio label to display the current track displays. Press the softkey under the c tab audio stream playing. “Audio Stream 1 or Audio Stream 2 briefly While recording a disc to HDD, the to stop playback of the DVD audio ” “ ” displays. Press the softkey located fast reverse does not function. disc. DVD PreStop displays. “ ” under the Audio label again to Press the r / j button to resume toggle between Audio Stream 1 or playback from where it was Audio Stream 2 (if available). stopped. Infotainment System 6-23

Check the DSP settings to . It is very hot. When the MP3 determine if a 5.1 surround sound temperature returns to normal, Audio Stream is playing. See the disc should play. MP3/WMA Format Operation on page 6‑2 for more . The road is very rough. When The Single CD and the Six-Disc CD information. Press the DSP tab the road becomes smoother, the Radio will play MP3/WMA files that to see if the 5.1 + Normal or disc should play. were recorded on a CD-R or 5.1 + Rear settings are available . CD-RW disc. The HDD Radio and for selection. If these settings are The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. can also play MP3/WMA files available, Audio Stream 1 is playing. recorded on DVD +/− R discs or . The air is very humid. If so, wait Playing an MP3/WMA Disc stored on a USB storage device. about an hour and try again. Some USB storage devices may not CD/DVD players with the MP3 . There could have been a be supported. feature are capable of playing an problem while burning the disc. MP3/WMA on DVD+/-R, CD-R, The files can be recorded with the or CD-RW discs. For more . The label could be caught in the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, information, see MP3 on page 6‑23 CD/DVD player. 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, for more information. If the disc is not playing correctly, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, for any other reason, try a known Disc Messages 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a good disc. DISC ERROR: If this message variable bit rate. Song title, artist displays and/or the disc ejects, it If any error occurs repeatedly or name, and album can display when could be for one of the following if an error cannot be corrected, files are recorded using ID3 tags reasons: contact your dealer/retailer. If the version 1 and 2. radio displays an error message, . The radio system does not write it down and provide it to your support the playlist format, the dealer/retailer when reporting the compressed audio format, or the problem. data file format. 6-24 Infotainment System

Creating an MP3/WMA Disc . Minimize the length of the file, The HDD Radio can support more folder or playlist names. Long than 255 files on an MP3/WMA disc. When creating a MP3/WMA disc: file, folder, or playlist names, The HDD Radio does not support . Make sure the MP3/WMA files or a combination of a large are recorded on a CD-R or number of files and folders, playlists on a disc or USB storage CD-RW disc. or playlists can cause the player device. to be unable to play up to the . Do not mix standard audio and Root Directory maximum number of files, MP3/WMA files on one disc. folders, playlists, or sessions. The root directory of the CD-R or . Make sure the CD does not CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the . Finalize the audio disc before have more than a maximum of root directory has compressed audio burning it. Adding music to an 50 folders and playlists, and files, the directory displays as existing disc can cause the disc 255 files to read and play. F1 DISC. All files contained directly not to function. under the root directory are . Create a folder structure that Playlists can be selected by using accessed prior to any root directory makes it easy to find songs the previous and next folder folders. Playlists (Px) are always while driving. Organize songs by buttons, the SEEK arrows, accessed after root folders or files. albums using one folder for each \ FWD, or s REV buttons. An album. Each folder or album The HDD Radio displays the root MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that should contain 18 songs or less. directory of an MP3/WMA disc as was recorded using no file folders F1 MP3 and the root directory of a . Avoid subfolders. The system can also be played. If a CD-R or USB storage device as F1 USB. can support up to 8 subfolders CD-RW contains more than the deep, keep the total number of maximum of 50 folders and folders to a minimum to reduce playlists, and 255 files, the player the complexity and confusion lets you access and navigate up to during playback. the maximum, but all items over the . Create playlists that have a .m3u maximum are not accessible. or .wpl extension, other file extensions may not work. Infotainment System 6-25

Empty Directory or Folder Order of Play File System and Naming If a root directory or a folder exists Tracks recorded to the CD-R or The song name displays the song somewhere in the file structure that CD-RW play in the following order: name that is contained in the contains only folders/subfolders ID3 tag. If the song name is not in . Play begins from the first track in and no compressed files directly the first folder and continues the ID3 tag, the radio displays the beneath them, the player advances sequentially through all tracks in file name without the extension. to the next folder in the file structure each folder. When the last track Track names longer than that contains compressed audio of the last folder has played, 32 characters are shortened. Parts files. play continues from the first of words on the last page of text No Folder track of the first playlist. and the extension of the file name is not displayed. When the CD contains only ‐ Playlists can be changed by compressed files, the files are pressing the next and previous The HDD Radio will display file located under the root folder. The folder button. names with the extension. next and previous folder functions . Play begins from the first track in Preprogrammed Playlists do not display on a CD that was the first playlist and continues recorded without folders or playlists. sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed playlists that The radio displays F1 DISC for the each playlist. When the last were created using WinAmp™, root directory. track of the last playlist has MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however When the CD contains only playlists played, play continues from the first track of the first folder. they cannot be edited using the and compressed audio files, but no radio. These playlists are special folders, all files are located under When play enters a new folder, the folders containing compressed the root folder. The folder down display does not automatically show audio song files. Playlists must have and the folder up buttons search the new folder name unless the a file extension of PLS or M3U. playlists (Px) first and then goes to folder mode has been chosen as the root folder. The radio displays the default display. The new track F1 DISC for the root directory. name displays. 6-26 Infotainment System

Playlists can be selected using the To use the seek buttons: Folder T (Next Folder): Press the previous and next folder buttons. softkey under the Folder tab to go to Tracks can be changed by pressing Press the © SEEK button to go to the first track in the next folder. the seek buttons or turning the tune the start of the current track, if more knob. Songs are played than five seconds have played. Fast Forward and Rewind sequentially; press the s REV or Press the ¨ SEEK button to go s REV (Fast Reverse): Press \ FWD to reverse or advance to the next track. If © SEEK or and hold to reverse playback quickly through the playing song. ¨ SEEK is held, or pressed within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed The HDD Radio does not support multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward time of the track displays. Release preprogrammed playlists. To create to resume playing the track. a playlist on the HDD radio from through the tracks on the disc. songs recorded to the HDD, see To use the TUNE/TONE knob: \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Hard Drive Device (HDD) on and hold to advance playback Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to page 6‑27. quickly within a track. Sound is highlight the desired track then heard at a reduced volume and the Playing an MP3/WMA From a press the TUNE/TONE knob to elapsed time of the track displays. Disc or a USB Storage Device select the track. Release to resume playing the To use the softkeys below the track. Selecting an MP3 Track folder tabs: Tracks can be selected using the S Folder (Previous Folder): Press seek buttons, the TUNE/TONE the softkey under the Folder tab to knob, or the softkeys below the folder tabs on the infotainment go to the first track in the previous folder. display. Infotainment System 6-27

Searching for MP3 Tracks songs recorded to the HDD, see Hard Drive Device (HDD) Tracks can be searched for by using Hard Drive Device (HDD) on page 6‑27. To use the HDD, tracks must be the menu system. recorded from a CD, DVD, or USB To use the menu system: Quick Jump device first. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob To scroll up or down the list of Recording From Audio Discs to display the MP3 Menu. Artists, Albums, or Song Titles, press and hold the softkey located REC (Record): Press to start 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to under the FWD or REV tab. recording tracks from the disc while highlight an option from the MP3 it is playing. The radio has the Menu. The available options are: To jump to the beginning, middle, option to record the current track or last section of the list: . Playlists* playing or all tracks from the CD. . Press the first softkey located Press the softkey under the desired . Tracks under the display to go to the record option. . Folders beginning section of the list. The last radio station that was on . Artists . Press the second softkey begins playing and a status bar located under the display to go appears on the top of the display . Albums to the middle section of the list. when the recording process starts. . Song Titles The status bar disappears when the . Press the third softkey located process has ended. The recorded . AudioBook under the display to go to the songs are now available. 3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob last section of the list. to select the desired option. Playing Tracks in Random Order *The HDD Radio does not support Press the softkey under the Shuffle preprogrammed playlists. To create tab to play the tracks of the current a playlist on the HDD radio from folder in random order. Press again to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays. 6-28 Infotainment System

Copy Protected CD(s) Ejecting a CD or Turning Off The The Gracenote® Database allows Make sure the disc is not Vehicle While Recording the radio to record an audio CD to copy-protected. The radio does If the CD is ejected or the vehicle the HDD and store the content not copy a copy-protected CD to is turned off before the recording using song, artist, album and genre the HDD. process has completed, tracks that information. have been completely recorded are Newly released audio CDs as well Deleting a Recorded Song or stored to the HDD. Incomplete as some less common audio CDs Category ® tracks are discarded. may not be found in the Gracenote DEL (Delete): Press the DEL Database stored on the HDD. button to delete the track that is Re-recording Audio CDs If these audio CDs contain CD-text, currently playing or select a track If a CD has already been recorded, the radio will use the CD-text from one of the song lists. the radio system will not record information when recording the the contents again. If a partially content to the HDD. If an audio CD To Delete an entire category, select ® a category and press DEL. recorded CD is selected for is not found in the Gracenote recording, only those songs which Database and it does not have Stopping the Recording are not already on the HDD will be CD-text information, the radio will While recording from the audio CD, recorded. record the audio CD with all song, artist, album and genre names as press the REC button to display the Audio CD Song, Artist, Album and NO INFO . stop recording option. Press the Genre Information “ ” softkey under this option to confirm the selection. Radios with HDD, contain a Gracenote® Database that the radio uses to determine the song, artist, album and genre information. Infotainment System 6-29

Songs recorded with “NO INFO” to The Gracenote® Database stored The last radio station that was on the HDD will be hard to sort, on the HDD can be updated so that begins playing and a status bar identify, and select. To make HDD it includes name information for appears on the top of the display navigation easier, CDs with “NO more recently released audio CDs. when the recording process starts. INFO” can first be converted to MP3 See your dealer/retailer for more The status bar disappears when the format with Tag information on a information on Gracenote® process has ended. The recorded home computer and then recorded Database updates for the HDD songs are now available. to the HDD from an MP3 disc or radio. AAC and OGG Vorbis file types are USB device. Recording From MP3/WMA not fully supported. These file types Occasionally, the radio may find Discs or USB may or may not play and may be more than one match in Gracenote® shown without Tag information. Database for an audio CD that has REC (Record): Press to start Without Tag information available, been recorded. If this happens, the recording tracks from a MP3/WMA these file types may be identified radio will display “Multi-Hit” for the disc or a USB device (excluding only by file name. iPod), while it is playing. The radio name information when the songs AudioBooks from audible.com can are selected from the HDD. With a has the option to record the current track playing or all tracks from the also be transferred to the HDD “Muli-Hit” song playing, press the using the record function. See button below the EDIT tab to bring CD. Press the softkey under the desired record option. AudioBooks later in this section for up the list of multiple names found more information. in the Gracenote® Database. Use the Menu/Select knob to highlight and select the correct name for the “Multi-Hit” recorded CD. 6-30 Infotainment System

USB Host Support HDD Playback Mode The USB connector uses the USB The infotainment system displays the current HDD playback mode. The standards, 1.1 and 2.0. table below shows the display mode options and what happens as the mode USB Supported Devices is displayed: . USB Flash Drives Mode When Displayed . System is randomly playing back all HDD Portable USB Hard Drives Shuffle content. Playing From the Hard Drive System is playing back content by a selected Device Artist Artist in alphabetical order. HDD (Hard Drive Device): Press System is playing back content from a selected the HDD button to start playing Album tracks from the HDD. HDD displays album in track order. and playback resumes from where it Genre System is playing back content in a selected was last stopped. Genre in alphabetical order. Song System is playing back all songs in alphabetical order. Playlist System is playing back all songs from the selected playlist in the order they were added. AudioBook System is playing back AudioBook content. Infotainment System 6-31

HDD Menu Quick Jump Shuffle Songs 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob To scroll up or down the list of Select this option from the HDD to display the HDD Menu. Artists, Albums, or Song Titles, Menu to randomly play back HDD 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to press and hold the softkey under content. the FWD or REV tab. highlight an option from the HDD Playlist Menu. The available options are: To jump to the beginning, middle, or last section of the list: Select this option from the HDD . Shuffle Songs Menu to display all six favorite . Press the first softkey located . Playlist Playlists, then select one of the six under the display to go to the playlist to display a list of songs that . Artists beginning section of the list. have been added to that favorite . Albums . Press the second softkey playlist. Select a song from the list to begin playback of that song and . Song Titles located under the display to go to the middle section of the list. to put the HDD into the Playlist . Genres mode. See “Saving HDD Favorites” . Press the third softkey located later in this section for more . Recently Saved under the display to go to the information. . AudioBook last section of the list. 3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the desired option. 6-32 Infotainment System

HDD Categories Select the HDD Menu category to Audiblebook The HDD category mode can be display the available items in each The radio is able to play back used to select a song by a particular individual category, then select an AudioBook content downloaded artist, album, or genre for playback. item from one of these submenus to from www.audible.com. This content As an example, the HDD Menu display a list of songs related to that can be transferred into the HDD by displays a layout such as: menu item. Select a song to begin either burning it to a CD or copying playback of that song and to put the Artists (5) it to a USB storage device and then HDD in the playback mode. recording it to the HDD. Albums (6) Recently Saved The audible.com® playback requires Song Titles (77) Select this option from the HDD activation of the vehicle as a player Genres (3) Menu to display the last 50 songs for downloaded content. The radio added since the vehicle was system activates the audible.com® The radio system displays the last turned on. The songs are system when information is found number of available items in each categorized into songs recorded on either a CD inserted into the individual category as shown on the from CDs or USB devices. CD/DVD player or if a USB storage sample display. For example, the device is connected. The Vehicle sample display shows there is Identification Number (VIN) number content on the hard drive from is a required in order to activate the five individual artists. vehicle. Infotainment System 6-33

Saving HDD Favorites Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the softkey under the Press the FAV button to change favorites selection. Store favorites according to the following table: between favorite modes during HDD Favorites Action on Press-and-Hold playback. The following favorite Display Mode modes are supported: Adds currently playing track to the playlist Playlist . Playlists selected. . Artists Saves the artist associated with the currently Artist . Albums playing track in the indicated favorites position. . Saves the album associated with the currently Genres Album playing track in the indicated favorites position. Saves the genre associated with the currently Genre playing track in the indicated favorites position.

Configuring HDD Favorites Time-shifting — Pause and Press the CONFIG button to display Rewind Live FM/AM and XM™ the radio configuration options. (if equipped) Press the softkey under the HDD The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, tab to display the available favorite and USB has the ability to rewind modes. Press the softkey under the 60 minutes of FM/AM and XM favorite tab to set the available (if equipped) content. While listening favorite modes. Available favorite to the radio, the content from the modes are highlighted. current station is always being buffered to the HDD. 6-34 Infotainment System

Press r / j (play/pause) To pause Press and hold the REV or FWD Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not the radio. The radio display will buttons to rewind or fast forward available while recording or while show the Time Shift buffer status through the time shift buffer. Hold other sources of playback are bar. The status bar shows the FWD until the end of the currently selected. amount of content that is stored in recorded buffer to resume “live” radio playback. With live radio Pausing AM/FM or XM™ the buffer and the current pause “ ” (if equipped) with the Vehicle playing, the radio display will no point. Turned Off longer show the buffer bar below To resume playback from the the station number. If AM/FM or XM is paused when the current pause point, press / j vehicle is turned off, the radio will r On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD continue to buffer the current radio again. The radio will no longer be button multiple times to rewind or station for up to one hour. If the playing “live” radio. Instead, time fast forward. Each press will rewind vehicle is turned back on within shifted content is being played from or fast forward 30 seconds of one hour, the radio will automatically the buffer. When the radio is playing content. On XM, press the REV or resume playback from the pause time shifted content from the buffer, FWD button multiple time to jump to point. a buffer status bar shows below the the previous or next song or station number on the left side of commercial. screen. When the radio station is changed, the buffer is cleared and automatically restarted for the current station. You cannot rewind to content from a previously tuned station. Infotainment System 6-35

Auxiliary Devices Playback of an audio device that is USB Supported Devices connected to the 3.5mm jack can . USB Flash Drives The 3.5mm (1/8 in.) input jack and only be controlled using the controls the USB port (if equipped), located on the device. . Portable USB Hard Drives in the center console bin, allows . Fifth generation or later iPod* portable devices to connect to the VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn vehicle. This is not an audio output; clockwise or counterclockwise to . First, Second, or Third do not plug headphones into the increase or decrease the volume of generation iPod nano* auxiliary input jack. the portable player. Use the portable . iPod classic* Set up auxiliary devices while the device to make additional volume adjustments. *For proper operation, make sure vehicle is stopped. See Defensive the iPod has the latest firmware Driving on page 8‑3 for more CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): from Apple®. The iPod firmware can information on driver distraction. Press to play a CD when a portable be updated using the latest iTunes When a device is first connected audio device is playing. Press again application. See www.apple.com/ to the 3.5mm (1/8 in.) input jack to start playing audio from the itunes. or the USB port (if equipped) the connected portable audio player. Connecting a USB Storage Device infotainment system automatically If a portable audio player is not switches to that device. If an connected, “No Aux Device” Connect the USB storage device to auxiliary device has already been displays. the USB port located in the center connected, press the AUX or CD/ USB Port console. Some USB devices may AUX button. not be supported. The USB connector uses the USB 3.5mm Jack standards, 1.1 and 2.0. Playing an MP3/WMA From a USB Storage Device Connect a 3.5mm (1/8 in.) cable to the auxiliary input jack to use a See MP3 on page 6‑23 for more portable audio player. information. 6-36 Infotainment System

Connecting an iPod A standard iPod USB cable, like To connect and control the iPod To connect the iPod, connect one the one that came with the iPod, using the radio controls, use the end of the special iPod connection cannot be used to connect an iPod special iPod connection cable that to the vehicle. The special iPod came as standard equipment with cable to the iPod’s dock connector. Connect the other end to both the connection cable that came the vehicle as part of the USB USB port and the auxiliary input jack equipped with the vehicle or that option. The special iPod connection located in the center console. The was made available from your cable can also be purchased or USB port and the auxiliary input jack dealer/retailer must be used to made available, from your dealer/ are located in the center console command and control an iPod. retailer. See your dealer/retailer for bin. If the vehicle is on and the USB Use a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) more information. connection works, a GM logo may stereo cable to connect an older Use the Menu/Select knob to bring appear on the iPod. The iPod's iPod model that is not supported, up the iPod Menu and select Songs, music information will be shown on or if the special iPod connection Artists, Albums, Playlists and Audio the radio’s display and the music cable is missing. Command and books to play from the iPod. begins playing through the vehicles control of the iPod using the audio system. infotainment control buttons and Disconnecting an iPod The iPod's battery charges while it knobs is not supported when only To properly dismount the iPod USB is connected to the vehicle and if a 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) stereo cable device before disconnecting from the ignition is turned to ACC/ is used. the vehicle, press the softkey under ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. It can the EJECT tab on the infotainment Commanding and Controlling display screen during iPod also be left connected to the vehicle an iPod after the vehicle is turned off. With playback. An iPod can be controlled by the vehicle turned off, the iPod will ™ using the radio buttons and knobs; automatically be powered off and the song information shows on the will not charge or draw power from the vehicle's battery. infotainment system's display. Infotainment System 6-37

Phone Noise: Keep interior noise levels to Bluetooth Controls a minimum. The system may not Use the buttons located on the recognize voice commands if there steering wheel to operate the Bluetooth is too much background noise. in-vehicle Bluetooth system. Vehicles with a Bluetooth system When to Speak: A short tone See Steering Wheel Controls on can use a Bluetooth capable cell sounds after the system responds page 4‑7 for more information. phone with a Hands Free Profile to indicating when it is waiting for a (Push To Talk) : Press to make and receive phone calls. voice command. Wait until the tone b g answer incoming calls, to confirm The system can be used while the and then speak. ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ system information, and to start ACCESSORY position. The range How to Speak: Speak clearly in a speech recognition. calm and natural voice. of the Bluetooth system can be up c ª (Phone On Hook): Press to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones Audio System to end a call, reject a call, or to support all functions, and not all cancel an operation. phones are guaranteed to work with When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. system, sound comes through Pairing the vehicle's front audio system See www.gm.com/bluetooth for A Bluetooth enabled cell phone speakers and over-rides the audio more information on compatible must be paired to the in-vehicle system. Use the audio system phones. Bluetooth system first and then volume knob, during a call, to connected to the vehicle before it Voice Recognition change the volume level. The can be used. See the cell phone adjusted volume level remains in The Bluetooth system uses voice manufacturers user guide for memory for later calls. To prevent recognition to interpret voice Bluetooth functions before pairing missed calls, a minimum volume commands to dial phone numbers the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone level is used if the volume is turned and name tags. is not connected, calls will be made down too low. using OnStar® Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner's guide for more information. 6-38 Infotainment System

Pairing Information: To link to a different paired phone, 4. Start the Pairing process on the see Linking to a Different Phone cell phone that will be paired to . Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle Bluetooth later in this section. the vehicle. Reference the cell system. phone manufacturers user guide Pairing a Phone for information on this process. . The pairing process is disabled 1. Press and hold b g for when the vehicle is moving. Locate the device named two seconds: “General Motors” in the list on . The in-vehicle Bluetooth system . For vehicles without a the cellular phone and follow the automatically links with the first navigation system, the instructions on the cell phone to available paired cell phone in the system responds with enter the four digit PIN number order the phone was paired. “Ready” followed by a tone. that was provided in Step 3. . Only one paired cell phone can . For vehicles with a 5. The system prompts for a name be connected to the in-vehicle navigation system, the for the phone. Use a name that Bluetooth system at a time. system responds with a best describes the phone. This . Pairing should only need to be tone. After the tone say name will be used to indicate completed once, unless changes “Hands Free”. The system which phone is connected. The to the pairing information have responds with “Ready” system then confirms the name been made or the phone is followed by a tone. provided. deleted. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system 6. The system responds with responds with “Bluetooth ready” “ has been followed by a tone. successfully paired” after the pairing process is complete. 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions and a four digit 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for PIN number. The PIN number additional phones to be paired. will be used in Step 4. Infotainment System 6-39

Listing All Paired and Connected Deleting a Paired Phone with “Would you like to delete Phones ? Yes or No” 1. Press and hold b g for followed by a tone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds: 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. two seconds: . For vehicles without a The system responds with “OK, . For vehicles without a navigation system, the deleting ”. navigation system, the system responds with system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. Linking to a Different Phone Ready followed by a tone. “ ” . For vehicles with a 1. Press and hold b g for . For vehicles with a navigation system, the two seconds: navigation system, the system responds with a . system responds with a tone. After the tone say For vehicles without a navigation system, the tone. After the tone say “Hands Free”. The system system responds with “Hands Free”. The system responds with “Ready” Ready followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. “ ” followed by a tone. . For vehicles with a 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system navigation system, the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” system responds with a responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. followed by a tone. tone. After the tone say 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks “Hands Free”. The system 3. Say “List”. The system lists all which phone to delete followed responds with “Ready” the paired Bluetooth devices. by a tone. followed by a tone. If a phone is connected to the 4. Say the name of the phone to 2. Say Bluetooth . The system vehicle, the system will say “Is “ ” be deleted. If the phone name responds with Bluetooth ready connected” after the connected “ ” is unknown, use the “List” followed by a tone. phone. command for a list of all paired phones. The system responds 6-40 Infotainment System

3. Say “Change phone”. The Using the Store Command 3. Say the complete phone number system responds with “Please The store command allows a phone to be stored at once with no wait while I search for other number to be stored without pauses. phones . ” entering the digits individually. . If the system recognizes . If another phone is found, the number it responds with the response will be 1. Press and hold b g for “OK, Storing” and repeats “ is now two seconds: the phone number. connected . . ” For vehicles without a . If the system is unsure it . If another phone is not navigation system, the recognizes the phone found, the original phone system responds with number, it responds with remains connected. “Ready” followed by a tone. “Store” and repeats the . number followed by “Please Storing Name Tags For vehicles with a navigation system, the say yes or no”. If the The system can store up to thirty system responds with a number is correct, say phone numbers as name tags that tone. After the tone say “Yes”. If the number is not are shared between the Bluetooth “Hands Free”. The system correct, say “No”. The and OnStar systems. responds with “Ready” system will ask for the number to be re-entered. The system uses the following followed by a tone. commands to store and retrieve 2. Say “Store”. The system 4. After the system stores the phone numbers: responds with “Store, number phone number, it responds with “Please say the name tag” . Store please” followed by a tone. followed by a tone. . Digit Store . Directory Infotainment System 6-41

5. Say a name tag for the phone . For vehicles with a 4. After the complete number has number. The name tag is navigation system, the been entered, say “Store”. The recorded and the system system responds with a system responds with “Please responds with “About to store tone. After the tone say say the name tag” followed by . Does that “Hands Free”. The system a tone. sound OK?”. responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone . If the name tag does not number. The name tag is sound correct, say “No” and 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system recorded and the system repeat Step 5. responds with “Please say the responds with “About to store first digit to store” followed by . Does that . If the name tag sounds a tone. sound OK? . correct, say “Yes” and the ” name tag is stored. After 3. Say the first digit to be stored. . If the name tag does not the number is stored the The system will repeat back the sound correct, say “No” and system returns to the digit it heard followed by a tone. repeat Step 5. main menu. Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete. . If the name tag sounds Using the Digit Store Command correct, say “Yes” and the . If an unwanted number is name tag is stored. After The digit store command allows a recognized by the system, the number is stored the phone number to be stored by say “Clear” at any time to system returns to the entering the digits individually. clear the last number. main menu. 1. Press and hold b g for . To hear all of the numbers two seconds: recognized by the system, say “Verify” at any time and . For vehicles without a the system will repeat them. navigation system, the system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 6-42 Infotainment System

Using the Directory Command Deleting Name Tags 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with Delete, please The directory command lists all of The system uses the following “ say the name tag followed by the name tags stored by the system. commands to delete name tags: ” To use the directory command: a tone. . Delete 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. 1. Press and hold b g for . Delete all name tags The system responds with two seconds: Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”. The delete command allows specific navigation system, the . If the name tag is correct, name tags to be deleted. system responds with say “Yes” to delete the “Ready” followed by a tone. To use the delete command: name tag. The system . responds with “OK, deleting For vehicles with a 1. Press and hold g for navigation system, the b , returning to two seconds: system responds with a the main menu.” . tone. After the tone say For vehicles without a . If the name tag is incorrect, “Hands Free”. The system navigation system, the say “No”. The system responds with “Ready” system responds with responds with “No. OK, let's followed by a tone. “Ready” followed by a tone. try again, please say the 2. Say “Directory”. The system . For vehicles with a name tag.” responds with “Directory” and navigation system, the then plays back all of the stored system responds with a name tags. When the list is tone. After the tone say complete, the system returns to “Hands Free”. The system the main menu. responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. Infotainment System 6-43

Using the Delete All Name Tags 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The Using the Dial Command Command system responds with “You are about to delete all name tags 1. Press and hold b g for The delete all name tags command two seconds: deletes all stored phone book name stored in your phone directory tags and route name tags for and your route destination . For vehicles without a OnStar (if present). directory. Are you sure you want navigation system, the to do this? Please say yes system responds with To use the delete all name tags or no.” “Ready” followed by a tone. command: . Say “Yes” to delete all . For vehicles with a 1. Press and hold b g for name tags. navigation system, the two seconds: . Say “No” to cancel the system responds with a tone. After the tone say . For vehicles without a function and return to the navigation system, the main menu. “Hands Free”. The system system responds with responds with “Ready” Making a Call followed by a tone. “Ready” followed by a tone. Calls can be made using the 2. Say Dial . The system responds . For vehicles with a “ ” following commands: navigation system, the with “Dial using . system responds with a . Dial “Number please” followed by a tone. tone. After the tone say . Digit Dial “Hands Free”. The system responds with “Ready” . Call followed by a tone. . Re-dial 6-44 Infotainment System

3. Say the entire number without . For vehicles with a . To hear all of the numbers pausing. navigation system, the recognized by the system, system responds with a say “Verify” at any time and . If the system recognizes tone. After the tone say the system will repeat them. the number, it responds “Hands Free”. The system Using the Call Command with “OK, Dialing” and dials responds with “Ready” the number. followed by a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for . If the system does not 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system two seconds: recognize the number, it responds with “Digit dial using . confirms the numbers For vehicles without a , please say the navigation system, the followed by a tone. If the first digit to dial” followed by number is correct, say system responds with a tone. Ready followed by a tone. “Yes”. The system responds “ ” with “OK, Dialing” and dials 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at . For vehicles with a the number. If the number a time. Following each digit, the navigation system, the is not correct, say “No”. system will repeat back the digit system responds with a The system will ask for the it heard followed by a tone. tone. After the tone say number to be re-entered. 4. Continue entering digits until the “Hands Free”. The system responds with Ready Using the Digit Dial Command number to be dialed is complete. “ ” After the whole number has followed by a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for been entered, say “Dial”. The 2. Say “Call”. The system responds two seconds: system responds with “OK, with “Call using . Dialing” and dials the number. . For vehicles without a Please say the name tag” navigation system, the . If an unwanted number is followed by a tone. system responds with recognized by the system, “Ready” followed by a tone. say “Clear” at any time to clear the last number. Infotainment System 6-45

3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re-dial Command Receiving a Call to call. 1. Press and hold b g for When an incoming call is received, . If the system clearly two seconds: the audio system mutes and a ring recognizes the name tag it tone is heard in the vehicle. . responds with “OK, calling, For vehicles without a ” and dials the navigation system, the . Press b g and begin speaking number. system responds with to answer the call. “Ready” followed by a tone. . If the system is unsure it . Press c ª to ignore a call. recognizes the right name . For vehicles with a tag, it confirms the name navigation system, the Call Waiting system responds with a tag followed by a tone. Call waiting must be supported on tone. After the tone say If the name tag is correct, the Bluetooth phone and enabled by Hands Free . The system say “Yes”. The system “ ” the wireless service carrier to work. responds with “OK, calling, responds with “Ready” ” and dials the followed by a tone. . Press b g to answer an number. If the name tag is 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The incoming call when another call not correct, say “No”. The system responds with “Re-dial is active. The original call is system will ask for the using ” and dials placed on hold. name tag to be re-entered. the last number called from the . Press g again to return to the connected Bluetooth phone. b Once connected, the person called original call. will be heard through the audio Once connected, the person called . To ignore the incoming call, speakers. will be heard through the audio continue with the original call speakers. with no action. . Press c ª to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold. 6-46 Infotainment System

Three-Way Calling Muting a Call Transferring a Call Three-Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside Audio can be transferred between supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the the in-vehicle Bluetooth system and and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call the cell phone. carrier to work. cannot hear them. To Transfer Audio to the Cell 1. While on a call press b g . The To Mute a call Phone system responds with Ready “ ” 1. Press . The system During a call with the audio in the followed by a tone. b g responds with “Ready” followed vehicle: 2. Say Three-way call . The “ ” by a tone. 1. Press . The system system responds with b g 2. Say Mute Call . The system responds with Ready followed “Three-way call, please say “ ” “ ” responds with Call muted . by a tone. dial or call”. “ ” 2. Say Transfer Call. The system 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute “ ” responds with “Transferring call” dial the number of the third party 1. Press b g . The system to be called. and the audio will switch from responds with “Ready” followed the vehicle to the cell phone. 4. Once the call is connected, by a tone. press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. together. The system responds with Ending a Call “Resuming call”. Press c ª to end a call. Infotainment System 6-47

To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle Voice Pass-Thru 3. Say “Voice”. The system Bluetooth System responds with OK, accessing Voice Pass-Thru allows access to “ . The cellular phone must be paired the voice recognition commands on ” and connected with the Bluetooth the cell phone. See the cell phone . The cell phone's normal system before a call can be manufacturers user guide to see if prompt messages will go transferred. The connection process the cell phone supports this feature. through its cycle according can take up to two minutes after the This feature can be used to verbally to the phone's operating ignition is turned to the ON/RUN or access contacts stored in the cell instructions. ACC/ACCESSORY position. phone. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 1. During a call with the audio 1. Press and hold b g for (DTMF) Tones on the cell phone, press and two seconds: hold b g for two seconds: The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can . For vehicles without a send numbers and numbers stored . For vehicles without a navigation system, the as name tags during a call. This is navigation system, the call system responds with used when calling a menu driven transfers to the Bluetooth “Ready” followed by a tone. phone system. Account numbers system. can be programmed into the . For vehicles with a phonebook for retrieval during menu . For vehicles with a navigation system, the driven calls. navigation system, the system responds with a system responds with a tone. After the tone say Sending a number during a call tone. After the tone say “Hands Free”. The system “Hands Free”. The call then responds with “Ready” 1. Press b g . The system transfers to the Bluetooth followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed system. by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds followed by a tone. with “Say a number to send tones” followed by a tone. 6-48 Infotainment System

3. Say the number to send. 3. Say the name tag to send. Clearing the System . If the system clearly . If the system clearly Unless information is deleted out of recognizes the number it recognizes the name tag it the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it responds with “OK, Sending responds with “OK, Sending will be retained indefinitely. This Number” and the dial tones ” and the dial includes all saved name tags in the are sent and the call tones are sent and the call phonebook and phone pairing continues. continues. information. For information on how . If the system is not sure it . If the system is not sure it to delete this information, see the recognized the number recognized the name tag above sections on Deleting a Paired properly, it responds “Dial properly, it responds “Dial Phone and Deleting Name Tags. Number, Please say yes or , Please say Other Information no? followed by a tone. yes or no? followed by a ” ” ® If the number is correct, say tone. If the name tag is The Bluetooth word mark and ® “Yes”. The system responds correct, say “Yes”. The logos are owned by the Bluetooth with “OK, Sending Number” system responds with “OK, SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks and the dial tones are sent Sending ” and by General Motors is under license. and the call continues. the dial tones are sent and Other trademarks and trade names the call continues. are those of their respective owners. Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call See Radio Frequency Statement on page 12‑16 for FCC information. 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with “Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone. Climate Controls 7-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with Dual Automatic Climate Control this system. System ...... 7-1 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 7-6 Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...... 7-6

A. Display G. Air Delivery Mode Control B. Fan Control H. Temperature Control and C. Power Heated Seat D. AUTO I. Air Conditioning E. PASS (Passenger Climate J. Recirculation Control) K. Outside Air F. Defrost L. Rear Window Defogger 7-2 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation as the vehicle warms up to Then adjust the passenger AUTO (Automatic): The system maintain the chosen temperature temperature buttons to a automatically controls fan speed, air setting. The length of time comfortable setting. delivery, and air conditioning in needed for warm up depends on Pressing the PASS button again order to heat or cool the vehicle to the outside temperature and the automatically sets the passenger's the desired temperature. When the length of time that has elapsed temperature to the driver's setting. since the vehicle was last driven. indicator light is on, the system is in Turning the passenger's full automatic operation. If the air 3. Wait for the system to regulate. temperature display off does not delivery mode or fan setting is This may take from 10 to shut the passenger's climate control manually adjusted, the auto 30 minutes. Then adjust the system off. indicator turns off and displays will temperature, if necessary. show the selected settings. English can be changed to metric Manual Operation 1. Press the AUTO button. units through the Driver Information O (Power): Press to turn the 2. Adjust the temperature to a Center (DIC). See Driver climate control system on or off. comfortable setting between Information Center (DIC) on When the climate control system is 21°C (70°F) and 27°C (80°F). page 4‑31. turned off the air inlet defaults to Q / R (Temperature Control): outside air. Choosing the coldest or warmest DC temperature setting will not The temperature can be adjusted (Fan Control): Press the cause the system to heat or cool separately for the driver and the buttons to increase or decrease the any faster. passenger. Press to increase or fan speed. Pressing either button decrease the automatic temperature cancels automatic fan control. Press To avoid blowing cold air in cold settings. AUTO to return to automatic weather, the system delays operation. The blower may reduce turning on the fan until warm air PASS (Passenger Climate ® Control): Press to set a different during an Onstar session to limit is available. The system starts background noise. out blowing air at the floor, but temperature for the passenger. can automatically change modes Climate Controls 7-3

If the airflow seems low when the automatic operation, cooler air is air-conditioning compressor, unless fan speed is at the highest setting, directed to the upper outlets and the outside temperature is at or the passenger compartment air filter warmer air to the floor outlets. below freezing. might need to be replaced. For more [ (Floor): Air is directed to the This mode can also cause the fan information, see Passenger floor outlets, with some air directed speed and air temperature to Compartment Air Filter on to the windshield and outboard increase. page 7‑6 and Scheduled outlets. Maintenance on page 10‑3. # (Air Conditioning): Press to HG - (Defog): This mode clears the turn the air conditioning system on (Air Delivery Mode Control): windows of fog or moisture. Air is or off and override the automatic Press the buttons to change the directed to the windshield, floor and system. When in AUTO, the air direction of the airflow. The current side window outlets. When this conditioning compressor comes on mode appears in the display screen. mode is selected, the system turns automatically, as needed. Changing the mode cancels the off recirculation and runs the The air conditioning system automatic air delivery. Press AUTO air-conditioning compressor unless to return to automatic operation. removes moisture from the air, so the outside temperature is at or water might drip under the vehicle The outboard air outlets always below freezing. If recirculation is while idling or after turning off the receive some airflow in every mode, selected while in defog mode, it is engine. This is normal. except defrost. cancelled after 10 minutes. M (Recirculation): Press to turn To change the current mode, select 0 (Defrost): This mode clears the on recirculation. An indicator light one of the following: windshield of fog or frost more comes on. Air is recirculated inside Y (Vent): Air is directed to the quickly. Air is directed to the the vehicle. It helps to quickly cool instrument panel outlets. windshield, with some air directed to the air inside the vehicle or prevent the side windows. In this mode, the \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided outside air and odors from entering. system automatically turns off Press the auto button to have the between the instrument panel recirculation and runs the outlets and the floor outlets. In system select the best air delivery mode for the temperature setting. 7-4 Climate Controls

Recirculation is not available in the The rear window defogger stays on z /{ (Heated and Ventilated defrost mode and automatically for about 15 minutes, before turning Seats): Press to heat or ventilate turns off 10 minutes after defog is off if the vehicle is moving at a the seat. See Heated and Ventilated selected. This helps to limit window slower speed. At higher speeds, the Front Seats on page 2‑9. fogging in the vehicle. rear window defogger may stay on continuously. With each additional Remote Start Climate Control Using recirculation for long periods Operation: For vehicles with of time could cause the air inside press, the defogger runs for about 10 minutes. The defogger can also remote vehicle start, the climate the vehicle to become too dry or control system automatically heats stuffy. To prevent this from be turned off by turning off the engine. and cools the vehicle based on the happening, after the air in the temperature inside and outside of vehicle has cooled, select outside The heated outside rearview mirrors the vehicle. The climate control air or press the auto button. turn on when the rear window displays will be blank. See Remote F (Outside Air): Press to turn defogger button is on and helps to Vehicle Start on page 1‑12. on the outside air. An indicator light clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on In cold weather the windshield turns on. The outside air mode pulls defroster and/or rear window page 1‑27. fresh air from outside the vehicle. defogger automatically turn on. Outside air is always selected in Notice: Do not try to clear frost If the vehicle has heated seats, they defrost mode to prevent fogging. or other material from the inside will also turn on. of the front windshield and rear Rear Window Defogger window with a razor blade or When the ignition is turned to ON/ The rear window defogger uses a anything else that is sharp. This RUN, the climate control system warming grid to remove fog or frost may damage the rear window returns to the settings used before the vehicle was last turned off. The from the rear window. It only works defogger grid and affect your when the ignition is in ON/RUN. radio's ability to pick up stations heated seats will turn off, clearly. The repairs wouldn't be if equipped. (Rear Window Defogger): = covered by your warranty. Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Climate Controls 7-5

Sensors Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate control system will not work properly. Air Quality Sensor For vehicles with an air quality sensor, the climate control system adjusts to limit some exhaust fumes from being pulled inside your vehicle. Press the AUTO button on the climate control to activate the air The interior temperature sensor quality sensor. The recirculation located on the instrument panel to indicator light comes on when poor The solar sensor located on the the right of the steering wheel, quality air is detected. The air instrument panel, near the measures the temperature of the air quality sensor will not maintain windshield, monitors the solar heat. inside the vehicle. recirculation for an extended period The climate control system uses the to prevent the air inside the vehicle information from these sensors to from becoming too dry or stuffy. adjust the fan speed and the air delivery, in order to maintain the selected temperature. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary. 7-6 Climate Controls

Under certain conditions, the air Air Vents Maintenance quality sensor will not activate recirculation, such as during cold Use the air outlets located in the weather or with odors, like skunk. To center and on the side of the Passenger Compartment limit odors manually, press M until instrument panel to direct the Air Filter airflow. Use the thumbwheels near the condition has passed. The passenger compartment air the air outlets to open or close off filter traps most of the dust and The air quality sensor system does the airflow. not protect against carbon monoxide pollen from the air entering the (CO), which you cannot see or Operation Tips vehicle. The filter will need to be changed periodically. See smell. See Engine Exhaust on . Clear away any ice, snow, page 8‑25. or leaves from air inlets at the Scheduled Maintenance on base of the windshield that could page 10‑3. block the flow of air into the Using the climate control system vehicle. without the passenger air filter installed could let water or other . Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help debris enter the system. This could circulate the air inside of the cause a water leak or noises. Make vehicle more effectively. sure a new air filter is installed after removing the old one. . Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. Climate Controls 7-7

To replace the passenger 4. Remove the three screws that compartment air filter: hold the screen in place and lift 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with off the screen by lifting and the engine off. sliding it toward the center of the vehicle. 2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn the ignition off again 5. Pull out on the two tabs located when the wipers are straight up on each end of the filter cover. on the windshield. 6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling This allows access to the leaf it straight up. screen. The passenger 7. Remove the old filter and insert compartment air filter is located a new one. The passenger compartment air under the screen. See Maintenance Replacement filter is located under the hood 3. Open the hood to access the Parts on page 10‑9 for the below the windshield wiper arm engine compartment. See Hood correct part number for the filter. and the screen on the passenger on page 9‑5 for more 8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to side of the vehicle. See Engine information. Compartment Overview on reinstall the cover. page 9‑6 for more information on location. 7-8 Climate Controls

2 NOTES Driving and Operating 8-1

Starting and Operating Drive Systems Driving and New Vehicle Break-In ...... 8-17 All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-32 Operating Ignition Positions (Key Access) ...... 8-18 Brakes Ignition Positions Antilock Brake Driving Information (Keyless Access) ...... 8-19 System (ABS) ...... 8-33 Retained Accessory Parking Brake (Manual) ...... 8-34 Driving for Better Fuel Parking Brake (Electric) ...... 8-35 Economy ...... 8-2 Power (RAP) ...... 8-19 Starting the Engine ...... 8-20 Brake Assist Defensive Driving ...... 8-3 (Except CTS-V) ...... 8-37 Drunk Driving ...... 8-3 Engine Coolant Heater ...... 8-22 Control of a Vehicle ...... 8-4 Shifting Into Park ...... 8-22 Ride Control Systems Braking ...... 8-4 Shifting Out of Park ...... 8-23 Traction Control Steering ...... 8-5 Parking (Manual System (TCS) ...... 8-37 Off-Road Recovery ...... 8-6 Transmission) ...... 8-24 StabiliTrak System ...... 8-38 Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Parking Over Things Competitive Driving Mode . . . 8-40 Competitive Driving ...... 8-8 That Burn ...... 8-24 Magnetic Ride Control ...... 8-40 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 8-8 Engine Exhaust Limited-Slip Rear ...... 8-41 Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-9 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-25 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-9 Cruise Control Running the Vehicle While Cruise Control ...... 8-41 Winter Driving ...... 8-10 Parked ...... 8-25 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 8-12 Object Detection Systems Vehicle Load Limits ...... 8-12 Automatic Transmission Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-44 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-26 Rear Vision Manual Mode ...... 8-28 Camera (RVC) ...... 8-46 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission ...... 8-30 8-2 Driving and Operating

Fuel Driving Information . Always follow posted speed Fuel ...... 8-49 limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. Recommended Fuel ...... 8-49 Driving for Better Fuel Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-50 . Keep vehicle tires properly California Fuel Economy inflated. Requirements ...... 8-50 Driving habits can affect fuel . Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-50 Combine several trips into a mileage. Here are some driving tips single trip. Fuel Additives ...... 8-50 to get the best fuel economy Filling the Tank ...... 8-52 . possible. Replace the vehicle's tires with Filling a Portable Fuel the same TPC Spec number Container ...... 8-53 . Avoid fast starts and accelerate molded into the tire's sidewall smoothly. near the size. Towing General Towing . Brake gradually and avoid . Follow recommended scheduled Information ...... 8-54 abrupt stops. maintenance. Driving Characteristics and . Avoid idling the engine for long Towing Tips ...... 8-54 periods of time. Trailer Towing . (Except CTS-V) ...... 8-58 When road and weather Trailer Towing (CTS-V) ...... 8-59 conditions are appropriate, use Towing Equipment ...... 8-59 cruise control, if equipped. Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment ...... 8-60 Driving and Operating 8-3

Defensive Driving Drunk Driving Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor Defensive driving means “always vehicle-related deaths involve expect the unexpected.” The first { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these step in driving defensively is to wear Drinking and then driving is very deaths are the result of someone your safety belt, see Safety Belts on who was drinking and driving. dangerous. Your reflexes, page 2‑11. In recent years, more than perceptions, attentiveness, and 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related { WARNING judgment can be affected by even deaths have been associated with a small amount of alcohol. You the use of alcohol, with about Assume that other road users can have a serious — or even 250,000 people injured. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other fatal — collision if you drive after For persons under 21, it is against drivers) are going to be careless drinking. Do not drink and drive or the law in every U.S. state to drink and make mistakes. Anticipate ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if alcohol. There are good medical, what they might do and be ready. psychological, and developmental you are with a group, designate a In addition: reasons for these laws. driver who will not drink. . Allow enough following The obvious way to eliminate the distance between you and Death and injury associated with leading highway safety problem is the driver in front of you. drinking and driving is a global for people never to drink alcohol . Focus on the task of driving. tragedy. and then drive. Driver distraction can cause Alcohol affects four things that Medical research shows that collisions resulting in injury or anyone needs to drive a vehicle: alcohol in a person's system can possible death. These simple judgment, muscular coordination, make crash injuries worse, defensive driving techniques vision, and attentiveness. especially injuries to the brain, could save your life. 8-4 Driving and Operating spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking And, of course, actual stopping that when anyone who has been distances vary greatly with the drinking — driver or passenger — is See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is in a crash, that person's chance of on page 4‑26. pavement or gravel; the condition of being killed or permanently disabled Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry, is higher than if the person had not time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the been drinking. push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle; time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force Control of a Vehicle reaction time. applied. The following three systems help Average reaction time is about Avoid needless heavy braking. to control the vehicle while three-fourths of a second. But that is Some people drive in driving — brakes, steering, and only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration accelerator. At times, as when with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather driving on snow or ice, it is easy to or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This ask more of those control systems another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not than the tires and road can provide. alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard Meaning, you can lose control of the eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out vehicle. See Traction Control alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy System (TCS) on page 8‑37. even in three-fourths of a second, braking. Keeping pace with the a vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following Adding non-dealer/non-retailer (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). distances eliminates a lot of accessories can affect vehicle That could be a lot of distance in unnecessary braking. That means performance. See Accessories and an emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life. Modifications on page 9 3. ‑ space between the vehicle and others is important. Driving and Operating 8-5

If the engine ever stops while the Speed Variable Assist Steering Steering Tips vehicle is being driven, brake The vehicle has a steering system It is important to take curves at a normally but do not pump the that varies the amount of effort reasonable speed. brakes. If the brakes are pumped, required to steer the vehicle in the pedal could get harder to push Traction in a curve depends on the relation to the speed of the vehicle. down. If the engine stops, there will condition of the tires and the road still be some power brake assist but The amount of steering effort surface, the angle at which the it will be used when the brake is required is less at slower speeds curve is banked, and vehicle speed. applied. Once the power assist is to make the vehicle more While in a curve, speed is the used up, it can take longer to stop maneuverable and easier to park. one factor that can be controlled. and the brake pedal will be harder At faster speeds, the steering effort If there is a need to reduce speed, to push. increases to provide a sport-like feel do it before entering the curve, while to the steering. This provides Adding non-dealer/non-retailer the front wheels are straight. maximum control and stability. accessories can affect vehicle Try to adjust the speed so you can performance. See Accessories and If the vehicle seems harder to steer drive through the curve. Maintain a Modifications on page 9‑3. than normal when parking or driving reasonable, steady speed. Wait to slowly, there may be a problem with accelerate until out of the curve, and Steering the system. You will still have power then accelerate gently into the steering, but steering will be stiffer straightaway. Power Steering than normal at slow speeds. See If power steering assist is lost your dealer/retailer for service. because the engine stops or the power steering system is not functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort. 8-6 Driving and Operating

Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving. find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision. the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock The vehicle can perform very well in positions, it can be turned a full emergencies like these. First apply 180 degrees very quickly without the brakes. See Braking on removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only page 8‑4. It is better to remove as to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement, much speed as possible from a quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease collision. Then steer around the you have avoided the object. off the accelerator and then, if there problem, to the left or right is nothing in the way, steer so that depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency the vehicle straddles the edge of the situations are always possible is a pavement. Turn the steering wheel good reason to practice defensive 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about driving at all times and wear safety one-eighth turn, until the right front belts properly. Driving and Operating 8-7 tire contacts the pavement edge. The three types of skids correspond While driving on a surface with Then turn the steering wheel to go to the vehicle's three control reduced traction, try your best to straight down the roadway. systems. In the braking skid, the avoid sudden steering, acceleration, wheels are not rolling. In the or braking, including reducing Loss of Control steering or cornering skid, too much vehicle speed by shifting to a lower speed or steering in a curve causes gear. Any sudden changes could Let us review what driving experts tires to slip and lose cornering force. cause the tires to slide. You might say about what happens when the And in the acceleration skid, too not realize the surface is slippery three control systems — brakes, much throttle causes the driving until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to steering, and acceleration do not — wheels to spin. recognize warning clues — such as have enough friction where the tires If the vehicle starts to slide, ease enough water, ice, or packed snow meet the road to do what the driver on the road to make a mirrored has asked. your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want surface — and slow down when you In any emergency, do not give up. the vehicle to go. If you start have any doubt. Keep trying to steer and constantly steering quickly enough, the vehicle Remember: Antilock brakes help seek an escape route or area of may straighten out. Always be ready avoid only the braking skid. less danger. for a second skid if it occurs. Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when In a skid, a driver can lose control of water, snow, ice, gravel, or other the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid material is on the road. For safety, most skids by taking reasonable slow down and adjust your driving to care suited to existing conditions, these conditions. It is important to and by not overdriving those slow down on slippery surfaces conditions. But skids are always because stopping distance is longer possible. and vehicle control more limited. 8-8 Driving and Operating

Competitive Driving the high performance brake fluid, follow the brake fluid service WARNING (Continued) Competitive driving may affect the recommendations outlined by the vehicle warranty. See the warranty fluid manufacturer. Do not use After driving through a large book before using the vehicle for silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids. puddle of water or a car/vehicle competitive driving. wash, lightly apply the brake Notice: If you use your vehicle Driving on Wet Roads pedal until the brakes work for competitive driving, the normally. Rain and wet roads can reduce engine may use more oil than it vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates would with normal use. Low oil ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through levels can damage the engine. Be Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause your sure to check the oil level often of driving conditions and avoid during competitive driving and vehicle to be carried away. If this driving through large puddles and keep the level at or near the happens, you and other vehicle deep-standing or flowing water. upper mark that shows the proper occupants could drown. Do not operating range on the engine oil ignore police warnings and be dipstick. For information on how { WARNING very cautious about trying to drive to add oil, see Engine Oil on through flowing water. Wet brakes can cause crashes. page 9‑10. They might not work as well in a CTS-V Only: For competitive quick stop and could cause driving, it is recommended that the pulling to one side. You could brake fluid be replaced with a high lose control of the vehicle. performance brake fluid that has a dry boiling point greater than (Continued) 279°C (534°F). After conversion to Driving and Operating 8-9

Hydroplaning . Keep the windshield washer Hill and Mountain Roads fluid reservoir filled. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Driving on steep hills or through . Have good tires with proper can build up under your vehicle's mountains is different than driving tread depth. See Tires on tires so they actually ride on the on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for page 9 58. water. This can happen if the road is ‑ driving in these conditions include: wet enough and you are going fast . Turn off cruise control. enough. When your vehicle is . Keep the vehicle serviced and in hydroplaning, it has little or no Highway Hypnosis good shape. contact with the road. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, Always be alert and pay attention to There is no hard and fast rule about tires, cooling system, and your surroundings while driving. transmission. hydroplaning. The best advice is to If you become tired or sleepy, find a slow down when the road is wet. safe place to park your vehicle . Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. Other Rainy Weather Tips and rest. Other driving tips include: Besides slowing down, other wet { WARNING weather driving tips include: . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. If you do not shift down, the . Allow extra following distance. . Keep interior temperature cool. brakes could get so hot that they . Pass with caution. . Keep your eyes moving — scan would not work well. You would . Keep windshield wiping the road ahead and to the sides. then have poor braking or even equipment in good shape. . Check the rearview mirror and none going down a hill. You could vehicle instruments often. crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. 8-10 Driving and Operating

Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) { WARNING on page 8‑33 improves vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) Drive carefully when there is snow slippery roads, but apply the brakes or with the ignition off is sooner than when on dry pavement. dangerous. The brakes will have or ice between the tires and the to do all the work of slowing down road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on and they could get so hot that Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for (32°F) when freezing rain begins to they would not work well. You slippery spots. Icy patches can fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in would then have poor braking or Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a even none going down a hill. freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy You could crash. Always have the treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are engine running and the vehicle in clear. Avoid sudden steering gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while on ice. . Stay in your own lane. Do not traction is not lost. Accelerating too swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped, center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the on slippery surfaces. speeds that let you stay in your tires slick, so there is even less own lane. traction. . Top of hills: Be Try not to break the fragile traction. alert — something could be in If you accelerate too fast, the drive your lane (stalled car, accident). wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. . Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. Driving and Operating 8-11

Blizzard Conditions WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be a serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about vehicle unless there is help nearby. . Clear away snow from around carbon monoxide, see Engine If possible, use the Roadside the base of your vehicle, Exhaust on page 8‑25. Service on page 12 6. To get help ‑ especially any that is blocking and keep everyone in the Snow can trap exhaust gases the exhaust pipe. vehicle safe: under your vehicle. This can . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon . Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does monoxide) gas to get inside. CO flashers. not collect there. could overcome you and kill you. . Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so . Open a window about 5 cm mirror. (two inches) on the side of you might not know it is in your the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from { WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument cause exhaust gases to get panel. Run the engine for short periods inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the Climate Control only as needed to keep warm, but carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful. cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the To save fuel, run the engine for only cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed short periods as needed to warm death. to the highest setting. See the vehicle and then shut the (Continued) Climate Control System in the engine off and close the window Index. most of the way to save heat. (Continued) 8-12 Driving and Operating

Repeat this until help arrives but little as possible. To prevent only when you feel really { WARNING transmission wear, wait until the uncomfortable from the cold. Moving wheels stop spinning before shifting about to keep warm also helps. If the vehicle's tires spin at high gears. Release the accelerator speed, they can explode, and you If it takes some time for help to pedal while shifting, and press or others could be injured. The lightly on the accelerator pedal arrive, now and then when you run vehicle can overheat, causing an the engine, push the accelerator when the transmission is in gear. engine compartment fire or other Slowly spinning the wheels in the pedal slightly so the engine runs damage. Spin the wheels as little faster than the idle speed. This forward and reverse directions as possible and avoid going keeps the battery charged to restart causes a rocking motion that could above 55 km/h (35 mph) as the vehicle and to signal for help free the vehicle. If that does not get with the headlamps. Do this as little shown on the speedometer. the vehicle out after a few tries, it as possible to save fuel. might need to be towed out. If the For information about using tire vehicle does need to be towed out, If the Vehicle is Stuck chains on the vehicle, see Tire see Towing the Vehicle on Chains on page 9‑81. page 9‑108. Slowly and cautiously spin the Rocking the Vehicle to Get wheels to free the vehicle when Vehicle Load Limits stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. it Out Turn the steering wheel left and It is very important to know how If stuck too severely for the traction much weight the vehicle can system to free the vehicle, turn the right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction carry. This weight is called the traction system off and use the vehicle capacity weight and rocking method. system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward includes the weight of all gear, or with a manual transmission, occupants, cargo and all between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and nonfactory-installed options. R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as Driving and Operating 8-13

Two labels on the vehicle show Tire and Loading Information number of occupant seating how much weight it may Label positions (A), and the maximum properly carry, the Tire and vehicle capacity weight (B) in Loading Information label and kilograms and pounds. the Certification label. The Tire and Loading Information label also shows { WARNING the tire size of the original Do not load the vehicle any equipment tires (C) and the heavier than the Gross recommended cold tire inflation Vehicle Weight Rating pressures (D). For more (GVWR), or either the information on tires and inflation maximum front or rear Gross see Tires on page 9‑58 and Tire Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Pressure on page 9‑66 . If you do, parts on the vehicle Label Example There is also important loading can break, and it can change A vehicle specific Tire and information on the Certification the way the vehicle handles. Loading Information label is label. It tells you the Gross These could cause you to lose attached to the vehicle's center Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) control and crash. Also, pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's and the Gross Axle Weight overloading can shorten the door open, you will find the label Rating (GAWR) for the front and life of the vehicle. attached near the door lock rear axle. See “Certification post. The Tire and Loading Label” later in this section. Information label shows the 8-14 Driving and Operating

Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo Load Limit and luggage load capacity 1. Locate the statement is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo XXX lbs” on your vehicle's being loaded on the vehicle. placard. That weight may not safely 2. Determine the combined exceed the available cargo weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. passengers that will be riding Example 1 in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 3. Subtract the combined a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to Example 1 = 453 kg weight of the driver and (1,000 lbs). passengers from XXX kg or your vehicle. Consult this XXX lbs. manual to determine how this B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ reduces the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity of (300 lbs). the available amount of cargo your vehicle. and luggage load capacity. C. Available Occupant and See Trailer Towing (Except For example, if the “XXX” Cargo Weight = 317 kg amount equals 1400 lbs and CTS-V) on page 8‑58 or Trailer (700 lbs). there will be five 150 lb Towing (CTS-V) on page 8‑59 for passengers in your vehicle, important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips. Driving and Operating 8-15

seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight. Certification Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to either the 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). driver's door edge or the lower Refer to the vehicle's Tire and center pillar on the driver's side Loading Information label for of the vehicle. The label tells specific information about the the gross weight capacity of vehicle's capacity weight and the vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). 8-16 Driving and Operating

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) fuel, and cargo. Never exceed These could cause you to lose . Never stack heavier the GVWR for the vehicle, or the control and crash. Also, things, like suitcases, Gross Axle Weight Rating overloading can shorten the inside the vehicle so that (GAWR) for either the front or life of the vehicle. some of them are above rear axle. the tops of the seats. If the vehicle is carrying a heavy . Do not leave an { WARNING load, it should be spread out. unsecured child restraint See “Steps for Determining Things you put inside the in the vehicle. Correct Load Limit” earlier in this section. vehicle can strike and injure . When you carry something people in a sudden stop or inside the vehicle, secure turn, or in a crash. { WARNING it whenever you can. . Put things in the cargo . Do not leave a seat folded Do not load the vehicle any area of the vehicle. In the down unless you need to. heavier than the Gross cargo area, put them as Vehicle Weight Rating far forward as you can. (GVWR), or either the Try to spread the weight maximum front or rear Gross evenly. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). (Continued) If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way the vehicle handles. (Continued) Driving and Operating 8-17

. Avoid downshifting to brake or . To break in new tires, drive at Starting and slow the vehicle when the moderate speeds and avoid hard Operating engine speed will exceed cornering for the first 322 km/ 4000 RPM. 200 miles. New tires do not have maximum traction and may tend New Vehicle Break-In . Do not let the engine labor. Never lug the engine in high to slip. Follow these recommended gear at low speeds. With a . New brake linings also need a guidelines during the first manual transmission, shift to the break in period. Avoid making 2 414 km/1,500 miles of driving – next lower gear. This rule hard stops during the first this vehicle. Parts have a break-in applies at all times, not just 322 km/200 miles. This is period and performance will be during the break-in period. recommended every time brake better in the long run. linings are replaced. . Do not participate in track For the first 2 414 km/1,500 miles: events, sport driving schools, . Avoid full throttle starts and or similar activities during this abrupt stops. break–in period. . Do not exceed 4,000 . Check engine oil with every engine rpm. refueling and add if necessary. . Avoid driving at any one Oil and fuel consumption may be constant speed, fast or slow. higher than normal during the first 2 414 km/1,500 miles. 8-18 Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions Notice: Using a tool to force the C (ON/RUN): This position is for key from its cylinder could cause driving. It is the position the ignition (Key Access) damage or break the key. Use the switch returns to after the engine correct key and turn the key only starts, and the key is released. with your hand. Make sure the To shift the transmission out of key is all the way in. If it is and P (Park), the ignition key has to be you have a manual transmission in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. vehicle, turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the The battery could be drained if the key hard. If none of this works, key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY then the vehicle needs service. or ON/RUN position with the engine off. The vehicle might not start if the A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only battery is allowed to drain for an position in which the key can be extended period of time. inserted or removed. This position locks the ignition and shifter on D (START): This position starts the automatic transmission vehicles, engine. When the engine starts, The key can be turned to four and the ignition and steering wheel release the key. The ignition switch different positions. on manual transmission vehicles. returns to ON/RUN for driving. To shift out of P (Park), the ignition B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This A warning tone will sound when the must be in the ON/RUN or ACC/ position lets you use things like the driver door is opened, the ignition is ACCESSORY and the brake pedal radio and the windshield wipers in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF must be applied. when the engine is off. This position and the key is in the ignition. allows you to turn off the engine. Driving and Operating 8-19

Ignition Positions Make sure the keyless access If you need to shift the transmission transmitter is inside the vehicle out of P (Park), the ignition control (Keyless Access) when trying to turn the ignition knob has to be in ACC/ You can turn the ignition control control knob. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. knob to four different positions. A (LOCK/OFF): The ignition control The battery could be drained To shift out of P (Park), ignition must knob cannot be removed from the if you leave the key in the ACC/ be in the ON/RUN or ACC/ vehicle. The keyless access ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position ACCESSORY and the regular brake transmitter must be inside the with the engine off. You may not be pedal must be applied. vehicle to start the engine. This able to start your vehicle if the position locks the ignition and shifter battery is allowed to drain for an on automatic transmission vehicles, extended period of time. and the ignition and steering wheel D (START): This position starts the on manual transmission vehicles. engine. B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use things Retained Accessory like the radio and the windshield Power (RAP) wipers when the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off the These vehicle accessories can be engine. used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off: C (ON/RUN): This position is for driving. It is the position the ignition . Audio System switch returns to after the engine Using a tool to force the ignition . Power Windows starts, and the control knob is control knob from its cylinder could released. . Sunroof (if equipped) damage it. Power to the audio system will work up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened. 8-20 Driving and Operating

Power to the windows or sunroof If the vehicle has the keyless See “Battery Replacement” under will work up to 10 minutes or until access system, your foot must be Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) any door is opened. For an on the brake pedal to start the System Operation (Key Access) on additional 10 minutes of operation, engine. To rotate the ignition control page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry close all the doors and turn the key knob, put your foot on the brake (RKE) System Operation (Keyless to ON/RUN and then back to pedal and turn the ignition control Access) on page 1‑7 for more LOCK/OFF. knob to the START position. If the information. ignition control knob does not turn, Notice: Do not try to shift to Starting the Engine try pushing the knob in and turning P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. again. When the engine begins If you do, you could damage the Place the transmission in the cranking, let go of the ignition proper gear. transmission. Shift to P (Park) control knob, it will return to the ON/ only when the vehicle is stopped. If the vehicle has the keyless RUN position. access system, the keyless access If the transmitter is not in the vehicle Manual Transmission transmitter must be authenticated in or something is interfering with the The shift lever should be in neutral order for the ignition control knob to transmitter, the Driver Information position and the parking brake turn. The transmitter can be Center (DIC) will display Electronic engaged. Hold the clutch pedal authenticated either by putting your Key Not Detected. See Driver down to the floor and start the foot on the brake pedal or by Information Center (DIC) on engine. The vehicle will not start if pushing the ignition control knob in. page 4‑31 for more information. the clutch pedal is not all the Automatic Transmission If the battery in the keyless access way down. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or transmitter needs replacing, the DIC N (Neutral). The engine will not start displays Replace Battery In Remote in any other position. To restart the Key. The vehicle can still be driven. engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Driving and Operating 8-21

Starting Procedure START for many seconds, for up to a maximum of 1. With your foot off the accelerator cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds. Wait at least pedal, turn the ignition key to 15 seconds to prevent cranking 15 seconds between each try, to START. If the vehicle has the motor damage. To prevent gear allow the cranking motor to cool keyless access system, push the damage, this system also down. When the engine starts, ignition control knob in and prevents cranking if the engine let go of the key and accelerator. rotate the knob to the START is already running. Engine If the vehicle starts briefly but position. When the engine starts, cranking can be stopped by then stops again, do the same let go of the ignition. The idle turning the ignition switch to thing. This clears the extra speed will go down as your ACC/ACCESSORY or gasoline from the engine. Do not engine gets warm. Do not race LOCK/OFF. race the engine immediately the engine immediately after Notice: Cranking the engine for after starting it. Operate the starting it. Operate the engine long periods of time, by returning engine and transmission gently and transmission gently to allow the key to the START position until the oil warms up and the oil to warm up and lubricate immediately after cranking has lubricates all moving parts. all moving parts. ended, can overheat and damage Notice: The engine is designed to The vehicle has a the cranking motor, and drain the work with the electronics in the Computer-Controlled Cranking battery. Wait at least 15 seconds vehicle. If you add electrical parts System. This feature assists in between each try, to let the or accessories, you could change starting the engine and protects cranking motor cool down. the way the engine operates. components. If the ignition key is 2. If the engine does not start after Before adding electrical equipment, check with your turned to the START position, 5‐10 seconds, especially in very and then released when the cold weather (below 0°F or dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine begins cranking, the −18°C), it could be flooded with engine might not perform engine will continue cranking for too much gasoline. Try pushing properly. Any resulting damage a few seconds or until the the accelerator pedal all the way would not be covered by the vehicle starts. If the engine does to the floor and holding it there vehicle warranty. not start and the key is held in as you hold the key in START 8-22 Driving and Operating

Engine Coolant Heater 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded Shifting Into Park 110-volt AC outlet. Vehicles with the engine coolant heater can use this option in { { WARNING cold weather conditions at or WARNING below −18°C (0°F) for easier It can be dangerous to get out of Plugging the cord into an the vehicle if the shift lever is not starting and better fuel economy ungrounded outlet could cause an during engine warm-up. Plug in the fully in P (Park) with the parking electrical shock. Also, the wrong coolant heater at least four hours brake firmly set. The vehicle can kind of extension cord could before starting your vehicle. roll. If you have left the engine An internal thermostat in the overheat and cause a fire. You running, the vehicle can move plug-end of the cord may exist could be seriously injured. Plug suddenly. You or others could be which will prevent engine coolant the cord into a properly grounded injured. To be sure the vehicle will heater operation at temperatures three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. not move, even when you are on above −18°C (0°F). If the cord will not reach, use a fairly level ground, use the steps heavy-duty three-prong extension that follow. If you are pulling a To Use the Engine Coolant cord rated for at least 15 amps. Heater trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 8‑54. 1. Turn off the engine. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the 2. Open the hood and unwrap the Use this procedure to shift into cord as it was before to keep it P (Park): electrical cord. The cord is away from moving engine parts. located near the driver side strut If you do not, it could be 1. Hold the brake pedal down and tower. damaged. set the parking brake. Remove the plastic cap to Contact your dealer/retailer for See Parking Brake (Manual) on access the plug. information on how long to use the page 8‑34 or Parking Brake heater in your particular area. (Electric) on page 8‑35 for more information. Driving and Operating 8-23

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) parking on a hill and shifting the by holding in the button on the WARNING (Continued) transmission into P (Park) is not shift lever and pushing the lever done properly and then it is difficult all the way toward the front of P (Park) with the parking brake to shift out of P (Park). To prevent the vehicle. firmly set. And, if you leave the lock, set the parking brake vehicle with the engine running, it and then shift into P (Park). To find 3. Turn the ignition key to could overheat and even catch LOCK/OFF. out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)" fire. You or others could be listed previously. 4. For vehicles with key access, injured. Do not leave the vehicle If torque lock does occur, your remove the key and take it with with the engine running. you. If you can leave the vehicle vehicle may need to be pushed with the ignition key in your If you have to leave the vehicle with uphill by another vehicle to relieve hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). the engine running, the vehicle must the parking pawl pressure, so you Vehicles with the keyless access be in P (Park) and the parking brake can shift out of P (Park). system, take the keyless access set. After shifting into P (Park), try to transmitter with you. move the shift lever out without first Shifting Out of Park pushing the button on the shift lever. Leaving the Vehicle With This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. the Engine Running If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park). The shift lock release is (Automatic Transmission) designed to: Torque Lock . { WARNING (Automatic Transmission) Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in It can be dangerous to leave the Torque lock is when the weight P (Park) with the shift lever vehicle with the engine running. of the vehicle puts too much button fully released, for vehicles force on the parking pawl in the The vehicle could move suddenly with key access. transmission. This happens when if the shift lever is not fully in (Continued) 8-24 Driving and Operating

. Prevent movement of the shift If you still are unable to shift out of on page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions lever out of P (Park), unless the P (Park): (Keyless Access) on page 8‑19 for ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ more information. ACCESSORY and the brake 1. Fully release the shift lever pedal is applied. button. For vehicles with the keyless access ignition, turn the ignition to The shift lock release is always 2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift lever LOCK/OFF and remove the keyless functional except in the case of an access transmitter. uncharged or low voltage (less than button again. 9 volt) battery. 3. Move the shift lever to the If you are towing a trailer, see desired position. Trailer Towing (Except CTS-V) on If the vehicle has an uncharged page 8‑58 or Trailer Towing battery or a battery with low voltage, If you still cannot move the shift (CTS-V) on page 8‑59. try charging or jump starting the lever from P (Park), consult your battery. See Jump Starting on dealer/retailer or a professional Parking Over Things page 9 103 for more information. ‑ towing service. That Burn To shift out of P (Park) use the following: Parking (Manual { WARNING 1. Apply the brake pedal. Transmission) 2. Then press the shift lever button. Before you get out of the vehicle, Things that can burn could touch place the shift lever in R (Reverse) hot exhaust parts under the 3. Move the shift lever to the and firmly apply the parking brake. vehicle and ignite. Do not park desired position. over papers, leaves, dry grass, For vehicles with the key access ignition, turn the ignition key to or other things that can burn. OFF/LOCK, and remove the key. See Ignition Positions (Key Access) Driving and Operating 8-25

Running the Vehicle Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) While Parked . There are holes or openings { WARNING It is better not to park with the in the vehicle body from engine running. But if you ever have damage or after-market Engine exhaust contains Carbon to, here are some things to know. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. { WARNING can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may . The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled. that may block underbody immediately. airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area that sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a has no fresh air ventilation. For . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air more information, see Engine due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. Exhaust on page 8‑25. . The vehicle’s exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. (Continued) 8-26 Driving and Operating

{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING Transmission It can be dangerous to get out of It is dangerous to get out of the the vehicle if the automatic The shift lever is located on the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully transmission shift lever is not fully center console between the front in P (Park) with the parking brake in P (Park) with the parking brake seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 8‑22. If you are pulling a Follow the proper steps to be sure There are several different positions the vehicle will not move. See trailer, see Driving Characteristics for the shift lever. and Towing Tips on page 8 54. Shifting Into Park on page 8‑22. ‑ P (Park): This position locks the If parking on a hill and pulling a rear wheels. It is the best position to Make sure the shift lever is fully in trailer, see Driving Characteristics use when you start the engine P (Park) before starting the engine. and Towing Tips on page 8‑54. because the vehicle cannot move The vehicle has an automatic easily. transmission shift lock control system. You must fully apply the regular brakes first and then press Driving and Operating 8-27 the shift lever button before you can N (Neutral): In this position, the D (Drive): This position is for shift from P (Park) when the ignition engine does not connect with the normal driving. It provides the best key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot wheels. To restart when the vehicle fuel economy. If you need more shift out of P (Park), ease pressure is already moving, use N (Neutral) power for passing, and you are: on the shift lever and push the shift only. You can also use N (Neutral) . Going less than 55 km/h lever all the way into P (Park) as when the vehicle is being towed. (35 mph), push the accelerator you maintain brake application. pedal about halfway down. Then press the shift lever button { WARNING and move the shift lever into . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or another gear. See Shifting Out of Shifting into a drive gear while the more, push the accelerator all Park on page 8‑23. engine is running at high speed is the way down. Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) dangerous. Unless your foot is The transmission will shift down while the vehicle is moving firmly on the brake pedal, the to a lower gear and have more forward could damage the vehicle could move very rapidly. power. transmission. The repairs would You could lose control and hit Downshifting the transmission in not be covered by the vehicle people or objects. Do not shift slippery road conditions could result warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only into a drive gear while the engine in skidding, see Skidding under after the vehicle is stopped. is running at high speed. Loss of Control on page 8‑7 R (Reverse): Use this gear to While in D (Drive), the CTS-V back up. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine vehicle's first forward gear At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) running at high speed may automatic shift after starting the can be used to rock the vehicle damage the transmission. The vehicle will be from 1 (First). back and forth to get out of snow, repairs would not be covered by Afterwards, the CTS-V vehicles will ice, or sand without damaging your the vehicle warranty. Be sure the always start in 2 (Second) gear. transmission. See If the Vehicle is engine is not running at high While in M (Manual Mode), for Stuck on page 8‑12 for additional speed when shifting the vehicle. increased performance, the vehicle information. will start in 1 (First) gear. 8-28 Driving and Operating

M (Manual Mode): This position Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows SPORT MODE will be displayed allows the driver to select the range you to shift an automatic in the DIC momentarily. of gears appropriate for current transmission similar to a manual The vehicle will remain in sport driving conditions. See Driver Shift transmission. mode if the shift lever is not Control (DSC) later in this section. DSC can be enabled through the moved. Sport mode will shift Notice: Spinning the tires or shift lever or the Tap Shift controls, automatically but remain in a holding the vehicle in one place located on the back of the steering gear longer then it would in on a hill using only the wheel (if equipped). normal driving mode based on braking and acceleration. accelerator pedal may damage To use the DSC feature using the the transmission. If you are shift lever: 2. To go from sport mode to DSC, stuck, do not spin the tires. move the shift lever forward to When stopping on a hill, use the 1. Move the shift lever to the upshift or rearward to downshift. brakes to hold the vehicle in right from D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode). 3. When in DSC, you can exit back place. into sport mode by continuously Once in M (Manual Mode) holding the shifter in the Manual Mode position, if you do not move the upshift (forward) position for shift lever forward or rearward, approximately one second. Driver Shift Control (DSC) or the vehicle will be in sport mode. Tap Shift When you are in sport mode Notice: If you drive the vehicle at the vehicle will still shift high RPMs without upshifting automatically. The transmission while using Driver Shift Control may remain in a gear longer (DSC), you could damage the than it would in the normal vehicle. Always upshift when driving mode based on braking, necessary while using DSC. throttle input, and vehicle lateral acceleration. Driving and Operating 8-29

To use the DSC feature with 3. When in DSC, you can exit back CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights the steering wheel paddles into sport mode by continuously around the outside of the (if equipped): holding the upshift paddle (right tachometer as a performance hand side) for approximately up-shift light. These tracers flash to one second. indicate when to shift to the next higher gear to avoid the engine speed limit. See Tachometer on page 4‑17 for more information. While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have firmer, quicker shifting. You can use this for sport driving or when climbing or descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to down shift for more power or engine braking. 1. Move the shift lever to the The transmission will only allow you right from D (Drive) to to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine M (Manual Mode). The tachometer display on the Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The instrument panel cluster will show 2. The paddles are on the back of transmission will not automatically which gear the vehicle is in. The the steering wheel. Tap the left shift to the next lower gear if the number indicates the requested paddle to downshift, and the engine RPM is too high, nor to the gear range when moving the shift right paddle to upshift. next higher gear when the maximum lever forward or rearward. See engine RPM is reached. Tachometer on page 4‑17 for more information on the odometer. 8-30 Driving and Operating

If shifting is prevented for any Manual Transmission CTS-V reason, the currently selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating If the vehicle has a manual that the transmission has not transmission, the shift lever is shifted gears. located on the center console between the front seats. The While in the DSC mode, the CTS following explains how to operate automatic transmission will the manual transmission. automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a stop. This will CTS allow for more power during acceleration. The CTS-V automatic transmission will not automatically downshift on hard acceleration when in 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal DSC mode. and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly When accelerating the vehicle let up on the clutch pedal as you from a stop in snowy and icy press the accelerator pedal. conditions, you may want to shift Shift into 1 (First) when you are into second gear. A higher gear going less than 40 km/h (25 mph). allows the vehicle to gain more For CTS-V, shift into 1 (First) when traction on slippery surfaces. you are going less than 64 km/h (40 mph ). If you come to a complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into 1 (First). Driving and Operating 8-31

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal R (Reverse): To back up, press Notice: If you skip more than one as you let up on the accelerator down the clutch pedal, completely gear when you downshift, or if pedal and shift into 2 (Second). stop the vehicle, and shift into you race the engine when you Then, slowly let up on the clutch R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch release the clutch pedal while pedal as you press the accelerator pedal slowly while pressing the downshifting, you could damage pedal. accelerator pedal. the engine, clutch, driveshaft or 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and The CTS-V transmission prevents the transmission. Do not skip 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third), you from easily shifting into gears or race the engine when 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the R (Reverse) using normal shifting downshifting. same way you do for 2 (Second). force while the vehicle is moving at If the vehicle speed drops below Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as more than 5 km/h (3 mph), or when 32 km/h (20 mph), or if the engine is you press the accelerator pedal. the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. not running smoothly, you should To stop, let up on the accelerator downshift to the next lower gear. Shift Speeds (Manual You may have to downshift two or pedal and press the brake pedal. Transmission) Just before the vehicle stops, press more gears to keep the engine the clutch pedal and the brake running smoothly or for good pedal, and shift to Neutral. { WARNING performance. Neutral: Use this position when If you skip a gear when you you start or idle your engine. Your downshift, you could lose control shift lever is in Neutral when it is of the vehicle. You could injure centered in the shift pattern, not in yourself or others. Do not shift any gear. down more than one gear at a time when you downshift. 8-32 Driving and Operating

Up-Shift Light CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights Drive Systems around the outside of the tachometer as a performance up-shift light. These tracers flash to All-Wheel Drive indicate when to shift to the next With this feature, engine power is higher gear to avoid the engine always sent to all four wheels. It is speed limit. See Tachometer on fully automatic, and adjusts itself as page 4‑17 for more information. needed for road conditions. CTS vehicles with a manual When using a compact spare tire on transmission have an up-shift light Skip Shift (CTS-V) an AWD vehicle, the system on the instrument panel. This light Under light acceleration, the automatically detects the compact shows when to shift to the next transmission will only allow you to spare and disables AWD. To restore higher gear for the best fuel shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth). AWD operation and prevent economy. Shifts from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or excessive wear on system, replace 3 (Third) are not allowed. This helps When this light comes on, you can the compact spare with a full-size improve fuel mileage. shift to the next higher gear if tire as soon as possible. See weather, road, and traffic conditions Under harder acceleration, Skip Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑102 allow. For the best fuel economy, Shift is disabled, and the driver has for more information. accelerate slowly and shift when the all gears available. light comes on. While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift. Driving and Operating 8-33

Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it there will not be enough time to becomes necessary to slam on the apply the brakes if that vehicle brakes and continue braking to suddenly slows or stops. Always Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a leave enough room up ahead to System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels stop, even with ABS. are slowing down. If one of the This vehicle has the Antilock Brake wheels is about to stop rolling, the Using ABS System (ABS), an advanced computer will separately work the electronic braking system that helps Do not pump the brakes. Just hold brakes at each wheel. prevent a braking skid. the brake pedal down firmly and let ABS can change the brake pressure ABS work. The ABS pump or motor When the engine is started and the to each wheel, as required, faster might be heard operating, and the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS than any driver could. This can help brake pedal might be felt to pulsate, checks itself. A momentary motor or the driver steer around the obstacle but this is normal. clicking noise might be heard while while braking hard. this test is going on, and it might Braking in Emergencies even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the ABS allows the driver to steer and pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates brake at the same time. In many on wheel speed and controls emergencies, steering can help braking pressure accordingly. more than even the very best Remember: ABS does not change braking. the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 4‑27. 8-34 Driving and Operating

Parking Brake (Manual) If the ignition is on, the brake Notice: Driving with the parking system warning light on the brake on can overheat the brake instrument panel cluster should system and cause premature come on. If it does not, you need to wear or damage to brake system have the vehicle serviced. See parts. Make sure that the parking Brake System Warning Light on brake is fully released and the page 4‑26 for more information. brake warning light is off before driving. A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set, the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to move. To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake. If you are towing a trailer and The parking brake pedal is located parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing on the lower portion of the (Except CTS-V) on page 8‑58 or instrument panel to the left of the Trailer Towing (CTS-V) on steering wheel. page 8‑59 for more information. To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down, then push the To release the parking brake, pull parking brake pedal down. the release lever located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. Driving and Operating 8-35

Parking Brake (Electric) The system has two warning lights and five Driver Information Center (DIC) messages. See Brake System { WARNING Warning Light on page 4‑26 and On vehicles with a manual Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 31 for more information. In transmission, releasing the clutch ‑ case of insufficient electrical power, and pressing the accelerator will the EPB cannot be applied or release the Electric Parking released. Brake. If the vehicle is not in a gear, the vehicle could move, and EPB Apply you or others could be injured. The EPB can be applied any time Make sure the vehicle is in a gear Vehicles with the electric parking the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is before attempting to drive away. brake (EPB) have a switch in the applied by momentarily lifting up on To avoid unexpected vehicle center console. the EPB switch. Once fully applied, movement, do not partially the BRAKE light will be on, and the The EPB takes the place of the release the clutch or press the DIC message “Park Brake Set” will accelerator pedal until you are manual parking brake system, the be displayed. While the brake is ready to release the parking foot pedal and release handle. The being applied, the status light will brake and drive away. EPB can always be activated, even flash until full apply is reached. if the ignition is OFF. To avoid If the light does not come on, draining the battery, do not operate or remains flashing, you need to the EPB too often without the have the vehicle serviced. Do not engine running. drive the vehicle if the BRAKE light is flashing. See your dealer/retailer. See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑26 for more information. 8-36 Driving and Operating

If the EPB is applied while the If the yellow light is on, the EPB has be displayed. The EPB is released vehicle is in motion, a chime will detected an error in another system when the BRAKE light is off and the sound, and the DIC message and is operating with reduced DIC message “Park Brake “Release Park Brake Switch” will be functionality. To apply the EPB when Released” is displayed. displayed. The vehicle will this light is on, lift up on the EPB If the yellow light is on, the EPB has decelerate as long as the switch is switch and hold it in the up position. detected an error in another system held in the up position. Releasing Full application of the parking brake and is operating with reduced the EPB switch during the by the EPB system may take a functionality. To release the EPB deceleration will release the parking longer period of time than normal when this light is on, push down on brake. If the switch is held in the up when this light is on. Continue to the EPB switch and hold it in the position until the vehicle comes to a hold the switch until the BRAKE down position. EPB release may stop, the EPB will remain applied. light remains on. If the yellow light is take a longer period of time than If the BRAKE light is on, either the on, see your dealer/retailer. normal when this light is on. EPB is applied, or there is a failure If the EPB fails to apply, the rear Continue to hold the switch until the in the hydraulic brake system. wheels should be blocked to BRAKE light is off. If the yellow light If this light is flashing continuously, prevent vehicle movement. is on, see your dealer/retailer. the EPB is only partially applied or EPB Release Notice: Driving with the parking released, or there is a problem with brake on can overheat the brake the EPB. The DIC message To release the EPB, turn the ignition system and cause premature “Service Park Brake” will be switch to the ON/RUN position, wear or damage to brake system displayed. If this light is flashing apply and hold the brake pedal, parts. Make sure that the parking continuously, release the EPB, and and push down momentarily on the brake is fully released and the red attempt to apply it again. If this light EPB switch. If you attempt to brake warning light is off before continues to flash, do not drive the release the EPB without the brake driving. vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. pedal applied, a chime will sound, and the DIC message “Step On Brake to Release Park Brake” will Driving and Operating 8-37

Automatic EPB Release Brake Assist Ride Control Systems The EPB will automatically release if (Except CTS-V) the vehicle is running, placed into This vehicle has a brake assist Traction Control gear and an attempt is made to feature designed to assist the driver System (TCS) drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration in stopping or decreasing vehicle when the EPB is applied, to The vehicle has a Traction Control speed in emergency driving preserve park brake lining life. System (TCS) that limits wheel conditions. This feature uses the spin. This is especially useful in The EPB can also be used to stability system hydraulic brake slippery road conditions. On a prevent roll back for vehicles with a control module to supplement the rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system manual transmission taking off on a power brake system under operates if it senses that one or hill. In a situation where no roll back conditions where the driver has both of the rear wheels are spinning is desired, an applied EPB will allow quickly and forcefully applied the or beginning to lose traction. On an both feet to be used for the clutch brake pedal in an attempt to quickly All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the and accelerator pedals in stop or slow down the vehicle. The system will operate if it senses that preparation for starting the vehicle stability system hydraulic brake any of the wheels are spinning or moving in the intended direction. control module increases brake beginning to lose traction. When this In this situation, perform the normal pressure at each corner of the happens, the system brakes the clutch and/or accelerator actions vehicle until the ABS activates. spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces required to begin moving the Minor brake pedal pulsations or engine power to limit wheel spin. vehicle. There is no need to push pedal movement during this time The system may be heard or felt the switch to release the EPB. is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal while it is working, but this is If you are towing a trailer and as the driving situation dictates. normal. parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing The brake assist feature will (Except CTS-V) on page 8‑58 or automatically disengage when Trailer Towing (CTS-V) on the brake pedal is released or page 8‑59 for more information. brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. 8-38 Driving and Operating

or snow and rocking the vehicle is Adding non-dealer/non-retailer required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck accessories can affect your on page 8‑12 for more information. vehicle's performance. See See Winter Driving on page 8‑10 Accessories and Modifications on for information on using TCS when page 9‑3 for more information. driving in snowy or icy conditions. The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light StabiliTrak System flashes when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. The vehicle has an electronic stability control system called The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light StabiliTrak. It is an advanced comes on if there is a problem computer controlled system that with the traction control system. assists with directional control of the When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning vehicle in difficult driving conditions. light is on, the system will not limit The TCS/StabiliTrak button is wheel spin. Adjust your driving located on the instrument StabiliTrak activates when the accordingly. See Traction Control panel (CTS) or the steering system senses a discrepancy System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on wheel (CTS-V). between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually page 4‑28 for more information. Press and release the TCS/ traveling. StabiliTrak selectively TCS automatically comes on StabiliTrak button and the traction control system will turn off and the applies braking pressure at any one whenever the vehicle is started. of the vehicle's brakes to help steer To limit wheel spin, especially in TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will come on. Press the button again the vehicle in the direction which slippery road conditions, the system you are steering. should always be left on, but it may to turn the system back on. For be necessary to turn the system off information on turning StabiliTrak if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud off and on, see StabiliTrak System following. Driving and Operating 8-39

warning light displays, the system is StabiliTrak comes on automatically not operational. Driving should be whenever the vehicle is started. adjusted accordingly. See Driver The system should be left on to help Information Center (DIC) on assist with directional control of the page 4‑31 and Messages and vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to be Traction Control System (TCS)/ turned off, press and hold the When the system activates, the StabiliTrak® Light on page 4‑28 for TCS/StabiliTrak button until the Traction Control System (TCS)/ more information. TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes StabiliTrak warning light flashes on on and STABILITRAK OFF comes the instrument panel. A noise may on the DIC. More steering effort is be heard or a vibration may be felt required when the system is in the brake pedal. This is normal. turned off. Continue to steer the vehicle in the If cruise control is being used when intended direction. the StabiliTrak activates, the cruise If there is a problem detected control will automatically disengage. with StabiliTrak, SERVICE The TCS/StabiliTrak button is When road conditions allow, STABILITRAK displays on the located on the instrument reengage the cruise control. Driver Information Center (DIC) and panel (CTS) or the steering See Cruise Control on page 8‑41 the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light wheel (CTS-V). for more information. comes on the instrument panel cluster. When this message and 8-40 Driving and Operating

Competitive Driving Mode Notice: When traction control is TOUR: Use for normal city and turned off, or Competitive Driving highway driving. This setting Competitive Driving Mode Mode is active, it is possible to provides a smooth, soft ride. To select this optional handling lose traction. If you attempt to SPORT: Use where road conditions mode, press the TCS/StabiliTrak shift with the drive wheels or personal preference demand button quickly two times and spinning with a loss of traction, it more control. This setting provides is possible to cause damage to STABILITRAK COMPETITIVE more “feel”, or response to road MODE displays in the Driver the transmission. Do not attempt conditions. Information Center (DIC). While in to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction. Damage caused The setting can be changed at any the StabiliTrak Competitive Mode, time. Based on road conditions, the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light by misuse of the vehicle is not steering wheel angle and the comes on, TCS does not limit wheel covered. See the warranty book for additional information. vehicle speed, the system spin, and more effort is required to automatically adjusts to provide the turn the steering wheel. Adjust your best handling while providing a driving accordingly. Magnetic Ride Control smooth ride. The Touring and Sport Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button With this feature on the CTS-V, the modes will feel similar on a smooth again, or turn the ignition to Magnetic Ride Control system road. Select a new setting whenever ACC/ACCESSORY and restart the adjusts the ride of the vehicle to driving conditions change. vehicle, to turn TCS back on and Touring or Sport modes. Magnetic turn the TCS/StabiliTrak warning Ride Control monitors the light off. suspension system to determine the proper system response. Driving and Operating 8-41

The Driver Information Center (DIC) Cruise Control your foot on the accelerator. Cruise briefly displays SUSPENSION control does not work at speeds MODE TOURING or SUSPENSION below about 40 km/h (25 mph). { WARNING MODE SPORT on vehicle startup or When the brakes are applied, the when a new mode is selected. Cruise control can be dangerous cruise control turns off. where you cannot drive safely at If the vehicle has the Stabilitrak® a steady speed. So, do not use system and begins to limit wheel the cruise control on winding spin while you are using cruise roads or in heavy traffic. control, the cruise control will Cruise control can be dangerous automatically disengage. See StabiliTrak System on page 8 38. on slippery roads. On such roads, ‑ Press and release this button, When road conditions allow you to fast changes in tire traction can located in the center of the safely use it again, the cruise instrument panel, to change modes. cause excessive wheel slip, and control can be turned back on. you could lose control. Do not use Limited-Slip Rear Axle cruise control on slippery roads. Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle With cruise control, a speed of can give more traction on snow, about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more mud, ice, sand or gravel. When can be maintained without keeping traction is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle. 8-42 Driving and Operating

SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make the vehicle WARNING (Continued) decelerate. You could be startled and even [ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise lose control. Keep the cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. control switch off until you want to use cruise control. Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the 1. Press the I button. parking brake is set, or if the master 2. Get up to the desired speed. cylinder brake fluid level is low. 3. Press the SET− button located The cruise control light on the CTS Shown, CTS-V Similar on the steering wheel and instrument panel cluster comes on release it. The cruise control buttons are after the cruise control has been set located on the left side of the to the desired speed. 4. Take your foot off the steering wheel. accelerator. I (On/Off): Press to turn the { WARNING Resuming a Set Speed system on or off. The indicator light Suppose the cruise control is set at on the button turns on when cruise If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, a desired speed and then the brake control is on. is applied. This shuts off the cruise you might hit a button and go into control. But it does not need to be + RES (Resume/Accelerate): cruise when you do not want to. Press to make the vehicle reset. (Continued) accelerate or resume to a previously Once the vehicle is driving at about set speed. 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. Driving and Operating 8-43

The vehicle goes back to the . To slow down in very small Ending Cruise Control amounts, press the SET– button previously set speed and stays There are four ways to end cruise there. on the steering wheel briefly. Each time this is done, the control: Increasing Speed While Using vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h . Step lightly on the brake pedal Cruise Control (1 mph) slower. (manual and automatic transmissions). To increase the cruise speed while Passing Another Vehicle While using cruise control: Using Cruise Control . Press the clutch pedal to the . floor (manual transmissions). Press and hold the +RES button Use the accelerator pedal to on the steering wheel until the increase the vehicle's speed. When . Press [ on the steering wheel. desired speed is reached, then you take your foot off the pedal, the release it. vehicle slows down to the previously . Press I on the steering wheel. . To increase vehicle speed in set cruise speed. Erasing Speed Memory small increments, press the Using Cruise Control on Hills +RES button. Each time this is The cruise control set speed done, the vehicle goes about How well the cruise control works memory is erased when the cruise 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. on hills depends upon the vehicle's control or the ignition is turned off. speed, load, and the steepness of Reducing Speed While Using the hills. When going up steep hills, Cruise Control you might have to step on the To reduce the vehicle's speed while accelerator pedal to maintain the using cruise control: vehicle's speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or . Press and hold the SET button – shift to a lower gear to keep the on the steering wheel until the vehicle's speed down. When the desired speed is reached, then brakes are applied the cruise control release it. turns off. 8-44 Driving and Operating

Object Detection { WARNING Systems The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Ultrasonic Parking Assist Assist (URPA) system does not replace driver vision. It cannot For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . Objects that are below the it assists the driver with parking bumper, underneath the and avoiding objects while in vehicle, or if they are too R (Reverse). URPA operates at close or far from the vehicle speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and the sensors on the rear bumper . Children, pedestrians, detect objects up to 2.4m (8 ft.) bicyclists, or pets. The display uses three color-coded lights to provide distance and behind the vehicle, and at least If you do not use proper care 25.4 cm (10 in.) off the ground. system information and is located before and while backing; vehicle above the rear window. It can be damage, injury, or death could seen by looking over your right occur. Even with URPA, always shoulder. check behind the vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure to look for objects and check the vehicle's mirrors. Driving and Operating 8-45

How the System Works The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object: URPA comes on automatically and the display briefly illuminates to Description Metric English indicate the system is working when the shift lever is moved into amber light 2.4 m 8 ft. R (Reverse). amber/amber lights 1.0 m 40 in. If the vehicle is traveling faster then amber/amber/red lights and 8 km/h (5 mph) in reverse, the red continuous beeping for 0.6 m 23 in. light on the rear display flashes. five seconds Objects must be at least 25.4 cm amber/amber/red lights flashing (10 in.) off the ground and below and continuous beeping for 0.3 m 1 ft. trunk level, and within 2.4m (8 ft.) five seconds from the rear bumper to be detected. The distance may be less during warmer or humid weather. The system can be disabled through A single beep sounds the first time the Driver Information Center (DIC). an object is detected between See “Park Assist” under Vehicle 1.0 m (40 in.) and 2.4m (8 ft.) away. Personalization on page 4‑51 for Beeping occurs continuously when more information. the vehicle is 0.6 m (23 in.) or closer to an object. 8-46 Driving and Operating

When the System Does Not . A trailer was attached to the Rear Vision Seem to Work Properly vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the trunk Camera (RVC) If the URPA system will not activate during the last drive cycle, the The vehicle may have a Rear Vision due to a temporary condition, the red light may illuminate in the Camera system. Read this entire message PARK ASSIST OFF will be rear display. Once the attached section before using it. displayed on the DIC and a red light object is removed, URPA will will be shown on the rear URPA return to normal operation. The rear vision camera system is display when the shift lever is designed to help the driver when . moved into R (Reverse). This A tow bar is attached to the backing up by displaying a view of occurs under the following vehicle. the area behind the vehicle. conditions: . The vehicle's bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle to . The driver disables the system. { WARNING your dealer/retailer to repair the . The ultrasonic sensors are not system. The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) clean. Keep the vehicle's rear system does not replace driver . Other conditions may affect bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, vision. RVC does not: ice and slush. For cleaning system performance, such as instructions, see Exterior Care vibrations from a jackhammer or . Detect objects that are the compression of air brakes on outside the camera's field of on page 9‑110. a very large truck. view, below the bumper, If the system is still disabled after or underneath the vehicle. driving forward at least 25 km/h . Detect children, pedestrians, (15 mph), take the vehicle to your bicyclists, or pets. dealer/retailer. Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the RVC screen, or use the screen during longer, higher (Continued) Driving and Operating 8-47

the video image automatically Rear Vision Camera Error WARNING (Continued) disappears from the inside rear Messages view mirror. speed backing maneuvers or Service Rear Vision Camera where there could be cross-traffic. Vehicles With a Navigation System: This message can display Your judged distances using the System when the system is not receiving screen will differ from actual information it requires from other When the driver shifts the vehicle vehicle systems. distances. into R (Reverse), the video image So if you do not use proper care automatically appears on the If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see your dealer/ before backing up, you could hit navigation screen. Once the driver retailer. a vehicle, child, pedestrian, shifts out of R (Reverse), the bicyclist, or pet, resulting in navigation screen will go back to the Rear Vision Camera Location vehicle damage, injury, or death. last screen that had been displayed, Even though the vehicle has the after a delay. RVC system, always check The delay that is received after carefully before backing up by shifting out of R (Reverse) is checking behind and around the approximately 5 seconds. The delay vehicle. can be cancelled by performing one of the following: Vehicles Without a Navigation . Shifting in to P (Park). System . Reach a vehicle speed of When the key is in the ON/RUN 8 km/h (5 mph). position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video There may be a message on the image automatically appears on the rear vision camera screen that inside rear view mirror. Once the states “Check Surroundings for The camera is located above the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), Safety”. license plate. 8-48 Driving and Operating

The area displayed by the camera is When the System Does Not limited and does not display objects Seem To Work Properly that are close to either corner or under the bumper. The area The rear vision camera system displayed can vary depending on might not work properly or display a vehicle orientation or road clear image if: conditions. The distance of the . It is dark. image that appears on the screen . The sun or the beam of differs from the actual distance. headlights is shining directly into The following illustration shows the the camera lens. field of view that the camera . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else provides. builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth. . The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer/retailer. A. View displayed by the camera. . There are extreme temperature B. Corner of the rear bumper. changes. Driving and Operating 8-49

Fuel The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle Use of the recommended fuel is an Identification Number (VIN) on important part of the proper page 11‑1. maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the engine clean and maintain Recommended Fuel optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline If the vehicle has a , use advertised as TOP TIER Detergent regular unleaded gasoline with a Gasoline. posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, Look for the TOP TIER label on the an audible knocking noise, fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets commonly referred to as spark enhanced detergency standards knock, might be heard when driving. developed by auto companies. A list If this occurs, use a gasoline rated of marketers providing TOP TIER at 87 octane or higher as soon as Detergent Gasoline can be found at possible. If heavy knocking is heard www.toptiergas.com. when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs service. If the vehicle has the 6.2L (VIN Code P), use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For best performance, use premium The 8th digit of the Vehicle unleaded gasoline with a posted Identification Number (VIN) shows octane rating of 93. In an the code letter or number that emergency, you can use regular identifies the vehicle's engine. 8-50 Driving and Operating unleaded gasoline with an octane California Fuel Fuels in Foreign rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any Requirements Countries aggressive driving maneuvers such If the vehicle is certified to meet If you plan on driving in another as wide open throttle applications. California Emissions Standards, it is country outside the United States or You might also hear audible spark designed to operate on fuels that Canada, the proper fuel might be knock during acceleration. Refill the meet California specifications. hard to find. Never use leaded tank with premium fuel as soon as See the underhood emission control gasoline or any other fuel not possible to avoid damaging the label. If this fuel is not available in recommended in the previous text engine. If heavy knocking is heard states adopting California emissions on fuel. Costly repairs caused by when using gasoline rated at 91 standards, the vehicle will operate use of improper fuel would not be octane or higher, the engine needs satisfactorily on fuels meeting covered by the vehicle warranty. service. federal specifications, but emission To check the fuel availability, ask an control system performance might auto club, or contact a major oil Gasoline Specifications be affected. The malfunction company that does business in the indicator lamp could turn on and the country where you will be driving. At a minimum, gasoline should vehicle might fail a smog-check test. meet ASTM specification D 4814 See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on in the United States or CAN/ Fuel Additives page 4‑23. If this occurs, return to CGSB 3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. ‐ your authorized dealer/retailer for To provide cleaner air, all Some gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the in the United States are now octane-enhancing additive called condition is caused by the type of required to contain additives that methylcyclopentadienyl manganese fuel used, repairs might not be help prevent engine and fuel system tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend covered by the vehicle warranty. deposits from forming, allowing the against the use of gasolines emission control system to work containing MMT. See Fuel Additives properly. In most cases, nothing on page 8 50 for additional ‑ should have to be added to the fuel. information. Driving and Operating 8-51

However, some gasolines contain gasoline additive recommended by Some gasolines that are only the minimum amount of General Motors. It is available at not reformulated for low additive required to meet U.S. your dealer/retailer. emissions can contain an Environmental Protection Agency Gasolines containing oxygenates, octane-enhancing additive called regulations. To help keep fuel such as ethers and ethanol, and methylcyclopentadienyl manganese injectors and intake valves clean, reformulated gasolines might be tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant or if the vehicle experiences available in your area. We where you buy gasoline whether the problems due to dirty injectors or recommend that you use these fuel contains MMT. We recommend valves, look for gasoline that is gasolines, if they comply with the against the use of such gasolines. advertised as TOP TIER Detergent specifications described earlier. Fuels containing MMT can reduce Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER However, E85 (85% ethanol) and the life of spark plugs and the label on the fuel pump to ensure other fuels containing more than performance of the emission control gasoline meets enhanced 10% ethanol must not be used in system could be affected. The detergency standards developed vehicles that were not designed for malfunction indicator lamp might by the auto companies. A list of those fuels. turn on. If this occurs, return to your marketers providing TOP TIER dealer/retailer for service. Detergent Gasoline can be found at Notice: This vehicle was not www.toptiergas.com. designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel For customers who do not use TOP containing methanol. It can TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, corrode metal parts in the fuel one bottle of GM Fuel System system and also damage plastic Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel and rubber parts. That damage tank at every engine oil change, would not be covered under the can help clean deposits from fuel vehicle warranty. injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only 8-52 Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank Lamp could turn on. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 23. { WARNING ‑

Fuel vapor burns violently and a { WARNING fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and Fuel can spray out on you if you others, read and follow all the open the fuel cap too quickly. instructions on the fuel pump If you spill fuel and then island. Turn off the engine when something ignites it, you could be refueling. Do not smoke near fuel badly burned. This spray can or when refueling the vehicle. happen if the tank is nearly full, The tethered fuel cap is located Do not use cellular phones. and is more likely in hot weather. behind a hinged fuel door on the Keep sparks, flames, and Open the fuel cap slowly and passenger side of the vehicle. smoking materials away from fuel. wait for any hiss noise to stop. Do not leave the fuel pump To open the fuel door, push the Then unscrew the cap all the way. unattended when refueling the rearward center edge in and release and it will open. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not vehicle. This is against the law in top off or overfill the tank and wait a some places. Do not re-enter the To remove the fuel cap, turn it few seconds after you have finished vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep slowly counterclockwise. pumping before removing the children away from the fuel pump; While refueling, hang the tethered nozzle. Clean fuel from painted never let children pump fuel. fuel cap from the hook on the surfaces as soon as possible. fuel door. See Exterior Care on page 9‑110. When reinstalling the cap, turn it When replacing the fuel cap, turn clockwise until it clicks once, it clockwise until it clicks once. otherwise the Malfunction Indicator Make sure the cap is fully installed. Driving and Operating 8-53

The diagnostic system can Filling a Portable Fuel determine if the fuel cap has been WARNING (Continued) left off or improperly installed. This Container would allow fuel to evaporate into . Bring the fill nozzle in contact the atmosphere. See Malfunction { WARNING with the inside of the fill Indicator Lamp on page 4‑23. opening before operating the Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be { WARNING while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is electricity discharge from the complete. If a fire starts while you are container can ignite the fuel . Do not smoke while refueling, do not remove the vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by and the vehicle damaged if this shutting off the pump or by occurs. To help avoid injury to you . Do not use a cellular phone notifying the station attendant. and others: while pumping fuel. Leave the area immediately. . Dispense fuel only into approved containers. Notice: If a new fuel cap is needed, be sure to get the right . Do not fill a container while it type of cap from your dealer/ is inside a vehicle, in a retailer. The wrong type fuel cap vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, might not fit properly, might or on any surface other than cause the malfunction indicator the ground. lamp to light, and could damage (Continued) the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑23. 8-54 Driving and Operating

Towing vehicle — such as a motorhome, The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is see Recreational Vehicle Towing on equipped with the proper trailer page 9‑108. towing equipment. To identify the General Towing trailering capacity of the vehicle, see Information Driving Characteristics Trailer Towing (Except CTS-V) on page 8 58 or Trailer Towing Only use towing equipment that has and Towing Tips ‑ (CTS-V) on page 8 59. Trailering been designed for the vehicle. ‑ changes handling, acceleration, Contact your dealer/retailer or { WARNING braking, durability and fuel trailering retailer for assistance with economy. With the added weight, preparing the vehicle for towing a The driver can lose control when the engine, transmission, wheel trailer. pulling a trailer if the correct assemblies and tires are forced to See the following trailer towing equipment is not used or the work harder and under greater information in this section: vehicle is not driven properly. loads. The trailer also adds wind For example, if the trailer is too . For information on driving while resistance, increasing the pulling heavy, the brakes may not work towing a trailer, see “Driving requirements. For safe trailering, Characteristics and well — or even at all. The driver correctly use the proper trailering Towing Tips”. and passengers could be equipment. seriously injured. The vehicle may The following information has . For maximum vehicle and trailer also be damaged; the resulting weights, see “Trailer Towing”. important trailering tips and rules repairs would not be covered by for your safety and that of your . For information on equipment to the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer passengers. Read this section tow a trailer, see “Towing only if all the steps in this section carefully before pulling a trailer. Equipment”. have been followed. Ask your For information on towing a disabled dealer/retailer for advice and vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on information about towing a trailer page 9‑108. For information on with the vehicle. towing the vehicle behind another Driving and Operating 8-55

Pulling A Trailer . Vehicles with automatic Check all trailer hitch parts and transmissions can tow in D attachments, safety chains, Here are some important points: (Drive) but M (Manual Mode) is electrical connectors, lamps, tires . There are many laws, including recommended. See Manual and mirror adjustments. If the trailer speed limit restrictions that apply Mode on page 8‑28 for more has electric brakes, start the vehicle to trailering. Check for legal information. Use a lower gear if and trailer moving and then apply requirements with state or the transmission shifts too often. the trailer brake controller by hand provincial police. For vehicles with a manual to be sure the brakes are working. transmission, it is better not to . Do not tow a trailer at all during use the highest gear. During the trip, check regularly to be the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles) sure that the load is secure, and the the new vehicle is driven. The . Use the cruise control when lamps and trailer brakes are working engine, axle or other parts could towing. properly. be damaged. . Obey speed limit restrictions. Towing with a Stability Control . Do not drive faster than the During the first 800 km System (500 miles) that a trailer is maximum posted speed for towed, do not drive over 80 km/h trailers, or no more than 90 km/h When towing, the sound of the (50 mph) and do not make starts (55 mph), to reduce wear on the stability control system might be at full throttle. This reduces wear vehicle. heard. The system is reacting to the on the vehicle. vehicle movement caused by the Driving with a Trailer trailer, which mainly occurs during Towing a trailer requires experience. cornering. This is normal when Get familiar with handling and towing heavier trailers. braking with the added trailer weight. The vehicle is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself. 8-56 Driving and Operating

Following Distance Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the burned out. For this reason you may driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with the think other drivers are seeing the This can help to avoid situations vehicle. The vehicle could be signal when they are not. It is that require heavy braking and damaged. Avoid making very important to check occasionally to sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering. be sure the trailer bulbs are still Passing When turning with a trailer, make working. wider turns than normal. Do this so More passing distance is needed the trailer won't strike soft Driving On Grades when towing a trailer. Because the shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees Reduce speed and shift to a lower rig is longer, it is necessary to go or other objects. Avoid jerky or gear before starting down a long much farther beyond the passed sudden maneuvers. Signal well in or steep downgrade. If the vehicle before returning to the lane. advance. transmission is not shifted down, the Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer longer work well. wheel with one hand. Then, to move The arrows on the instrument panel Vehicles with an automatic the trailer to the left, move that hand flash whenever signaling a turn or to the left. To move the trailer to the transmission can tow in D (Drive). lane change. Properly hooked up, Shift the transmission to a lower right, move your hand to the right. the trailer lamps also flash, telling Always back up slowly and, gear if the transmission shifts too other drivers the vehicle is turning, often under heavy loads and/or hilly if possible, have someone changing lanes or stopping. guide you. conditions. For vehicles with a manual transmission, it is better not to use the highest gear. Driving and Operating 8-57

When towing at high altitude on Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in steep uphill grades, consider the place, release the brake pedal following: Engine coolant will boil at { WARNING until the chocks absorb the load. a lower temperature than at normal 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then altitudes. If the engine is turned off Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift immediately after towing at high the trailer attached can be into P (Park) for vehicles with an altitude on steep uphill grades, the dangerous. If something goes automatic transmission or into vehicle may show signs similar to wrong, the rig could start to move. gear for vehicles with a manual engine overheating. To avoid this, People can be injured, and both transmission. let the engine run while parked, the vehicle and the trailer can be preferably on level ground, with the 5. Release the brake pedal. damaged. When possible, always automatic transmission in P (Park) Leaving After Parking on a Hill for a few minutes before turning the park the rig on a flat surface. engine off. For vehicles with manual 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal If parking the rig on a hill: transmissions, let the engine run while you: 1. Press the brake pedal, but do while parked, preferably on level . Start the engine, ground, with the transmission out of not shift into P (Park) yet for gear and the parking brake applied, vehicles with an automatic . Shift into a gear, and for a few minutes before turning the transmission, or into gear for . Release the parking brake. engine off. If the overheat warning vehicles with a manual comes on, see Engine Overheating transmission. Turn the wheels 2. Let up on the brake pedal. on page 9‑23. into the curb if facing downhill or 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is into traffic if facing uphill. clear of the chocks. 2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks. 8-58 Driving and Operating

Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated Towing assuming only the driver is in the (Except CTS-V) tow vehicle and it has all the The vehicle needs service more Before pulling a trailer, there are required trailering equipment. often when pulling a trailer. See this three important considerations that The weight of additional optional manual's Maintenance Schedule or have to do with weight: equipment, passengers and cargo in Index for more information. Things the tow vehicle must be subtracted . The weight of the trailer. that are especially important in from the maximum trailer weight. trailer operation are automatic . The weight of the trailer tongue. transmission fluid, engine oil, axle Ask your dealer/retailer for our lubricant, belts, cooling system and . The total weight on the vehicle's trailering information or advice, brake system. It is a good idea to tires. or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer inspect these before and during Weight of the Trailer the trip. Assistance Offices on page 12‑3 How heavy can a trailer safely be? for more information. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. It should never weigh more than Weight of the Trailer Tongue 450 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that Engine Cooling When Trailer can be too heavy. The tongue load (A) of any trailer is Towing an important weight to measure Speed, altitude, road grades, because it affects the total gross The cooling system may temporarily outside temperature, special weight of the vehicle. The Gross overheat during severe operating equipment, and the amount of Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the conditions. See Engine Overheating tongue weight the vehicle can carry curb weight of the vehicle, any on page 9‑23. must be considered. See “Weight of cargo carried in it, and the people the Trailer Tongue” later in this who will be riding in the vehicle. section for more information. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in Driving and Operating 8-59 the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue After loading the trailer, weigh the Towing Equipment weight the vehicle can carry, which trailer and then the tongue, will also reduce the trailer weight the separately, to see if the weights are Hitches vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, proper. If they are not, adjustments Use the correct hitch equipment. the tongue load must be added to might be made by moving some See your dealer/retailer or a hitch the GVW because the vehicle will items around in the trailer. dealer for assistance. be carrying that weight, too. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12 Total Weight on the Vehicle's . The rear bumper on the vehicle for more information about the Tires is not intended for hitches. Do vehicle's maximum load capacity. Inflate the vehicle's tires to the not attach rental hitches or other upper limit for cold tires. These bumper-type hitches to it. Use numbers can be found on the only a frame-mounted hitch that Certification label or see Vehicle does not attach to the bumper. Load Limits on page 8‑12. Do not . Will any holes be made in the go over the GVW limit for the body of the vehicle when the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the trailer hitch is installed? If there weight of the trailer tongue. are, seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If the holes are Trailer Towing (CTS-V) not sealed, dirt, water, and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) The vehicle is neither designed nor from the exhaust can get into the intended to tow a trailer. vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 8‑25. For a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). 8-60 Driving and Operating

Safety Chains Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is Always attach chains between the Add-Ons not operating. vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of The vehicle has an airbag system. the trailer to help prevent the tongue Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything from contacting the road if it Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see becomes separated from the hitch. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Notice: Do not add anything Leave enough slack so the rig can Vehicle on page 2‑40 and Adding electrical to the vehicle unless turn. Never allow safety chains to Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped you check with your dealer/ drag on the ground. Vehicle on page 2‑40. retailer first. Some electrical Trailer Brakes equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would Does the trailer have its own not be covered by the vehicle's brakes? Be sure to read and follow warranty. Some add-on electrical the instructions for the trailer brakes equipment can keep other so they are installed, adjusted and components from working as maintained properly. they should. Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's brake system. If this is done, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. Vehicle Care 9-1

Hydraulic Clutch ...... 9-14 Bulb Replacement Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-15 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-37 Cooling System ...... 9-18 Halogen Bulbs ...... 9-37 General Information Engine Coolant ...... 9-18 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Engine Overheating ...... 9-23 Lighting ...... 9-37 General Information ...... 9-2 Overheated Engine Protection Fog Lamps ...... 9-37 California Proposition Operating Mode ...... 9-24 License Plate Lamp 65 Warning ...... 9-3 Power Steering Fluid ...... 9-25 (Sedan) ...... 9-38 California Perchlorate Materials Washer Fluid ...... 9-25 License Plate Lamp Requirements ...... 9-3 Brakes ...... 9-26 (Wagon) ...... 9-39 Accessories and Brake Fluid ...... 9-27 Replacement Bulbs ...... 9-39 Modifications ...... 9-3 Battery ...... 9-29 Vehicle Checks All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-30 Electrical System Doing Your Own Rear Axle ...... 9-30 Electrical System Service Work ...... 9-4 Starter Switch Check ...... 9-31 Overload ...... 9-40 Hood ...... 9-5 Automatic Transmission Shift Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment Lock Control System Breakers ...... 9-41 Engine Compartment Fuse Overview ...... 9-6 Check ...... 9-32 Block (CTS) ...... 9-41 Engine Cover ...... 9-9 Ignition Transmission Lock Engine Compartment Fuse Engine Oil ...... 9-10 Check ...... 9-32 Block (CTS-V) ...... 9-45 Engine Oil Life System ...... 9-12 Park Brake and P (Park) Engine Compartment Fuse Automatic Transmission Mechanism Check ...... 9-32 Block (CTS Wagon) ...... 9-48 Fluid ...... 9-13 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-33 Rear Compartment Fuse Manual Transmission Headlamp Aiming Block (CTS) ...... 9-51 Fluid ...... 9-14 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-34 Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V) ...... 9-53 Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS Wagon) ...... 9-55 9-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire General Information Tires ...... 9-58 Balance ...... 9-79 Winter Tires ...... 9-59 Wheel Replacement ...... 9-80 For service and parts needs, visit Low-Profile Tires ...... 9-59 Tire Chains ...... 9-81 your dealer/retailer. You will receive Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 9-60 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 9-81 genuine GM parts and GM-trained Tire Designations ...... 9-62 Tire Sealant and and supported service people. Tire Terminology and Compressor Kit ...... 9-84 Genuine GM parts have one of Definitions ...... 9-63 Storing the Tire Sealant and these marks: Tire Pressure ...... 9-66 Compressor Kit (Sedan) . . . . 9-92 Tire Pressure for High-Speed Storing the Tire Sealant and Operation ...... 9-67 Compressor Kit (Wagon) . . . 9-93 Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Changing ...... 9-94 System ...... 9-68 Compact Spare Tire ...... 9-102 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation ...... 9-69 Jump Starting Tire Inspection ...... 9-73 Jump Starting ...... 9-103 Tire Rotation ...... 9-73 Towing When It Is Time for New Towing the Vehicle ...... 9-108 Tires ...... 9-74 Recreational Vehicle Buying New Tires ...... 9-75 Towing ...... 9-108 Different Size Tires and Wheels ...... 9-77 Appearance Care Uniform Tire Quality Exterior Care ...... 9-110 Grading ...... 9-78 Interior Care ...... 9-114 Vehicle Care 9-3

California Proposition Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other 65 Warning Modifications systems on the vehicle. Your GM Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non-dealer/non-retailer dealer/retailer can accessorize one, contain and/or emit chemicals accessories to the vehicle can affect the vehicle using genuine GM known to the State of California to vehicle performance and safety, Accessories. When you go to your cause cancer and birth defects or including such things as airbags, GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM other reproductive harm. Engine braking, stability, ride and handling, Accessories, you will know that exhaust, many parts and systems, emissions systems, aerodynamics, GM-trained and supported service many fluids, and some component durability, and electronic systems technicians will perform the work wear by-products contain and/or like antilock brakes, traction control, using genuine GM Accessories. emit these chemicals. and stability control. Some of these Also, see Adding Equipment to the accessories could even cause Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on malfunction or damage not covered California Perchlorate page 2‑40. Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components Certain types of automotive resulting from the installation or use applications, such as airbag of non-GM certified parts, including initiators, seat belt pretensioners, control module modifications, is not and lithium batteries contained in covered under the terms of the remote keyless transmitters, may vehicle warranty and may affect contain perchlorate materials. remaining warranty coverage for Special handling may be necessary. affected parts. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. 9-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks than this manual can. To order the WARNING (Continued) proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper page 12‑12. nuts, bolts, and other Service Work This vehicle has an airbag system. fasteners. English and metric Before attempting to do your own { WARNING fasteners can be easily service work, see Airbag System confused. If the wrong Check on page 2‑42. You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts vehicle could be damaged if you can later break or fall off. Keep a record with all parts receipts try to do service work on a vehicle You could be hurt. and list the mileage and the date without knowing enough about it. of any service work performed. If doing some of your own service See Maintenance Records on . Be sure you have sufficient work, use the proper service page 10‑11. knowledge, experience, manual. It tells you much more the proper replacement about how to service the vehicle parts, and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task. (Continued) Vehicle Care 9-5

Hood To open the hood:

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the secondary hood release lever. The lever is located under the front edge of 1. Pull the hood release lever with the grille near the center. Push this symbol on it. It is located the release lever up and raise inside the vehicle on the lower the hood. left side of the instrument panel. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly. 9-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview CTS 3.6 L V6 Engine shown, 3.0 L V6 Engine similar Vehicle Care 9-7

A. Windshield Washer Fluid H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on Oil on page 9‑10. page 9‑25. I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of B. Engine Compartment Fuse View). See Engine Oil on Block (CTS) on page 9‑41 or page 9‑10. Engine Compartment Fuse J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir Block (CTS-V) on page 9‑45 or (If Equipped) (Not Shown). Engine Compartment Fuse See Hydraulic Clutch on Block (CTS Wagon) on page 9‑14. page 9‑48. K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. (Out of View). See Brakes on See Jump Starting on page 9‑26. page 9‑103. L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Pressure Cap. See Engine See Jump Starting on Coolant on page 9‑18. page 9‑103. M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on E. Passenger Compartment Air page 9‑15. Filter. See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 7‑6. F. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on page 9‑18. G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under Engine Cover). See Power Steering Fluid on page 9‑25. 9-8 Vehicle Care

CTS-V 6.2 L V8 Engine Vehicle Care 9-9

A. Windshield Washer Fluid H. System Pressure Engine Cover Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on Cap. See Cooling System on page 9‑25. page 9‑18. Engine Cover (CTS) B. Engine Compartment Fuse I. Engine Cooling Fans. See Block (CTS) on page 9‑41 or Cooling System on page 9‑18. Engine Compartment Fuse J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir Block (CTS-V) on page 9‑45 or (If Equipped) (Not Shown). Engine Compartment Fuse See Hydraulic Clutch on Block (CTS Wagon) on page 9‑14. page 9‑48. K. Brake Master Cylinder C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Reservoir. See Brakes on See Jump Starting on page 9‑26. page 9‑103. L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Pressure Cap. See Engine See Jump Starting on Coolant on page 9‑18. page 9‑103. To remove: M. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir E. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of (Under Engine Cover). See 1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). View). See Engine Oil on Power Steering Fluid on 2. Raise the right front corner of page 9 10. ‑ page 9‑25. engine cover (B) to release from F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on the ball stud. Oil on page 9 10. ‑ page 9‑15. 3. Pull the engine cover (B) forward G. Passenger Compartment to slide the rear tabs (C) out from Air Filter. See Passenger under the retainers. Compartment Air Filter on page 7‑6. 9-10 Vehicle Care

4. Lift and remove the engine 1. Raise the front of engine The engine oil dipstick handle cover. cover (A) to release from the is a yellow loop. See Engine 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to ball studs (B). Compartment Overview on reinstall engine cover. 2. Pull the engine cover forward page 9‑6 for the location of the until clear of the smaller piece. engine oil dipstick. Engine Cover (CTS-V) 3. Lift and remove the engine 1. Turn off the engine and give the cover. oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to done, the oil dipstick might not reinstall engine cover. show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it Engine Oil with a paper towel or cloth, Checking Engine Oil then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip It is a good idea to check the engine down, and check the level. oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil When to Add Engine Oil must be warm and the vehicle must If the oil is below the cross-hatched be on level ground. area at the tip of the dipstick, To remove: add at least one liter/quart of the The engine cover consists of recommended oil. This section two pieces. Only the larger front explains what kind of oil to use. piece needs to be removed to For engine oil crankcase capacity, access the engine oil and power see Capacities and Specifications steering fill caps. on page 11‑2. Vehicle Care 9-11

Notice: Do not add too much oil. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use . American Petroleum Institute If the engine has so much oil that (API) starburst symbol Look for three things: the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows . GM4718M the proper operating range, the This vehicle's engine requires a engine could be damaged. special oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard may be identified as synthetic. However, not all Oils meeting these requirements synthetic oils will meet this GM should have the starburst standard. Use only an oil that symbol on the container. This meets GM Standard GM4718M. symbol indicates that the oil has See Engine Compartment Overview Notice: Using oils that do not been certified by the American on page 9‑6 for the location of the have the GM4718M Standard Petroleum Institute (API). designation can cause engine engine oil fill cap. This vehicle's engine was filled at damage not covered by the the factory with a Mobil 1® synthetic Add enough oil to put the level vehicle warranty. somewhere in the proper operating oil meeting all requirements for this range. Push the dipstick all the way . SAE 5W-30 vehicle. back in when through. SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. 9-12 Vehicle Care

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding Engine Oil Life System that, if driving under the best oil to maintain engine oil level, oil conditions, the oil life system might meeting GM Standard GM4718M When to Change Engine Oil not indicate that an oil change is might not be available. You can add This vehicle has a computer system necessary for over a year. However, substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 that indicates when to change the the engine oil and filter must be with the starburst symbol at all engine oil and filter. This is based changed at least once a year and at temperatures. Substitute oil not on engine revolutions and engine this time the system must be reset. meeting GM Standard GM4718M temperature, and not on mileage. Your dealer/retailer has trained should not be used for an oil Based on driving conditions, the service people who will perform this change. mileage at which an oil change is work using genuine parts and reset indicated can vary considerably. the system. It is also important to Engine Oil Additives / Engine check the oil regularly and keep it at Oil Flushes For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset the proper level. Do not add anything to the oil. every time the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset The recommended oils with the When the system has calculated accidentally, the oil must be starburst symbol that meet GM changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) standards are all that is needed for that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is since the last oil change. good performance and engine Remember to reset the oil life necessary. A “Change Engine protection. system whenever the oil is changed. Oil Soon” message comes on. Engine oil system flushes are not See Engine Oil Messages on recommended and could cause page 4‑40. Change the oil as engine damage not covered by the soon as possible within the next vehicle warranty. 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible Vehicle Care 9-13

How to Reset the Engine Oil What to Do with Used Oil Automatic Transmission Life System Used engine oil contains elements Fluid Reset the system whenever the that can be unhealthy for your skin engine oil is changed so that the and could even cause cancer. Do How to Check Automatic system can calculate the next not let used oil stay on your skin. Transmission Fluid engine oil change. To reset the Clean your skin and nails with soap It is not necessary to check the system: and water, or a good hand cleaner. transmission fluid level. Wash or properly dispose of clothing 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with A transmission fluid leak is the or rags. See the manufacturer's the engine off. only reason for fluid loss. If a leak warnings about the use and occurs, take the vehicle to the 2. Fully press and release the disposal of oil products. dealer/retailer service department accelerator pedal three times Used oil can be a threat to the and have it repaired as soon as within five seconds. environment. If you change your possible. If the “Change Engine Oil Soon” own oil, be sure to drain all the oil There is a special procedure for message is not on, the system is from the filter before disposal. Never checking and changing the reset. dispose of oil by putting it in the transmission fluid. Because this The system is reset when the trash, pouring it on the ground, into procedure is difficult, it should be sewers, or into streams or bodies of “Change Engine Oil Soon” message done at the dealer/retailer service is off. water. Recycle it by taking it to a department. Contact your dealer/ place that collects used oil. retailer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 12‑12. 9-14 Vehicle Care

Change the fluid and filter at the Hydraulic Clutch Refer to the Maintenance intervals listed in Scheduled Schedule for the proper fluid to use. Maintenance on page 10‑3, and It is not necessary to regularly See Recommended Fluids and be sure to use the fluid listed in check clutch fluid unless you Lubricants on page 10‑7. The fluid Recommended Fluids and suspect there is a leak in the requires changing every two years. Lubricants on page 10‑7. system. Adding fluid will not correct See Scheduled Maintenance on a leak. A fluid loss in this system page 10‑3. Manual Transmission could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check and Add Fluid Fluid When to Check and What Visually check the clutch fluid It is not necessary to check the to Use reservoir to make sure the fluid level manual transmission fluid level. is at the MIN (minimum) line on the A transmission fluid leak is the only side of the reservoir. The hydraulic reason for fluid loss. If a leak clutch fluid system should be closed occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer/ and sealed. retailer for service. Have it repaired as soon as possible. You may also Do not remove the cap to check have the fluid level checked by your the fluid level or to top-off the fluid dealer/retailer when the oil is level. Remove the cap only when changed. See Recommended Fluids The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir necessary to add the proper fluid cap has this symbol on it. See until the level reaches the MIN line. and Lubricants on page 10‑7 for the proper fluid to use. Engine Compartment Overview on page 9‑6 for reservoir location. Vehicle Care 9-15

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine compartment on the driver To inspect the air cleaner/filter, side of the vehicle, near the front. remove the filter from the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview and lightly shake the filter to release on page 9‑6 for more information loose dust and dirt. If the filter on location. remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter: Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the 1. Turn the ignition off. Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 3. Disconnect the electrical 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval. connector from the air box. See Scheduled Maintenance on 4. Loosen the screw on the clamp page 10 3 for more information. ‑ holding the air outlet duct in If you are driving in dusty/dirty place. Do not remove the clamp. conditions, inspect the filter at each Move the duct aside. engine oil change. 5. Remove the hose from the air cleaner housing mounting arm. Move the hose aside.

2. Remove the side cover by pulling up on the front of the cover. 9-16 Vehicle Care

6. Remove the three air cleaner 7. Move the air cleaner housing 8. Remove the air cleaner filter housing cover screws. cover and remove the cover from the air cleaner housing. from the air cleaner housing. Vehicle Care 9-17

How to Reinstall Engine Air 4. Install the air cleaner housing Cleaner/Filter cover screws. { WARNING 1. Install the air cleaner into the air 5. Install the hose to the air cleaner Operating the engine with the air cleaner housing. The outer air housing mounting arm. The hose cleaner/filter off can cause you or cleaner filter seal must be fitted must be routed correctly. others to be burned. The air properly in the air cleaner 6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct cleaner not only cleans the air; it housing. to the air cleaner housing. helps to stop flames if the engine 2. Align the air cleaner housing 7. Tighten the air cleaner outlet backfires. Use caution when cover tabs to the air cleaner duct screw clamp. working on the engine and do not housing. drive with the air cleaner/filter off. 8. Attach the electrical connector to 3. Install the air cleaner housing the air box. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is cover. 9. Reinstall the side cover. off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. 9-18 Vehicle Care

Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other { WARNING than DEX-COOL® can cause The cooling system allows the premature engine, heater core, engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition, working temperature. under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require when the engine is not running When you decide it is safe to lift the changing sooner, at 50 000 km hood, here is what you will see: and can cause injury. Keep (30,000 miles) or 24 months, hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant { WARNING in the vehicle. Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, The cooling system in the vehicle you can be burned. for all and the intercooler is filled with DEX-COOL®. This Do not run the engine if there is a coolant is designed to remain in the leak. If you run the engine, it vehicle for five years or 240 000 km could lose all coolant. That could (150,000 miles), whichever occurs A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s) cause an engine fire, and you first. (Out of View) could be burned. Get any leak The following explains the cooling B. Coolant Surge Tank and fixed before you drive the vehicle. system and how to check and add Pressure Cap coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 9‑23. Vehicle Care 9-19

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Checking Coolant drinkable water and DEX-COOL® The vehicle must be on a level coolant. If using this mixture, { WARNING surface when checking the coolant nothing else needs to be added. level. Adding only plain water to This mixture: The engine coolant reservoir is the cooling system can be . Gives freezing protection down located in the engine compartment dangerous. Plain water, or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside on the driver side of the vehicle. other liquid such as alcohol, can temperature. boil before the proper coolant See Engine Compartment Overview . Gives boiling protection up to on page 9‑6. mixture will. The vehicle's coolant 129°C (265°F), engine Check to see if coolant is visible in warning system is set for the temperature. proper coolant mixture. With plain the surge tank. If the coolant inside water or the wrong mixture, the . Protects against rust and the surge tank is boiling, do not do engine could get too hot but you corrosion. anything else until it cools down. would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL warning. The engine could catch . Helps keep the proper engine fire and you or others could be COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture temperature. of clean, drinkable water and burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant clean, drinkable water and Notice: If an improper coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling DEX-COOL® coolant. mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. system is cool before this is done. The repair cost would not be See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18 covered by the vehicle warranty. for more information. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts. 9-20 Vehicle Care

If the engine is warm or hot, the If coolant is needed, add the proper coolant level should be at or above { WARNING DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the the FROID/FULL COLD line on the coolant surge tank. side of the coolant surge tank. If the An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even If no coolant is visible in the surge engine is cold, the coolant level tank, add coolant as follows: should be near the FROID/FULL when the engine is not running COLD line on the side of the coolant and can cause injury. Keep 1. Remove the coolant surge tank surge tank. If it is not, there could hands, clothing, and tools away pressure cap when the cooling be a leak in the cooling system. from any underhood electric fan. system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and How to Add Coolant to the upper radiator hose, is no longer Surge Tank { WARNING hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about { WARNING Steam and scalding liquids from a one-quarter turn and then stop. hot cooling system can blow out If you hear a hiss, wait for that to You can be burned if you spill and burn you badly. They are stop. A hiss means there is still coolant on hot engine parts. under pressure, and if you turn some pressure left. Coolant contains ethylene glycol the surge tank pressure and it will burn if the engine parts cap — even a little — they can are hot enough. Do not spill come out at high speed. Never coolant on a hot engine. turn the cap when the cooling system, including the surge tank Notice: This vehicle has a pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the specific coolant fill procedure. cooling system and surge tank Failure to follow this procedure pressure cap to cool if you ever could cause the engine to have to turn the pressure cap. overheat and be severely damaged. Vehicle Care 9-21

By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FROID/FULL COLD line on the side of the coolant surge tank. 5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. Notice: If the pressure cap is not 2. Then keep turning the pressure 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with tightly installed, coolant loss and cap slowly and remove it. the proper mixture, to slightly possible engine damage may above the FROID/FULL COLD occur. Be sure the cap is properly line on the side of the coolant and tightly secured. surge tank. Recheck the coolant level in the 4. With the coolant surge tank bottle next time you use your pressure cap off, start the vehicle to insure the system is full engine and let it run until you when cold. See Engine Coolant on can feel the upper radiator hose page 9 18. getting hot. The upper radiator ‑ hose is the top hose coming out of the radiator, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Watch out for the engine cooling fans. 9-22 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant in the Adding Coolant to the 2. Then keep turning the pressure Intercooler System (CTS-V) Intercooler System cap slowly and remove it. ® The vehicle must be on a level Coolant (CTS-V) 3. Add the proper DEX-COOL surface when checking the coolant coolant mixture to the fill neck level. until the coolant is within the cold fill region. The super charged engine intercooler coolant fill neck is With the intercooler system located in the engine compartment pressure cap off, start the on the passenger side of the engine and let it run for a couple vehicle. See Engine Compartment of minutes. Then turn the engine Overview on page 9‑6. off. By this time, the coolant level inside the fill neck may be On the coolant fill neck, there is lower. If the level drops where a cold fill region between the coolant is no longer within the two horizontal lines shown. cold fill region of the fill neck with the engine off, add more of Check to see if coolant is visible in 1. Remove the intercooler system the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture the coolant fill neck. If the coolant pressure cap when the to the fill neck until the level is is not visible or below the cold fill intercooler system hoses are no again visible in the cold fill region in the fill neck, add a longer hot. Turn the pressure 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable region. ® cap slowly counterclockwise water and DEX-COOL coolant at about one-quarter of a turn. 4. Then replace the pressure cap. the coolant fill bottle, but be sure the If you hear a hiss, wait for that to Be sure the pressure cap is cooling system is cool before this stop. This allows any pressure hand-tight and fully seated. is done. still left to be vented. Vehicle Care 9-23

Notice: If the pressure cap is not If you do decide to lift the hood , If Steam Is Coming From The tightly installed, coolant loss and make sure the vehicle is parked on Engine Compartment possible engine damage may a level surface. occur. Be sure the cap is properly Then check to see if the engine { WARNING and tightly secured. cooling fans are running. If the If the coolant is not at the proper engine is overheating, the fan(s) Steam from an overheated engine level when the system cools down should be running. If they are not, can burn you badly, even if you again, see your dealer/retailer. do not continue to run the engine just open the hood. Stay away and have the vehicle serviced. from the engine if you see or hear Engine Overheating Notice: Engine damage from steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from The vehicle has several indicators running the engine without the vehicle until it cools down. to warn of engine overheating. coolant is not covered by the warranty. Wait until there is no sign of There are two engine hot messages steam or coolant before you open Notice: If the engine catches fire that may be displayed in the Driver the hood. Information Center (DIC). See Driver because of being driven with no Information Center (DIC) on coolant, your vehicle can be If you keep driving when your page 4‑31 for more information. badly damaged. The costly engine is overheated, the liquids repairs would not be covered by in it can catch fire. You or others You may decide not to lift the hood the vehicle warranty. could be badly burned. Stop your when this warning appears, but engine if it overheats, and get out instead get service help right away. of the vehicle until the engine See Roadside Service on is cool. page 12‑6. 9-24 Vehicle Care

If No Steam Is Coming From If the temperature overheat gage Overheated Engine The Engine Compartment is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer Protection If an engine overheat warning is displays, the vehicle can be driven. Operating Mode displayed but no steam can be seen Continue to drive the vehicle slow This operating mode allows your or heard, the problem may not be for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe too serious. Sometimes the engine vehicle to be driven to a safe place vehicle distance from the car in front in an emergency. Should a hot can get a little too hot when the of you. If the warning does not come vehicle: engine condition exist, an overheat back on, continue to drive normally. protection mode which alternates . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. If the warning continues, pull over, firing groups of cylinders helps . Stops after high-speed driving. stop, and park the vehicle prevent engine damage. In this right away. mode, there is a loss in power . Idles for long periods in traffic. and engine performance. Driving If there is no sign of steam, idle the . Tows a trailer. extended miles (km) and/or towing a engine for three minutes while trailer in the overheat protection If the overheat warning is displayed parked. If the warning is still mode should be avoided. with no sign of steam: displayed, turn off the engine until it 1. Turn the air conditioning off. cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” 2. Turn the heater on to the highest next in this section. temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary. 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle. Vehicle Care 9-25

Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering What to Use Fluid To determine what kind of fluid to To check the power steering fluid: use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 10 7. 1. Turn the key off and let the ‑ Always use the proper fluid. engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the Washer Fluid reservoir clean. See Engine Compartment Overview What to Use 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the on page 9 6 for the location of the ‑ dipstick with a clean rag. When adding windshield washer power steering fluid reservoir. fluid to the vehicle, be sure to read 4. Replace the cap and completely the manufacturer's instructions When to Check Power Steering tighten it. Fluid before use. If you will be operating 5. Remove the cap again and look your vehicle in an area where the It is not necessary to regularly at the fluid level on the dipstick. temperature may fall below freezing, check power steering fluid unless The level should be between the use a fluid that has sufficient you suspect there is a leak in the protection against freezing. system or you hear an unusual HOT and COLD marks. If necessary, noise. A fluid loss in this system add only enough fluid to bring the could indicate a problem. Have the level up to the mark. system inspected and repaired. 9-26 Vehicle Care

Adding Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes The Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid . When using concentrated This vehicle has disc brakes. message will appear on the Driver washer fluid, follow the Disc brake pads have built-in wear Information Center (DIC) when the manufacturer's instructions indicators that make a high-pitched fluid level is low. See Driver for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads Information Center (DIC) on . Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed. page 4‑31 for more information. ready-to-use washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be Water can cause the solution heard all the time the vehicle is to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly. parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as { WARNING well as washer fluid. The brake wear warning sound Open the cap with the washer . Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full means that soon the brakes will symbol on it. Add washer fluid not work well. That could lead to until the tank is full. See Engine when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if an accident. When the brake Compartment Overview on wear warning sound is heard, page 9‑6 for reservoir location. freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is have the vehicle serviced. completely full. Notice: Continuing to drive with . Do not use engine coolant worn-out brake pads could result (antifreeze) in the windshield in costly brake repair. washer. It can damage the vehicle's windshield washer system and paint. Vehicle Care 9-27

Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid can cause a brake squeal when the Every time the brakes are applied, brakes are first applied or lightly with or without the vehicle moving, applied. This does not mean the brakes adjust for wear. something is wrong with the brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are Replacing Brake System Parts necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together The brake master cylinder reservoir evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed indicated on the reservoir cap. specifications in Capacities and and tested with top-quality brake See Engine Compartment Overview Specifications on page 11‑2. parts. When parts of the braking on page 9‑6 for the location of the reservoir. Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. There are only two reasons why the If this is not done, the brakes might brake fluid level in the reservoir Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example, might go down: installing disc brake pads that are See your dealer/retailer if the brake . The brake fluid level goes down pedal does not return to normal wrong for the vehicle, can change the balance between the front and because of normal brake lining height, or if there is a rapid increase wear. When new linings are in pedal travel. This could be a rear brakes — for the worse. The braking performance expected can installed, the fluid level goes sign that brake service might be back up. required. change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed. 9-28 Vehicle Care

. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low Notice: hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes a low fluid level. Have the brake . Using the wrong fluid on. See Brake System Warning can badly damage brake hydraulic system fixed, since a Light on page 4‑26. leak means that sooner or later hydraulic system parts. the brakes will not work well. What to Add For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, Do not top off the brake fluid. Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid such as engine oil, in the Adding fluid does not correct a leak. from a sealed container. See brake hydraulic system can If fluid is added when the linings are Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic worn, there will be too much fluid Lubricants on page 10‑7. system parts so badly that when new brake linings are Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced. installed. Add or remove brake fluid, reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in as necessary, only when work is the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid. done on the brake hydraulic system. helps keep dirt from entering the . If brake fluid is spilled reservoir. on the vehicle's painted { WARNING surfaces, the paint finish can { WARNING If too much brake fluid is added, it be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the can spill on the engine and burn, With the wrong kind of fluid in vehicle. If you do, wash it off if the engine is hot enough. You the brake hydraulic system, the immediately. or others could be burned, and brakes might not work well. This the vehicle could be damaged. could cause a crash. Always use Add brake fluid only when work the proper brake fluid. is done on the brake hydraulic system. Vehicle Care 9-29

Battery After a power loss, such as Vehicle Storage disconnecting the battery or The battery is in the trunk, behind removing the maxi fuses in the { WARNING the trim panel, on the passenger power distribution fuse block, the side of the vehicle. Refer to the following steps must be performed Batteries have acid that can burn replacement number shown on the to calibrate the electronic throttle you and gas that can explode. original battery label when a new control. If this is not done, the battery is needed. You can be badly hurt if you are engine will not run properly. not careful. See Jump Starting on { 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. page 9‑103 for tips on working DANGER Do not start the engine. around a battery without Battery posts, terminals, and 2. Leave the ignition in ON/RUN for getting hurt. related accessories contain lead at least three minutes so that the Infrequent Usage: Remove the and lead compounds, chemicals electronic throttle control will black, negative (−) cable from the known to the State of California to cycle and re-learn its home position. battery to keep the battery from cause cancer and reproductive running down. harm. Wash hands after handling. 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Extended Storage: Remove the 4. Start and run the engine for at black, negative (−) cable from the least 30 seconds. battery or use a battery trickle charger. 9-30 Vehicle Care

All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the If your vehicle is equipped with bottom of the filler plug hole. all-wheel-drive, this is an additional Use care not to overtighten system that needs lubrication. the plug. Transfer Case What to Use When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule It is not necessary to regularly to determine what kind of lubricant check the transfer case fluid unless to use. See Recommended Fluids you suspect there is a leak or you and Lubricants on page 10‑7. hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it Rear Axle inspected and repaired. A. Drain Plug When to Check Lubricant B. Fill Plug It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you To get an accurate reading, the suspect there is a leak or you vehicle should be on a level hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss surface. could indicate a problem. Have it If the level is below the bottom of inspected and repaired. the filler plug hole, located on the transfer case, you'll need to add Vehicle Care 9-31

How to Check Lubricant What to Use Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off Refer to the Maintenance Schedule the engine immediately if it to determine what kind of lubricant starts. to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 10‑7. 3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine Starter Switch Check in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts { WARNING in any other position, contact When you are doing this your dealer/retailer for service. inspection, the vehicle could For manual transmission move suddenly. If the vehicle vehicles, put the shift lever in moves, you or others could be Neutral, push the clutch pedal To get an accurate reading, the injured. down halfway, and try to start vehicle should be on a level the engine. The vehicle should surface. 1. Before starting this check, be start only when the clutch pedal If the level is below the bottom of sure there is enough room is pushed down all the way to the filler plug hole, located on the around the vehicle. the floor. If the vehicle starts rear axle, you'll need to add some when the clutch pedal is not 2. Firmly apply both the parking lubricant. Add enough lubricant to pushed all the way down, brake and the regular brake. raise the level to the bottom of the contact your dealer/retailer for See Parking Brake (Manual) on filler plug hole. service. page 8‑34 or Parking Brake (Electric) on page 8‑35. 9-32 Vehicle Care

Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the See Ignition Positions (Key ignition to ON/RUN, but do not Access) on page 8‑18 or Shift Lock Control start the engine. Without Ignition Positions (Keyless System Check applying the regular brake, try to Access) on page 8‑19. move the shift lever out of Contact your dealer/retailer if { WARNING P (Park) with normal effort. If the service is required. shift lever moves out of P (Park), When you are doing this contact your dealer/retailer for Park Brake and P (Park) inspection, the vehicle could service. move suddenly. If the vehicle Mechanism Check moves, you or others could be Ignition Transmission injured. Lock Check { WARNING 1. Before starting this check, be While parked, and with the parking When you are doing this check, sure there is enough room brake set, try to turn the ignition to the vehicle could begin to move. around the vehicle. It should be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever You or others could be injured parked on a level surface. position. and property could be damaged. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. . The ignition should turn to Make sure there is room in front See Parking Brake (Manual) on LOCK/OFF only when the shift of the vehicle in case it begins to page 8‑34 or Parking Brake lever is in P (Park). roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle (Electric) on page 8‑35. . With the key access ignition begin to move. Be ready to apply the regular system, the ignition key should brake immediately if the vehicle come out only in LOCK/OFF. begins to move. Vehicle Care 9-33

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, Windshield wiper blades should be set the parking brake. inspected for wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on . To check the parking brake's page 10‑3. holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in It is a good idea to clean or replace N (Neutral), slowly remove foot the wiper blade assembly on a pressure from the regular brake regular basis or when worn. For pedal. Do this until the vehicle is proper windshield wiper blade held by the parking brake only. length and type, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 10‑9. . To check the P (Park) 4. Lift up the wiper blade mechanism's holding ability: To replace the wiper blade assembly cap. With the engine running, shift to assembly: P (Park). Then release the 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 5. Pull the wiper blade assembly parking brake followed by the the engine off. down far enough to release it regular brake. from the J-hooked end of the 2. Turn on the windshield wipers wiper arm. Slide the assembly Contact your dealer/retailer if and turn them off again when away from the arm. service is required. the wipers are in the out-wipe position. The driver side blade Allowing the wiper blade arm will be straight up and down on to touch the windshield when the windshield. no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. 3. Pull the windshield wiper Any damage that occurs would assembly away from the not be covered by your warranty. windshield. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield. 9-34 Vehicle Care

6. Replace the blade with a Headlamp Aiming . Be placed so it is perpendicular new one. to the wall. The vehicle has a visual optical . Not have any snow, ice, or mud headlamp aiming system. The aim on it. has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. . Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp However, if the vehicle is damaged aiming is being performed. in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be . Normally loaded with a full necessary. tank of fuel and one person or 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on the If oncoming vehicles flash their high driver seat. beams at you, this may also mean the vertical aim needs to be . Have all tires properly inflated. adjusted. . If your vehicle has a spare tire, 7. Reinstall the wiper blade It is recommended that the vehicle ensure the spare tire is in its assembly by sliding it over the is taken to your dealer/retailer for original location in the vehicle. wiper arm to engage the service if the headlamps need to be Headlamp aiming is done with the J-hooked end. Pull up on the re-aimed. It is possible however, to vehicle's low-beam headlamps. assembly to lock it into place. re-aim the headlamps as described. The high-beam headlamps will be 8. Repeat the steps for the other The vehicle should: correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly. wiper. . Be placed so the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a light colored wall. . Have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall. Vehicle Care 9-35

To adjust the vertical aim: 1. Open the hood. See Hood on page 9‑5 for more information.

High Intensity Discharge 4. At a wall, measure from the Headlamps ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of Step 3 and mark it. the low-beam headlamp. Halogen Headlamps 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) 3. Record the distance from the the width of the vehicle at the ground to the aim dot on the wall where it was marked in low-beam headlamp. Step 4. 9-36 Vehicle Care

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp The top edge of the cut-off to improve beam cut-off when should be positioned at the aiming. Covering a headlamp may bottom edge of the horizontal cause excessive heat build-up tape line. which may cause damage to the headlamp. 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only the beam of light from the headlamp being aimed to be Driver Side Shown seen on the flat surface. 7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly. They are covered by 9. Make sure that the light from the a rubber caps. headlamp is positioned at the The adjustment screw can be bottom edge of the horizontal turned with a 6 mm hex driver. tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw headlamp aim. The lamp on the until the headlamp beam is right (B) shows the incorrect aimed to the horizontal headlamp aim. tape line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for lower the angle of the beam. the opposite headlamp. Vehicle Care 9-37

Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Fog Lamps For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 9‑39. { WARNING For any bulb changing procedure The low beam high intensity not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system your dealer/retailer. operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the Halogen Bulbs system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your { WARNING dealer/retailer or a qualified technician service them. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you The up-level vehicle has HID To replace fog lamp bulb: drop or scratch the bulb. You or headlamps. The park lamp function 1. Pull out the push-pins located on others could be injured. Be sure is also a function of the HID the underside of the protection to read and follow the instructions headlamp. After an HID headlamp shield to remove the shield. on the bulb package. bulb has been replaced, the beam 2. Reach up behind the front might be a slightly different shade bumper area from under the than it was originally. This is normal. vehicle to access the lamp housing. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by lifting the two plastic clips. 9-38 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the bulb socket from License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the socket the lamp housing by turning the counterclockwise and bulb socket one-quarter turn (Sedan) remove it. counterclockwise. To replace one of these bulbs: 4. Pull the bulb straight out to 5. Pull the old bulb from the lamp remove it. housing keeping the bulb 5. Push the new bulb straight into straight as you pull it out. the socket. 6. Install a new bulb. 6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to 7. Reinstall the electrical connector reinstall the license plate lamp by pushing in the two plastic assembly. clips. 8. Push the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn the socket one-quarter turn clockwise. 1. Push tab to remove the license plate lamp. 2. Turn the license plate lamp assembly down to remove it. Vehicle Care 9-39

License Plate Lamp 6. Push the replacement bulb straight into the bulb socket and (Wagon) turn the bulb socket clockwise to To replace one of these bulbs: install into lamp assembly. 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 7. Turn the lamp assembly into (Wagon) on page 1‑19 for more the liftgate engaging the clip information. side first. 8. Push on the lamp side opposite the clip until the lamp assembly snaps into place.

A. Bulb Socket Replacement Bulbs B. Bulb Bulb Exterior Lamp Number C. Lamp Assembly Fog Lamp 4. Turn the bulb socket (A) H11LL counterclockwise to remove (Up Level Only) from lamp assembly (C). License Plate Lamp W5WLL 5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of Passenger side shown, the bulb socket. For replacement bulbs not listed driver side similar here, contact your dealer/retailer. 2. Push the left end of the lamp assembly towards the right. 3. Turn the lamp assembly down to remove from liftgate. 9-40 Vehicle Care

Electrical System Fuses and circuit breakers protect Windshield Wipers the following in the vehicle: If the wiper motor overheats due to Electrical System . Headlamp Wiring heavy snow or ice, the windshield Overload . Windshield Wiper Motor wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart. The vehicle has fuses and circuit . Power Windows and other Although the circuit is protected breakers to protect against an Power Accessories from electrical overload, overload electrical system overload. Headlamp Wiring due to heavy snow or ice, may When the current electrical load is An electrical overload may cause cause wiper linkage damage. too heavy, the circuit breaker opens the lamps to go on and off, or in Always clear ice and heavy snow and closes, protecting the circuit some cases to remain off. Have the from the windshield before using the until the current load returns to headlamp wiring checked right windshield wipers. normal or the problem is fixed. away if the lamps go on and off or If the overload is caused by an This greatly reduces the chance of remain off. electrical problem and not snow or circuit overload and fire caused by ice, be sure to get it fixed. electrical problems. Vehicle Care 9-41

Fuses and Circuit Fuses of the same amperage can Engine Compartment be temporarily borrowed from Breakers another fuse location, if a fuse goes Fuse Block (CTS) The wiring circuits in the vehicle are out. Replace the fuse as soon as The underhood fuse block is located protected from short circuits by a you can. on the passenger side of the engine combination of fuses and circuit To identify and check fuses, circuit compartment. breakers. This greatly reduces the breakers, and relays, see Engine chance of damage caused by Compartment Fuse Block (CTS) on electrical problems. page 9‑41 or Engine Compartment To check a fuse, look at the Fuse Block (CTS-V) on page 9‑45 silver-colored band inside the fuse. or Engine Compartment Fuse Block If the band is broken or melted, (CTS Wagon) on page 9‑48 and replace the fuse. Be sure to replace Rear Compartment Fuse Block a bad fuse with a new one of the (CTS) on page 9‑51 or Rear identical size and rating. Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V) on page 9‑53 or Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS Wagon) on page 9‑55.

Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. 9-42 Vehicle Care

Mini-Fuses Usage Body Control BCM 1 Module 1 Body Control BCM 2 Module 2 Body Control BCM 3 Module 3 Body Control BCM 4 Module 4 Body Control BCM 5 Module 5 BCM 6, Body Control BCM 7 Module 6 and 7 DISPLY Display Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Daytime Running Air Conditioning AIRBAG DRL/LT Lamps/Left A/C CLTCH Airbag Switch Clutch IGN LO BEAM Low-Beam Headlamp Antilock Braking AQS/ Air Quality Sensor/ ABS System (ABS) ISRVM/ Inside Rear View Right Daytime REAR Mirror/Rear View DRL RT Running Adaptive Forward AFS CAMERA Camera Lamp (DRL) Lighting System AWD All-Wheel Drive Vehicle Care 9-43

Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Daytime Running Low-Beam SPARE Spare LO BEAM DRL/WSW Lamps/Windshield Daytime Running DRL LEFT SPARE Spare Washer Pump Lamps (Left) STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel Engine Control LT Left High-Beam ECM CNTRL Illumination Module (ECM) HI BEAM Headlamp Transmission ECM, Transmission LT Left Low-Beam TCM BATT Control Module Control LO BEAM Headlamp Battery Module (TCM), ECM/ LTR Cigarette Lighter Instrument Panel Transmission Output TCM IGN TOSS/BRK Cluster (IPC), MISC IGN Ignition Speed Sensor/Brake VAC RLY Vacuum Relay PASS-Key III+ NAV MTR Navigation Motor Module WPR Windshield Wiper ODD COILS Odd Coils EMIS 1 Emission 1 SPARE Spare PED PRO Not Used EMIS 2 Emission 2 PassKey Module, EVEN PWR J-Case Usage Even Coils Body Control COILS MODING Fuses Module ABS MTR ABS Motor FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps RT Right High-Beam HDLP HI BEAM Headlamp BLWR Blower Not Used WASH RT Right Low-Beam BRK Brake HORN Horn LO BEAM Headlamp VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump RT Right Low-Beam EPB Not Used LO BEAM Headlamp 9-44 Vehicle Care

J-Case Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage Fuses Cooling Fan PWR/TRN Powertrain FAN S/P FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Series/Parallel REAR Rear Defogger FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 DEFOG REAR FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Right Daytime Rear Defogger DEFOG RT Running Lamp FOG LAMP Fog Lamps DRL (HID) (High Intensity STRTR Starter HDLP Discharge) Not Used SPARE Spare WASH SPARE Spare WSW/HTR Not Used High-Beam HI BEAM STRTR Starter Headlamp WPR Windshield Wiper Relays Usage HORN Horn Windshield Wiper A/C Air Conditioning IGN 1 Ignition 1 WPR HI CMPRSR Compressor Clutch High Speed Low-Beam (without Windshield Daytime Running LO BEAM High Intensity WSW Washer Pump DRL Lamps (without High (W/O HID) Discharge), Left (W/O HID) Intensity Discharge), LT DRL Daytime Running LO BEAM Low-Beam (HID) Lamp (High Intensity (HID) Headlamps (High Discharge) Intensity Discharge) Vehicle Care 9-45

Engine Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V) The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Lift the fuse block cover to access Air Conditioning AIRBAG A/C CLTCH Airbag Switch the fuses. Clutch IGN Notice: Spilling liquid on any Antilock Braking AQS/ Air Quality Sensor/ ABS electrical components on the System (ABS) ISRVM/ Inside Rear View vehicle may damage it. Always REAR Mirror/Rear View Adaptive Forward keep the covers on any electrical AFS CAMERA Camera component. Lighting System Body Control BCM 1 Module 1 9-46 Vehicle Care

Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Body Control ECM, Transmission MISC IGN Ignition BCM 2 Module 2 Control NAV MTR Navigation Motor Module (TCM), Body Control ECM/ BCM 3 Instrument Panel ODD COILS Odd Coils Module 3 TCM IGN Cluster (IPC), PED PRO Not Used Body Control PASS-Key III+ BCM 4 Module 4 PassKey Module, Module PWR Body Control Body Control EMIS 1 Emission 1 MODING BCM 5 Module Module 5 EMIS 2 Emission 2 RT Right High-Beam BCM 6, Body Control EVEN HI BEAM Headlamp BCM 7 Module 6 and 7 Even Coils COILS RT Right Low-Beam DISPLY Display FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps LO BEAM Headlamp Left Daytime DRL LT HDLP SPARE Spare Running Lamps Headlamp Washer WASH STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel Right Daytime HORN Horn CNTRL Illumination DRL RT Running Lamp (DRL) INTCLR Intercooler Pump S/ROOF Sunroof Daytime Running LT Left High-Beam Transmission DRL/WSW Lamps/Windshield HI BEAM Headlamp TCM BATT Control Module Washer Pump Battery LT Left Low-Beam Engine Control LO BEAM Headlamp WPR Windshield Wiper ECM Module (ECM) LTR Cigarette Lighter Vehicle Care 9-47

J-Case Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage Fuses FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 SPARE Spare ABS MTR ABS Motor FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 STRTR Starter BLWR Blower FOG LAMP Fog Lamps WPR Windshield Wiper EPB Electric Park Brake HDLP Windshield Wiper Headlamp Washer WPR HI FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 WASH High Speed FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 High-Beam Daytime Running HI BEAM Headlamp WSW Lamps/Windshield MR Ride/ MRTD Washer Pump Suspension Control HORN Horn REAR IGN 1 Ignition 1 Rear Defogger DEFOG INTCLR Intercooler Pump STRTR Starter Left Daytime LT DRL SPARE Spare Running Lamps WSW/HTR Not Used LO BEAM Low Beam PWR/TRN Powertrain Relays Usage REAR Rear Defogger A/C Air Conditioning DEFOG CMPRSR Compressor Clutch Right Daytime Cooling Fan RT DRL FAN S/P Running Lamp Series/Parallel 9-48 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Fuse Block (CTS Wagon) The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Lift the fuse block cover to access Air Conditioning AIRBAG A/C CLTCH Airbag Switch the fuses. Clutch IGN Notice: Spilling liquid on any Antilock Braking AQS/ Air Quality Sensor/ ABS electrical components on the System (ABS) ISRVM/ Inside Rear View vehicle may damage it. Always REAR Mirror/Rear View Adaptive Forward keep the covers on any electrical AFS CAMERA Camera component. Lighting System Vehicle Care 9-49

Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage AWD All-Wheel Drive Daytime Running FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps DRL/LT Lamps/Left Body Control HDLP BCM 1 LO BEAM Low-Beam Headlamp Washer Module 1 WASH Headlamp Body Control HORN Horn BCM 2 Daytime Running Module 2 DRL/WSW Lamps/Windshield Low-Beam LO BEAM Body Control Washer Pump Daytime Running BCM 3 DRL LEFT Module 3 Lamps (Left) Engine Control ECM Body Control Module (ECM) LT Left High-Beam BCM 4 Module 4 HI BEAM Headlamp ECM, Transmission Body Control Control LT Left Low-Beam BCM 5 Module 5 Module (TCM), LO BEAM Headlamp ECM/ Instrument Panel BCM 6, Body Control TCM IGN LTR Cigarette Lighter BCM 7 Module 6 and 7 Cluster (IPC), PASS-Key III+ MISC IGN Ignition DISPLY Display Module NAV MTR Navigation Motor Right Daytime EMIS 1 Emission 1 ODD COILS Odd Coils DRL RT Running Lamp (DRL) EMIS 2 Emission 2 PED PRO Not Used EVEN Even Coils COILS 9-50 Vehicle Care

Mini-Fuses Usage J-Case Usage Relays Usage Fuses PassKey Module, A/C Air Conditioning PWR Body Control ABS MTR ABS Motor CMPRSR Compressor Clutch MODING Module BLWR Blower Daytime Running PWR Console Auxiliary DRL Lamps (without High BRK Brake OUTLET Power Outlet (W/O HID) Intensity Discharge), VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump LO BEAM Low-Beam RT Right High-Beam EPB Electric Park Brake (HID) Headlamps (High HI BEAM Headlamp Intensity Discharge) FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 RT Right Low-Beam Cooling Fan LO BEAM Headlamp FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 FAN S/P Series/Parallel RT Right Low-Beam REAR Rear Defogger FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 LO BEAM Headlamp DEFOG FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 SPARE Spare SPARE Spare FOG LAMP Fog Lamps STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel STRTR Starter CNTRL Illumination HDLP TRLR Trailer Towing Headlamp Washer WASH Transmission WSW/HTR Not Used TCM BATT Control Module High-Beam HI BEAM Battery Headlamp Transmission Output HORN Horn TOSS/BRK Speed Sensor/Brake VAC RLY IGN 1 Ignition 1 Vacuum Relay WPR Windshield Wiper Vehicle Care 9-51

Relays Usage Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS) Low-Beam (without The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of the battery, on the right LO BEAM High Intensity side of the trunk. The battery access door must be removed to access the (W/O HID) Discharge), Left fuse block. LT DRL Daytime Running (HID) Lamp (High Intensity Discharge) PWR/TRN Powertrain REAR Rear Defogger DEFOG Right Daytime RT Running Lamp (High DRL (HID) Intensity Discharge) SPARE Spare STRTR Starter WPR Windshield Wiper Windshield Wiper WPR HI High Speed

Relays Usage Relays Usage FUEL/DR/ LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp Not Used RELSE MRKR/LP Not Used LCK Lock 9-52 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage REAR/FOG Not Used EE SEAT Not Used RT/POS/LP Not Used RT/POS/LP Not Used FUEL/ RT/POS/LP Right Position Lamp Fuel Pump PUMP STOP/LP Not Used Regulated Voltage RVC/SNSR LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp Control Sensor TRUNK/ Trunk Release RELSE Memory Seat S/ROOF Sunroof MSM Module UNLCK Unlock STOP/LP Not Used ONSTAR OnStar® System Theft Deterrent Mini-Fuses Usage Passenger Door THEFT/ System, Universal PDM AIRBAG Airbag System Module UGDO Home Remote System AMP Amplifier RDO Audio System TRLR/ RDO/SPKR Audio Speakers Not Used AUX/ Auxiliary Power POS/LP OUTLET Outlet REAR/FOG Not Used TRUNK/ CNSTR/ Trunk Release Canister Vent Remote Keyless RELSE VENT RKE/ Entry System, DR/LCK Door Lock PASS-KEY/ Pass-Key Theft MDL Deterrent Feature Engine Control ECM Module Module (ECM) Vehicle Care 9-53

Circuit Usage Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V) Breakers The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of the battery, on the right DRV/ Left Front side of the trunk. The battery access door must be removed to access the PWR/SEAT Power Seat fuse block. LT/ REAR/ Left Rear Window WNDW Power Steering PWR CLMN Column PWR/ Power Window WNDW PASS/ Right Front PWR/SEAT Power Seat REAR/ Right Rear Window WNDW

Relays Usage Relays Usage FUEL/DR/ LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp Not Used RELSE MRKR/LP Not Used LCK Lock 9-54 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage REAR/FOG Not Used EE SEAT Not Used Remote Keyless RKE/ Entry System, RT/POS/LP Not Used FUEL/ Fuel Pump PASS-KEY/ Pass-Key Theft PUMP STOP/LP Not Used MDL Deterrent Feature LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp Module TRUNK/ Trunk Release RELSE Memory Seat RT/POS/LP Right Position Lamp MSM Module UNLCK Unlock RT/POS/LP Not Used ONSTAR OnStar® System Regulated Voltage RVC/SNSR Mini-Fuses Usage Passenger Door Control Sensor PDM Module AIRBAG Airbag System SPARE Spare RDO Audio System AMP Amplifier STOP/LP Not Used RDO/SPKR Audio Speakers AUX/ Auxiliary Power Theft Deterrent OUTLET Outlet REAR/ Rear Differential THEFT/ System, Universal CNSTR/ DIFF/PUMP Cooling Pump UGDO Home Remote Canister Vent System VENT REAR/FOG Not Used TRUNK/ DR/LCK Door Lock Trunk Release RELSE Engine Control ECM Module (ECM) Vehicle Care 9-55

Circuit Usage Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS Wagon) Breakers The rear compartment fuse block is located on the passenger side of the DRV/ Left Front vehicle, behind the trim panel in the rear compartment. PWR/SEAT Power Seat LT/ REAR/ Left Rear Window WNDW PASS/ Right Front PWR/SEAT Power Seat Power Steering PWR CLMN Column PWR/ Power Window WNDW REAR/ Right Rear Window WNDW

Relays Usage Relays Usage FUEL/DR/ LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp Not Used RELSE MRKR/LP Not Used LCK Lock 9-56 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage REAR/FOG Not Used AUX/ Auxiliary Power Memory Seat MSM OUTLET Outlet Module RT/POS/LP Not Used CNSTR/ ONSTAR OnStar® System STOP/LP Not Used Canister Vent VENT Passenger Door TRUNK/ PDM Trunk Release DR/LCK Door Lock Module RELSE Engine Control RDO Audio System UNLCK Unlock ECM Module (ECM) RDO/SPKR Audio Speakers FUEL/ Mini-Fuses Usage Fuel Pump REAR/FOG Not Used PUMP AIRBAG Airbag System REAR/ Rear Windshield LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp AMP Amplifier WSW Wiper/Washer Vehicle Care 9-57

Mini-Fuses Usage Mini-Fuses Usage Circuit Usage Breakers Remote Keyless STOP/LP Not Used RKE/ Entry System, DRV/ Left Front Theft Deterrent PASS-KEY/ Pass-Key Theft PWR/SEAT Power Seat THEFT/ System, Universal MDL Deterrent Feature UGDO Home Remote LT/ Module System REAR/ Left Rear Window RT/POS/LP Not Used WNDW TRLR/ Trailer Turn Position RT/POS/LP Right Position Lamp POS/LP Lamps PASS/ Right Front PWR/SEAT Power Seat Regulated Voltage WASH/ Windshield RVC/SNSR Control Sensor PUMP Washer Pump Power Steering PWR CLMN Column S/ROOF Sunroof PWR/ Power Window WNDW REAR/ Right Rear Window WNDW 9-58 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires { WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Tires Poorly maintained and improperly . Overinflated tires are more used tires are dangerous. Your new vehicle comes with likely to be cut, punctured high-quality tires made by a . Overloading your tires can or broken by a sudden leading tire manufacturer. If you cause overheating as a result impact — such as when you ever have questions about your of too much flexing. You hit a pothole. Keep tires at could have an air-out and a the recommended pressure. tire warranty and where to serious accident. See Vehicle . Worn, old tires can cause obtain service, see your vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12. Warranty booklet for details. accidents. If your tread is For additional information refer . Underinflated tires pose the badly worn, or if your tires to the tire manufacturer. same danger as overloaded have been damaged, tires. The resulting accident replace them. could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to See Tire Pressure for High-Speed maintain the recommended Operation on page 9‑67 for pressure. Tire pressure inflation pressure adjustment for should be checked when your high speed driving. tires are cold. See Tire Pressure on page 9‑66. (Continued) Vehicle Care 9-59

Winter Tires If you choose to use winter tires: or dry pavement. You may also . notice more road noise with If you expect to drive on snow or ice Use tires of the same brand and covered roads often, you may want tread type on all four wheel low-profile performance tires and to get winter tires for your vehicle. positions. that they tend to wear faster. All season tires provide good overall . Use only radial ply tires of the Notice: If the vehicle has performance on most surfaces but same size, load range, and low-profile tires, they are more they may not offer the traction you speed rating as the original susceptible to damage from would like or the same level of equipment tires. road hazards or curb impact performance as winter tires on Winter tires with the same speed snow or ice covered roads. than standard profile tires. rating as your original equipment Tire and/or wheel assembly Winter tires, in general, are tires may not be available for H, V, damage can occur when designed for increased traction W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. coming into contact with on snow and ice covered roads. If you choose winter tires with a road hazards like, potholes, With winter tires, there may be lower speed rating, never exceed decreased dry road traction, the tire's maximum speed capability. or sharp edged objects, increased road noise, and shorter or when sliding into a curb. tread life. After switching to winter Low-Profile Tires The vehicle warranty does not tires, be alert for changes in vehicle cover this type of damage. handling and braking. If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18, Keep tires set to the correct P235/50R18, 255/40ZR19 or See your dealer/retailer for details inflation pressure and, when regarding winter tire availability and 285/35ZR19 size tires, they are possible avoid contact with proper tire selection. Also, see classified as low-profile tires. curbs, potholes, and other Buying New Tires on page 9‑75. These tires are designed for road hazards. very responsive driving on wet 9-60 Vehicle Care

Summer Performance Tires (B) TPC Spec (Tire Many General Motors high Performance Criteria performance models come Specification): Original factory-equipped with tires that equipment tires designed to are optimized for maximum dry GM's specific tire performance and wet road performance while criteria have a TPC specification still retaining satisfactory tread code molded onto the sidewall. life, excellent durability, and low GM's TPC specifications meet noise levels. In severe winter or exceed all federal safety climates where snowfall may be guidelines. significant, these tires may be (C) DOT (Department of found to provide less traction. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example Transportation): The (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a Department of Transportation Tire Sidewall Labeling combination of letters and (DOT) code indicates that the Useful information about a tire is numbers used to define a tire is in compliance with molded into its sidewall. The particular tire's width, height, the U.S. Department of examples below show a typical aspect ratio, construction type, Transportation Motor Vehicle passenger vehicle tire and a and service description. See the Safety Standards. compact spare tire sidewall. “Tire Size” illustration later in this (D) Tire Identification Number section for more detail. (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). Vehicle Care 9-61

The TIN shows the and gone flat. If your vehicle manufacturer and plant code, has a compact spare tire, tire size, and date the tire was see Compact Spare Tire on manufactured. The TIN is page 9‑102 and If a Tire Goes molded onto both sides of the Flat on page 9‑81 . tire, although only one side may (C) Tire Identification Number have the date of manufacture. (TIN): The letters and numbers (E) Tire Ply Material: The type following the DOT (Department of cord and number of plies in of Transportation) code is the sidewall and under the tread. the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the (F) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturer and plant code, manufacturers are required to (A) Tire Ply Material: The type tire size, and date the tire was grade tires based on three of cord and number of plies in manufactured. The TIN is performance factors: treadwear, the sidewall and under the tread. molded onto both sides of the traction, and temperature tire, although only one side may (B) Temporary Use Only: have the date of manufacture. resistance. For more information The compact spare tire or see Uniform Tire Quality temporary use tire has a tread (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Grading on page 9‑78 . life of approximately 5 000 km Load Limit: Maximum load (G) Maximum Cold Inflation (3,000 miles) and should not be that can be carried and the Load Limit: Maximum load driven at speeds over 105 km/h maximum pressure needed to that can be carried and the (65 mph). The compact spare support that load. maximum pressure needed to tire is for emergency use when support that load. a regular road tire has lost air 9-62 Vehicle Care

(E) Tire Inflation: The Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The three-digit temporary use tire or compact number indicates the tire section spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size width in millimeters from 420 kPa (60 psi). For more The following illustration shows sidewall to sidewall. information on tire pressure and an example of a typical (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit inflation see Tire Pressure on passenger vehicle tire size. number that indicates the tire page 9‑66 . height-to-width measurements. (F) Tire Size: A combination of For example, if the tire size letters and numbers define a aspect ratio is 60, as shown in tire's width, height, aspect ratio, item C of the illustration, it would construction type, and service mean that the tire's sidewall is description. The letter T as the 60 percent as high as it is wide. first character in the tire size (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: (D) Construction Code: means the tire is for temporary The United States version of a A letter code is used to indicate use only. metric tire sizing system. The the type of ply construction in (G) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in the tire. The letter R means Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger radial ply construction; the Specification): Original vehicle tire engineered to letter D means diagonal or equipment tires designed to standards set by the U.S. Tire bias ply construction; and the GM's specific tire performance and Rim Association. letter B means belted-bias ply criteria have a TPC specification construction. code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. Vehicle Care 9-63

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of transmission, power steering, before a tire has built up heat the wheel in inches. power brakes, power windows, from driving. See Tire Pressure (F) Service Description: These power seats, and air on page 9‑66 . characters represent the load conditioning. Curb Weight: The weight of a index and speed rating of the Aspect Ratio: The relationship motor vehicle with standard and tire. The load index represents of a tire's height to its width. optional equipment including the the load carry capacity a tire is Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, certified to carry. The speed cords that is located between and coolant, but without rating is the maximum speed a the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo. tire is certified to carry a load. may be made from steel or other DOT Markings: A code molded reinforcing materials. into the sidewall of a tire Tire Terminology and signifying that the tire is in Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S. Air Pressure: The amount of cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation air inside the tire pressing the rim. (DOT) motor vehicle safety outward on each square inch standards. The DOT code of the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire includes the Tire Identification expressed in psi (pounds per in which the plies are laid at Number (TIN), an alphanumeric square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). alternate angles less than designator which can also 90 degrees to the centerline of identify the tire manufacturer, Accessory Weight: This the tread. production plant, brand, and means the combined weight date of production. of optional accessories. Cold Tire Pressure: The Some examples of optional amount of air pressure in a tire, GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight accessories are, automatic measured in psi (pounds per Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) on page 8‑12 . 9-64 Vehicle Care

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: Weight Rating for the front axle. The maximum air pressure to The side of an asymmetrical tire See Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. that has a particular side that page 8‑12 . The maximum air pressure is faces outward when mounted on GAWR RR: Gross Axle molded onto the sidewall. a vehicle. The side of the tire Weight Rating for the rear axle. Maximum Load Rating: The that contains a whitewall, See Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or page 8‑12 . maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. model name molding that is Intended Outboard Sidewall: higher or deeper than the same The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb of the tire. when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight, Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Kilopascal (kPa): The metric vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight. A tire used on passenger cars unit for air pressure. and some light duty trucks and Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Normal Occupant Weight: multipurpose vehicles. A tire used on light duty trucks The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat Recommended Inflation and some multipurpose Pressure: Vehicle passenger vehicles. multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle Load Limits on manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown Load Index: An assigned page 8‑12 . number ranging from 1 to 279 on the tire placard. See Tire that corresponds to the load Occupant Distribution: Pressure on page 9‑66 and carrying capacity of a tire. Designated seating positions. Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12 . Vehicle Care 9-65

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the seating positions multiplied by 90 degrees to the centerline of tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated the tread. (1/16 inch) of tread remains. cargo load. See Vehicle Load Rim: A metal support for a tire See When It Is Time for New Limits on page 8‑12 . and upon which the tire beads Tires on page 9‑74 . Vehicle Maximum Load on the are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): A tire due to curb weight, accessory between the tread and the bead. information system that weight, occupant weight, and provides consumers with cargo weight. Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction, Vehicle Placard: A label alphanumeric code assigned to temperature, and treadwear. a tire indicating the maximum permanently attached to a Ratings are determined by vehicle showing the vehicle's speed at which a tire can tire manufacturers using operate. capacity weight and the government testing procedures. original equipment tire size Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the and recommended inflation sidewall of the tire. See Uniform the tire and the road surface. pressure. See “Tire and Loading Tire Quality Grading on The amount of grip provided. Information Label” under Vehicle page 9‑78 . Tread: The portion of a tire Load Limits on page 8‑12 . that comes into contact with the road. 9-66 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air For additional information (over-inflation), you can get regarding how much weight Tires need the correct amount of the following: your vehicle can carry, and an air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading . Unusual wear effectively. Information label, see Vehicle Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling Load Limits on page 8‑12 . you that under-inflation or . Rough ride How you load your vehicle over-inflation is all right. It is affects vehicle handling and ride . not. If your tires do not have Needless damage from comfort. Never load your vehicle enough air (under-inflation), road hazards with more weight than it was you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and designed to carry. Loading Information label is . Too much flexing attached to your vehicle. This When to Check . Too much heat label shows your vehicle's Check your tires once a month . Tire overloading original equipment tires and the or more. Do not forget to check correct inflation pressures for the compact spare tire, if the . Premature or your tires when they are cold. vehicle has one. The compact irregular wear The recommended cold tire spare should be at 60 psi . Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the . Reduced fuel economy label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support compact spare tire, see your vehicle's maximum load Compact Spare Tire on carrying capacity. page 9‑102 . Vehicle Care 9-67

How to Check If you overfill the tire, release air WARNING (Continued) Use a good quality pocket-type by pushing on the metal stem in gage to check tire pressure. the center of the tire valve. inflation pressure adjustment for You cannot tell if your tires are Re-check the tire pressure with high speed operation. When properly inflated simply by the tire gage. speed limits and road conditions looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps are such that a vehicle can be look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. They driven at high speeds, make sure they are under-inflated. Check help prevent leaks by keeping the tires are rated for high speed the tire's inflation pressure when out dirt and moisture. operation, in excellent condition, the tires are cold. Cold means and set to the correct cold tire your vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure for inflation pressure for the vehicle load. at least three hours or driven no High-Speed Operation more than 1.6 km (1 mile). If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18, Remove the valve cap from the { WARNING 255/40ZR19 or 285/35ZR19 size tire valve stem. Press the tire tires, they will require inflation gage firmly onto the valve to get Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds a pressure measurement. If the (100 mph) or higher, puts an additional strain on tires. of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. cold tire inflation pressure Sustained high-speed driving Set the cold inflation pressure to matches the recommended causes excessive heat build up the maximum inflation pressure pressure on the Tire and and can cause sudden tire failure. shown on the tire sidewall, Loading Information label, no You could have a crash and you or 300 kPa (44 psi), whichever is further adjustment is necessary. or others could be killed. Some lower. See the example following. If the inflation pressure is low, high-speed rated tires require add air until you reach the (Continued) recommended amount. 9-68 Vehicle Care

When you end this high-speed Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your driving, return the tires to the cold vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflation pressure shown on the System tire pressure monitoring system Tire and Loading Information label. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire See Vehicle Load Limits on (TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale when one or more page 8‑12 and Tire Pressure on technology to check tire pressure of your tires is significantly page 9‑66. levels. The TPMS sensors monitor under-inflated. Example: the air pressure in your vehicle's Accordingly, when the low tire tires and transmit tire pressure You will find the maximum load and pressure telltale illuminates, you readings to a receiver located in should stop and check your tires as inflation pressure molded on the the vehicle. tire's sidewall, in small letters, soon as possible, and inflate them near the rim flange. It will read Each tire, including the spare to the proper pressure. Driving on a something like this: Maximum load (if provided), should be checked significantly under-inflated tire 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) monthly when cold and inflated to causes the tire to overheat and can Max. Press. the inflation pressure recommended lead to tire failure. Under-inflation by the vehicle manufacturer on the also reduces fuel efficiency and tire For this example, you would set the vehicle placard or tire inflation tread life, and may affect the inflation pressure for high-speed pressure label. (If your vehicle has vehicle's handling and stopping driving at 44 psi (300 kPa). tires of a different size than the size ability. indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) Vehicle Care 9-69

Please note that the TPMS is malfunctions may occur for a variety Tire Pressure Monitor not a substitute for proper tire of reasons, including the installation maintenance, and it is the driver's of replacement or alternate tires or Operation responsibility to maintain correct tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent This vehicle may have a Tire pressure, even if under-inflation has the TPMS from functioning properly. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). not reached the level to trigger Always check the TPMS malfunction The TPMS is designed to warn the illumination of the TPMS low tire telltale after replacing one or more driver when a low tire pressure pressure telltale. tires or wheels on your vehicle to condition exists. TPMS sensors are Your vehicle has also been ensure that the replacement or mounted onto each tire and wheel equipped with a TPMS malfunction alternate tires and wheels allow the assembly, excluding the spare tire indicator to indicate when the TPMS to continue to function and wheel assembly, if the vehicle system is not operating properly. properly. has one. The TPMS sensors The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Tire Pressure Monitor monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and transmits the tire combined with the low tire pressure Operation on page 9‑69 for telltale. When the system detects a additional information. pressure readings to a receiver malfunction, the telltale will flash for located in the vehicle. approximately one minute and then Federal Communications Using the Driver Information Center remain continuously illuminated. Commission (FCC) and (DIC), the driver can also check tire This sequence will continue upon Industry and Science Canada pressure levels using the DIC. For subsequent vehicle start-ups as See Radio Frequency Statement on additional information and details long as the malfunction exists. page 12‑16 for information about the DIC operation and When the malfunction indicator is regarding Part 15 of the Federal displays see Driver Information illuminated, the system may not be Communications Commission (FCC) Center (DIC) on page 4‑31 and able to detect or signal low tire Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry Tire Messages on page 4‑48. pressure as intended. TPMS and Science Canada. 9-70 Vehicle Care

This could be an early indicator that Notice: Using non-approved tire the air pressure in the tire(s) are sealants could damage the Tire getting low and need to be inflated Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) to the proper pressure. sensors. TPMS sensor damage The Tire and Loading Information caused by using an incorrect tire label, attached to your vehicle, sealant is not covered by the When a low tire pressure condition shows the size of your vehicle's vehicle warranty. Always use is detected, the TPMS illuminates original equipment tires and the the GM approved tire sealant the low tire pressure warning light correct inflation pressure for the available through your dealer/ located on the instrument panel tires when they are cold. See retailer. cluster. Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12, Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits A DIC warning message to check for an example of the Tire and use a GM approved liquid tire the pressure in a specific tire is also Loading Information label and its sealant. Using non-approved tire shown on the DIC display screen. location on your vehicle. Also see sealants could damage the TPMS The low tire pressure warning light Tire Pressure on page 9‑66. sensors. See Tire Sealant and and the DIC warning message come Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you Compressor Kit on page 9‑84 for at each ignition cycle until the tires about a low tire pressure condition information regarding the inflator kit are inflated to the correct inflation but it does not replace normal tire materials and instructions. pressure. maintenance. See Tire Inspection The low tire pressure warning light on page 9‑73, Tire Rotation on may come on in cool weather page 9‑73 and Tires on page 9‑58. when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as you start to drive. Vehicle Care 9-71

TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or Message process was not done or not being near facilities using radio completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the The TPMS will not function properly rotating the vehicle's tires. TPMS could cause the TPMS if one or more of the TPMS sensors The DIC message should go off sensors to malfunction. are missing or inoperable. When the after successfully completing If the TPMS is not functioning it system detects a malfunction, the the sensor matching process. low tire warning light flashes for cannot detect or signal a low tire See “TPMS Sensor Matching condition. See your dealer/retailer about one minute and then stays on Process” later in this section. for the remainder of the ignition for service if the TPMS malfunction . cycle. A DIC warning message is One or more TPMS sensors are light and DIC message comes on also displayed. The low tire warning missing or damaged. The DIC and stays on. light and DIC warning message message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off TPMS Sensor Matching come on at each ignition cycle until Process the problem is corrected. Some of when the TPMS sensors are the conditions that can cause the installed and the sensor Each TPMS sensor has a unique malfunction light and DIC message matching process is performed identification code. Any time you to come on are: successfully. See your dealer/ replace one or more of the TPMS retailer for service. sensors or rotate your vehicle's . One of the road tires has been . tires, the identification codes need replaced with the spare tire, Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle's original to be matched to the new tire/wheel if the vehicle has one. The spare position. The sensors are matched tire does not have a TPMS equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than to the tire/wheel positions in the sensor. The DIC message following order: driver side front tire, should go off once you re-install those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS passenger side front tire, passenger the road tire containing the side rear tire, and driver side rear TPMS sensor. from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on page 9‑75. tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for service. 9-72 Vehicle Care

The TPMS sensors can also be The TPMS matching process is TPMS sensor identification code matched to each tire/wheel position outlined below: has been matched to this tire by increasing or decreasing the 1. Set the parking brake. position. tire's air pressure. If increasing the 6. Proceed to the passenger side tire's air pressure, do not exceed 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. front tire, and repeat the the maximum inflation pressure procedure in Step 5. indicated on the tire's sidewall. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry To decrease the tire's air-pressure (RKE) transmitter's lock and 7. Proceed to the passenger side use the pointed end of the valve unlock buttons at the same time rear tire, and repeat the cap, a pencil-style air pressure for approximately five seconds. procedure in Step 5. gage, or a key. The horn sounds twice to signal 8. Proceed to the driver side rear You have two minutes to match the the receiver is in relearn mode tire, and repeat the procedure first tire/wheel position, and and Tire Learning Active in Step 5. five minutes overall, to match all message displays on the DIC 9. After hearing the confirming horn four tire/wheel positions. If it takes screen. chirp, for the driver side rear tire, longer than two minutes, to match 4. Start with the driver side the horn sounds two more times the first tire and wheel, or more than front tire. to signal the tire learning mode five minutes to match all four tire 5. Remove the valve cap from the is no longer active. Turn the and wheel positions, the matching ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. process stops and you need to valve stem. Activate the TPMS start over. sensor by increasing or 10. Set all four tires to the decreasing the tire's air pressure recommended air pressure for 10 seconds, or until a horn level as indicated on the tire chirp sounds. The horn chirp, and loading information label. which can take up to 30 seconds 11. Put the valve caps back on the to sound, confirms that the valve stems. Vehicle Care 9-73

Tire Inspection Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle has the same size We recommend that you tires on all four wheel positions. regularly inspect your vehicle's These tires should be rotated tires, including the spare tire, every 5,000 to 8,000 miles if the vehicle has one, for signs (8 000 to 13 000 km). See of wear or damage. See When It Scheduled Maintenance on Is Time for New Tires on page 10‑3 . page 9‑74 for more information. The purpose of a regular tire Tire Rotation rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Tire rotation is not This will ensure that the vehicle Use the rotation pattern shown recommended if the vehicle has continues to perform most like it here when rotating tires of the 255/40R19 size tires on the front did when the tires were new. same size installed on all four wheels and 285/35R19 size tires wheel positions. on the rear wheels. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires as soon as Different tire sizes should not be possible and check wheel rotated front to rear. Each tire alignment. Also check for and wheel should only be used damaged tires or wheels. See in its original front or rear When It Is Time for New Tires position. on page 9‑74 and Wheel Replacement on page 9‑80 . 9-74 Vehicle Care

After the tires have been When It Is Time for New { WARNING rotated, adjust the front and rear Tires inflation pressures as shown on Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the the Tire and Loading Information Various factors, such as parts to which it is fastened, can maintenance, temperatures, driving label. See Tire Pressure on make wheel nuts become loose page 9 66 and Vehicle Load speeds, vehicle loading, and road ‑ after time. The wheel could come conditions influence when you need Limits on page 8‑12 . off and cause an accident. When new tires. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor changing a wheel, remove any System. See Tire Pressure rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Monitor Operation on page 9‑69 . In an emergency, use a cloth or a Make certain that all wheel paper towel to do this; but be sure nuts are properly tightened. to use a scraper or wire brush See “Wheel Nut Torque” under later, if needed, to get all the rust Capacities and Specifications on or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat page 11‑2 . on page 9‑81.

One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or less of tread remaining. Vehicle Care 9-75

The vehicle needs new tires if any The rubber in tires degrades over Buying New Tires of the following statements are true: time. This is also true for the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even GM has developed and matched . You can see the indicators at if it is not being used. Multiple specific tires for your vehicle. three or more places around The original equipment tires the tire. conditions affect how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures, installed on your vehicle, when it . You can see cord or fabric loading conditions, and inflation was new, were designed to meet showing through the tire's pressure maintenance. With proper General Motors Tire Performance rubber. care and maintenance tires typically Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need . The tread or sidewall is cracked, wear out before they degrade due to replacement tires, GM strongly cut, or snagged deep enough to age. If you are unsure about the recommends that you get tires with show cord or fabric. need to replace the tires as they get older, consult the tire manufacturer the same TPC Spec rating. This . The tire has a bump, bulge, for more information. way, your vehicle will continue to or split. have tires that are designed to give . The tire has a puncture, cut, the same performance and vehicle or other damage that cannot be safety, during normal use, as the repaired well because of the size original tires. or location of the damage. 9-76 Vehicle Care

GM's exclusive TPC Spec system GM recommends replacing tires in considers over a dozen critical sets of four. This is because uniform { WARNING specifications that impact the tread depth on all tires will help overall performance of your keep your vehicle performing most Mixing tires could cause you to vehicle, including brake system like it did when the tires were new. lose control while driving. If you performance, ride and handling, Replacing less than a full set of tires mix tires of different sizes (other traction control, and tire pressure can affect the braking and handling than those originally installed on monitoring performance. GM's TPC performance of your vehicle. See your vehicle), brands, or types Spec number is molded onto the Tire Inspection on page 9‑73 and (radial and bias-belted tires), the tire's sidewall near the tire size. Tire Rotation on page 9‑73. vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. If the tires have an all-season tread Winter tires with the same speed design, the TPC Spec number will rating as your original equipment Using tires of different sizes be followed by an MS for mud and tires may not be available for H, V, (other than those originally snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. installed on your vehicle), brands page 9‑60, for additional If you choose snow tires with a or types, may also cause damage information. lower speed rating, never exceed to your vehicle. Be sure to use the tire's maximum speed capability. the correct size, brand, and type tires on all four wheels. Vehicle Care 9-77

Vehicles that have a tire pressure Different Size Tires and { WARNING monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if Wheels If you use bias-ply tires on the non-TPC Spec rated tires are If you add wheels or tires that are a vehicle, the wheel rim flanges installed on it. Non-TPC Spec rated different size than your original could develop cracks after tires may give a low-pressure equipment wheels and tires, this many miles of driving. A tire warning that is higher or lower than could affect the way your vehicle and/or wheel could fail the proper warning level you would performs, including its braking, ride suddenly, causing a crash. get with TPC Spec rated tires. See and handling characteristics, Use only radial-ply tires with Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on stability, and resistance to rollover. the wheels on the vehicle. page 9‑69. Additionally, if your vehicle has Your vehicle's original equipment electronic systems such as anti-lock If you must replace your vehicle's tires are listed on the Tire and brakes, traction control, and tires with those that do not have a Loading Information label. See electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can TPC Spec number, make sure they Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12, are the same size, load range, for more information about the Tire be affected. speed rating, and construction type and Loading Information label and See Buying New Tires on (radial and bias-belted tires) as your its location on your vehicle. page 9‑75 and Accessories and vehicle's original tires. Modifications on page 9‑3 for additional information. 9-78 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire Quality The grades are molded on the Treadwear Grading sidewalls of most passenger car The treadwear grade is a tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Quality grades can be found comparative rating based on the Grading (UTQG) system wear rate of the tire when tested where applicable on the tire does not apply to deep tread, sidewall between tread shoulder under controlled conditions on a winter-type snow tires, specified government test and maximum section width. space-saver, or temporary use For example: course. For example, a tire spare tires, tires with nominal graded 150 would wear one and Treadwear 200 Traction AA rim diameters of 25 to 30 cm a half (1.5) times as well on the Temperature A (10 to 12 inches), or to some government course as a tire limited-production tires. The following information relates graded 100. The relative to the system developed by the While the tires available on performance of tires depends United States National Highway General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of Traffic Safety Administration and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may (NHTSA), which grades tires respect to these grades, they depart significantly from the by treadwear, traction, and must also conform to federal norm due to variations in temperature performance. safety requirements and driving habits, service practices, This applies only to vehicles additional General Motors Tire and differences in road sold in the United States. Performance Criteria (TPC) characteristics and climate. standards. Vehicle Care 9-79

Traction – AA, A, B, C material of the tire to degenerate Wheel Alignment and Tire The traction grades, from and reduce tire life, and Balance highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The tires and wheels on your and C. Those grades represent vehicle were aligned and balanced the tire's ability to stop on wet The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all carefully at the factory to give you pavement as measured under the longest tire life and best overall controlled conditions on passenger car tires must meet performance. Adjustments to wheel specified government test under the Federal Motor Vehicle alignment and tire balancing will not surfaces of asphalt and Safety Standard No. 109. be necessary on a regular basis. concrete. A tire marked C may Grades B and A represent However, if you notice unusual tire have poor traction performance. higher levels of performance on wear or your vehicle pulling to one the laboratory test wheel than side or the other, the alignment Temperature – A, B, C the minimum required by law. might need to be checked. If you It should be noted that the notice your vehicle vibrating when The temperature grades are driving on a smooth road, the tires A (the highest), B, and C, temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is and wheels might need to be representing the tire's resistance rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer to the generation of heat and properly inflated and not for proper diagnosis. overloaded. Excessive speed, its ability to dissipate heat CTS-V models should only use when tested under controlled underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in adhesive wheel weights to balance conditions on a specified indoor the tires and wheels. laboratory test wheel. Sustained combination, can cause heat high temperature can cause the buildup and possible tire failure. 9-80 Vehicle Care

Wheel Replacement If you need to replace any of the Notice: The wrong wheel can wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, also cause problems with bearing Replace any wheel that is bent, or Tire Pressure Monitor System life, brake cooling, speedometer cracked, or badly rusted or (TPMS) sensors, replace them only or odometer calibration, corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming with new GM original equipment headlamp aim, bumper height, loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and parts. This way, you will be sure to vehicle ground clearance, and tire wheel nuts should be replaced. have the right wheel, wheel bolts, or tire chain clearance to the If the wheel leaks air, replace it wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for body and chassis. (except some aluminum wheels, the vehicle. which can sometimes be repaired). See If a Tire Goes Flat on See your dealer/retailer if any of page 9‑81 for more information. { WARNING these conditions exist. Used Replacement Wheels Your dealer/retailer will know the Using the wrong replacement kind of wheel you need. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel { WARNING Each new wheel should have the nuts on your vehicle can be same load-carrying capacity, dangerous. It could affect the Putting a used wheel on the diameter, width, offset, and be braking and handling of your vehicle is dangerous. You cannot mounted the same way as the one it vehicle, make your tires lose air know how it has been used or replaces. and make you lose control. You how far it has been driven. could have a collision in which It could fail suddenly and cause a you or others could be injured. crash. If you have to replace a Always use the correct wheel, wheel, use a new GM original wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for equipment wheel. replacement. Vehicle Care 9-81

Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat WARNING (Continued) It is unusual for a tire to blowout { WARNING traction device only if its while you are driving, especially if manufacturer recommends it for you maintain your vehicle's tires Do not use tire chains. There is properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is not enough clearance. Tire chains use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. much more likely to leak out slowly. used on a vehicle without the But if you should ever have a proper amount of clearance can Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To help avoid blowout, here are a few tips about cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do: suspension, or other vehicle damage to the vehicle, drive If a front tire fails, the flat tire parts. The area damaged by the slowly, re-adjust or remove the device if it is contacting the creates a drag that pulls the vehicle tire chains could cause you to toward that side. Take your foot off lose control of the vehicle and vehicle, and do not spin the wheels. If you do find traction the accelerator pedal and grip the you or others may be injured in a steering wheel firmly. Steer to crash. Use another type of devices that will fit, install them on the rear tires. maintain lane position, and then (Continued) gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. 9-82 Vehicle Care

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and WARNING (Continued) { WARNING may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In any rear the vehicle, it is designed only for Changing a tire can be blowout remove your foot from the changing a flat tire. If it is used for dangerous. The vehicle can slip accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle anything else, you or others could off the jack and roll over or fall on under control by steering the way be badly injured or killed if the you or other people. You and they you want the vehicle to go. It may vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack could be badly injured or even be very bumpy and noisy, but you is provided with the vehicle, only killed. Find a level place to can still steer. Gently brake to a use it for changing a flat tire. change your tire. To help prevent stop, well off the road if possible. the vehicle from moving: If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 1. Set the parking brake firmly. { WARNING and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard 2. Put an automatic Lifting a vehicle and getting warning flashers. See Hazard transmission shift lever in under it to do maintenance or Warning Flashers on page 5‑4. P (Park), or shift a manual repairs is dangerous without the transmission to 1 (First) or appropriate safety equipment and R (Reverse). training. If a jack is provided with (Continued) (Continued) Vehicle Care 9-83

This vehicle may come with a jack WARNING (Continued) and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jacking 3. Turn off the engine and do equipment to change a spare tire not restart while the vehicle safely, follow the instructions below. is raised. Then see Tire Changing on page 9 94. To use the tire sealant 4. Do not allow passengers to ‑ and compressor kit, see Tire remain in the vehicle. Sealant and Compressor Kit on To be certain the vehicle will not page 9‑84. move, put blocks at the front and When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), rear of the tire farthest away from use the following example as a the one being changed. That guide to assist you in the placement A. Wheel Block would be the tire on the other of wheel blocks (A). B. Flat Tire side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. The following information explains how to repair or change a tire. 9-84 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant and If this vehicle has a tire sealant and { WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a Compressor Kit spare tire, tire changing equipment, Over-inflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not { WARNING the tire to rupture and you or be a place to store a tire. others could be injured. Be sure Idling a vehicle in an enclosed to read and follow the tire sealant The tire sealant and compressor area with poor ventilation is and compressor kit instructions can be used to temporarily seal dangerous. Engine exhaust may and inflate the tire to its punctures up to 6 mm (¼ inch) in the tread area of the tire. It can enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust recommended pressure. Do not also be used to inflate an under contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) exceed the recommended inflated tire. which cannot be seen or smelled. pressure. It can cause unconsciousness If the tire has been separated from and even death. Never run the the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, engine in an enclosed area that { WARNING or has a large puncture, the tire is has no fresh air ventilation. For too severely damaged for the tire more information, see Engine Storing the tire sealant and sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Service on Exhaust on page 8‑25. compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger page 12‑6. compartment of the vehicle could Read and follow all of the tire cause injury. In a sudden stop or sealant and compressor kit collision, loose equipment could instructions. strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. Vehicle Care 9-85

This vehicle may have one of Tire Sealant the following tire sealant and Read and follow the safe handling compressor kits. The kit includes: instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer/ retailer. See “Removal and A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Installation of the Sealant Canister” Air Only) following. B. On/Off Button There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the sealant C. Pressure Gage canister and sealant/air hose D. Pressure Deflation Button assembly must be replaced. See (If equipped) “Removal and Installation of the E. Tire Sealant Canister Sealant Canister” following. F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) G. Air Only Hose (Black) H. Power Plug 9-86 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster. Vehicle Care 9-87

Always do a safety check first. 4. Remove the valve stem cap 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle See If a Tire Goes Flat on from the flat tire by turning it must be running while using the page 9‑81. Do not remove any counterclockwise. air compressor. objects that have penetrated 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) 8. Turn the selector switch (A) the tire. onto the tire valve stem. Turn it counterclockwise to the 1. Remove the tire sealant and clockwise until it is tight. Sealant + Air position. compressor kit from its storage 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the 9. Press the on/off (B) button to location. See Storing the Tire accessory power outlet in the turn the tire sealant and Sealant and Compressor Kit vehicle. Unplug all items from compressor kit on. (Sedan) on page 9‑92 or other accessory power outlets. The compressor will inject Storing the Tire Sealant and See Power Outlets on Compressor Kit (Wagon) on sealant and air into the tire. page 4‑12. page 9‑93. The pressure gage (C) will If the vehicle has an accessory initially show a high pressure 2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) power outlet, do not use the and the power plug (H). while the compressor pushes the cigarette lighter. sealant into the tire. Once the 3. Place the kit on the ground. If the vehicle only has a cigarette sealant is completely dispersed Make sure the tire valve stem is lighter, use the cigarette lighter. into the tire, the pressure will positioned close to the ground Do not pinch the power plug quickly drop and start to rise so the hose will reach it. cord in the door or window. again as the tire inflates with air only. 9-88 Vehicle Care

10. Inflate the tire to the Notice: If the recommended Be careful while handling the recommended inflation pressure cannot be reached after tire sealant and compressor kit pressure using the pressure approximately 25 minutes, the as it could be warm after gage (C). The recommended vehicle should not be driven usage. inflation pressure can be found farther. The tire is too severely 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from on the Tire and Loading damaged and the tire sealant and the accessory power outlet in Information label. See Tire compressor kit cannot inflate the the vehicle. Pressure on page 9‑66. tire. Remove the power plug from 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) The pressure gage (C) may the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from counterclockwise to remove it read higher than the actual tire from the tire valve stem. pressure while the compressor the tire valve. See Roadside is on. Turn the compressor off Service on page 12‑6. 14. Replace the tire valve to get an accurate pressure 11. Press the on/off button (B) to stem cap. reading. The compressor may turn the tire sealant and 15. Replace the sealant/air be turned on/off until the compressor kit off. hose (F), and the power correct pressure is reached. The tire is not sealed and plug (H) back in their original will continue to leak air location. until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through 18 must be done immediately after Step 11. Vehicle Care 9-89

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 20. Wipe off any sealant from the 8 km (5 miles) to distribute the wheel, tire, and vehicle. sealant in the tire. 21. Dispose of the used sealant 19. Stop at a safe location and canister (E) and sealant/air check the tire pressure. hose (F) assembly at a local Refer to Steps 1 through 11 dealer/retailer or in accordance 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate under “Using the Tire Sealant with local state codes and to the recommended inflation and Compressor Kit without practices. pressure, remove the Sealant to Inflate a Tire maximum speed label from the 22. Replace it with a new canister (Not Punctured).” sealant canister (E) and place available from your dealer/ it in a highly visible location. If the tire pressure has fallen retailer. more than 68 kPa (10 psi) 23. After temporarily sealing a tire The label is a reminder not to below the recommended exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) until using the tire sealant and inflation pressure, stop driving compressor kit, take the the damaged tire is repaired or the vehicle. The tire is too replaced. vehicle to an authorized severely damaged and the tire dealer/retailer within a 161 km 17. Return the equipment to its sealant cannot seal the tire. (100 miles) of driving to have original storage location in the See Roadside Service on the tire repaired or replaced. vehicle. page 12‑6. If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 68 kPa (10 psi) from the recommended inflation pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. 9-90 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured) To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑81. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (Sedan) on page 9‑92 or Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (Wagon) on page 9‑93. 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) and the power plug (H). Vehicle Care 9-91

3. Place the kit on the ground. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle If you inflate the tire higher Make sure the tire valve stem is must be running while using the than the recommended positioned close to the ground air compressor. pressure you can adjust the so the hose will reach it. 8. Turn the selector switch (A) excess pressure by pressing the pressure deflation 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap clockwise to the Air Only position. button (D), if equipped, until the from the flat tire by turning it proper pressure reading is counterclockwise. 9. Press the on/off (B) button to reached. This option is only 5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto turn the compressor on. functional when using the air the tire valve stem by turning it The compressor will inflate the only hose (G). clockwise until it is tight. tire with air only. 11. Press the on/off button (B) to 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the turn the tire sealant and accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation compressor kit off. vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure Be careful while handling the other accessory power outlets. gage (C). The recommended tire sealant and compressor kit See Power Outlets on inflation pressure can be found as it could be warm after page 4‑12. on the Tire and Loading usage. Information label. See Tire If the vehicle has an accessory 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from Pressure on page 9‑66. power outlet, do not use the the accessory power outlet in cigarette lighter. The pressure gage (C) may the vehicle. read higher than the actual tire If the vehicle only has a cigarette 13. Disconnect the air only lighter, use the cigarette lighter. pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off hose (G) from the tire Do not pinch the power plug to get an accurate reading. valve stem, by turning it cord in the door or window. The compressor may be turned counterclockwise, and replace on/off until the correct pressure the tire valve stem cap. is reached. 9-92 Vehicle Care

14. Replace the air only hose (G) Removal and Installation of the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit and the power plug (H) and Sealant Canister without Pressure Deflation Button cord back in its original location. To remove the sealant canister: 15. Place the equipment in the 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. original storage location in the 2. Press the canister release vehicle. button. 3. Pull up and remove the canister. 4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer/retailer. 5. Push the new canister into place. A. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storing the Tire Sealant B. Foam Container and Compressor Kit (Sedan) C. Wing Nut 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk The tire sealant and compressor kit (Sedan) on page 1‑17. The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the trunk. has an accessory adapter located in 2. Locate the tire sealant and a compartment on the bottom of its compressor kit (A) in the center housing that may be used to inflate of the cargo area. air mattresses, balls, etc. 3. Remove the wing nut (C) that holds the tire sealant and compressor kit (A) in place. Vehicle Care 9-93

4. Remove the tire sealant and To store the tire sealant and 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate compressor kit (A) from the foam compressor kit, reverse the (Wagon) on page 1‑19. container (B). steps. 2. Pull up on the tire sealant and Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit compressor kit (A) to remove it with Pressure Deflation Button Storing the Tire Sealant from the foam container (B). and Compressor Kit 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk It is not necessary to remove the (Sedan) on page 1‑17. (Wagon) subwoofer (C) to access the tire The tire sealant and compressor kit sealant and compressor kit, is located in the rear of the vehicle. however, if you want to remove it see Tire Changing on page 9‑94 for instructions. To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the steps.

2. Remove the retainer that holds the tire sealant and compressor kit in place. A. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 3. Remove the tire sealant and B. Foam Container compressor kit from the foam C. Subwoofer (Optional) container. 9-94 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing To access the spare tire and jacking Removing the Spare Tire and equipment: Tools (Wagon) Removing the Spare Tire and 1. Remove the spare tire cover. Tools (Sedan) 2. Remove the stow rod cap by pulling it straight up off of the rod. 3. Turn the wing nut (A) on the compact spare tire (B) counterclockwise to remove. 4. Remove the spare tire and place it next to the flat tire. 5. The tools you will be using next include the jack (C), wheel wrench (D), and extension (E). Sedan A. Wing Nut B. Spare Tire C. Jack D. Wheel Wrench E. Extension F. Strap Vehicle Care 9-95

To access the spare tire and jacking To remove the jack: equipment: 1. Remove the spare tire cover. 2. Remove the subwoofer (D), if the vehicle has one. To remove the subwoofer: 2.1. Turn the nut (A) counterclockwise to remove. 2.2. Disconnect the A. Wing Nut connector wire. B. Spare Tire 2.3. Pull the subwoofer (D) up to 1. Remove the retainer nut (A). C. Jack remove it from the stow rod. 2. Remove the jack stowage D. Subwoofer 3. Remove the spare tire (B) and place it next to the flat tire. bracket (B). E. Wheel Wrench 4. Remove the jack (C), wheel 3. Slide the jack (C) forward to F. Extension wrench (E), and extension (F). remove it from the floor storage G. Cable bracket. 9-96 Vehicle Care

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑81 for more information.

3. Find the jacking location using 4. Insert the hooked end of the the diagram above and extension handle through the corresponding V-shaped locating jack and the flat end through the notches located in the plastic wheel wrench. molding. { WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it is 2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do jacked up is dangerous. If the not remove them yet, using the vehicle slips off the jack, you wheel wrench. Turn the handle could be badly injured or killed. about 180 degrees, then return Never get under a vehicle when it the handle back to the starting is supported only by a jack. position. This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn. Vehicle Care 9-97

{ WARNING { WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting Raising your vehicle with the under it to do maintenance or jack improperly positioned can repairs is dangerous without the damage the vehicle and even appropriate safety equipment and make the vehicle fall. To help training. If a jack is provided with avoid personal injury and vehicle the vehicle, it is designed only for damage, be sure to fit the jack lift changing a flat tire. If it is used for head into the proper location anything else, you or others could before raising the vehicle. be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack Notice: If you position the jack 6. Raise the jack by turning the is provided with the vehicle, only under the rocker molding and wheel wrench clockwise until the use it for changing a flat tire. attempt to raise the vehicle, you slots in the jack head fit into the could break the molding and/or metal flange located behind the cause other damage to your V-shaped locating notches on vehicle. Always position the jack the plastic molding as shown. so that when the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the notch 7. Put the compact spare tire located inboard from the rocker near you. molding. 8. Raise the vehicle by turning the 5. Turn the wheel wrench wheel wrench clockwise. Raise counterclockwise to lower the the vehicle far enough off the jack lift head until the jack fits ground for the compact spare under the vehicle. tire to fit under the vehicle. 9-98 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑81. 9. Remove all the wheel nuts and 10. Remove any rust or dirt from the flat tire. the wheel bolts, mounting { WARNING surfaces, and spare wheel. { WARNING 11. Install the spare tire. Never use oil or grease on bolts Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the or nuts because the nuts might 12. Put the wheel nuts back on parts to which it is fastened, can come loose. The vehicle's wheel with the rounded end of the make wheel nuts become loose could fall off, causing a crash. nuts toward the wheel. after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When (Continued) Vehicle Care 9-99

13. Tighten each wheel nut by Notice: Improperly tightened Storing a Flat or Spare Tire turning it clockwise with your wheel nuts can lead to brake and Tools hand until the wheel is held pulsation and rotor damage. against the hub. To avoid expensive brake repairs, { WARNING 14. Lower the vehicle by evenly tighten the wheel nuts in turning the wheel wrench the proper sequence and to the Storing a jack, a tire, or other counterclockwise. Lower the proper torque specification. equipment in the passenger jack completely. See Capacities and Specifications compartment of the vehicle could on page 11‑2 for the wheel nut cause injury. In a sudden stop or torque specification. { WARNING collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in Wheel nuts that are improperly or the proper place. incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat come off. The wheel nuts should Load Floor (Sedan) be tightened with a torque wrench 1. Put back all tools as they were to the proper torque specification stored in the rear storage after replacing. Follow the torque compartment and put the specification supplied by the compartment cover back on. aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel 2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage nuts. See Capacities and bag, if there is one. Specifications on page 11‑2 for 15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly 3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the original equipment wheel nut in a crisscross sequence as rear storage compartment. torque specifications. shown. 9-100 Vehicle Care

Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat Load Floor (Wagon) 1. Return all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover on. 2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag, if there is one. 3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the rear storage compartment.

4. Route the loop end of the 7. Route the hook end of the strap strap (C) through one of the through the wheel. cargo tie-downs (A) located in 8. Attach the hook to the cargo the rear of the vehicle. tie-down in the rear of the 5. Route the hook (B) through the vehicle. loop (C). 9. Slide the buckle to tighten the 6. Pull the strap to tighten it around cargo tie-down strap. the cargo tie-down (A). Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the compact spare tire in the trunk.

4. Route one of the hooks (A), at the end of the cable provided, through the liftgate striker (B). Vehicle Care 9-101

5. Slide both D-rings (E) on each Compact Spare Tire and Tools D. Wheel Wrench side of the vehicle as far (Sedan) E. Extension rearward as they will go. Use the following diagram as a F. Strap 6. Route one hook (A) under the guide for storing the compact spare wheel spoke (C) and place the tire and tools in the trunk: Reverse the instructions for hook into the slot in the cargo removing the spare tire and tools to rail on the driver side of the store the compact spare tire. vehicle. 7. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side forward to engage the hook. 8. Route the other hook under the wheel spoke (D) and place the hook into the slot in the cargo rail on the passenger side of the vehicle. 9. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side forward to engage the hook. A. Wing Nut B. Compact Spare Tire or Flat Tire (valve stem down) C. Jack 9-102 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire and Tools Compact Spare Tire (Wagon) Use the following diagram as a { WARNING guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools in the rear Driving with more than one compartment area: compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling. This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at a time. A. Wing Nut If your vehicle is equipped with a B. Spare Tire compact spare tire it was fully C. Jack inflated when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the D. Subwoofer inflation pressure regularly. It should E. Wheel Wrench be 60 psi (420 kPa). F. Extension After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as soon as G. Strap possible and make sure the spare Reverse the instructions for tire is correctly inflated. The removing the spare tire and tools to compact spare is made to perform store the compact spare tire. well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your Vehicle Care 9-103 convenience. Of course, it is best to Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps replace the spare with a full-size tire could result in costly damage to as soon as possible. The spare tire If the vehicle battery has run down, the vehicle that would not be will last longer and be in good you may want to use another covered by the warranty. vehicle and some jumper cables to shape in case it is needed again. Trying to start the vehicle by start your vehicle. Be sure to use Notice: When the compact spare pushing or pulling it will not the following steps to do it safely. is installed, do not take the work, and it could damage the vehicle through an automatic car vehicle. { WARNING wash with guide rails. The 1. Check the other vehicle. It must compact spare can get caught on Batteries can hurt you. They can have a 12-volt battery with a the rails which can damage the negative ground system. tire, wheel and other parts of the be dangerous because: vehicle. . They contain acid that can Notice: If the other vehicle's burn you. system is not a 12-volt system Do not use the compact spare on with a negative ground, both other vehicles. . They contain gas that can vehicles can be damaged. Only And do not mix the compact spare explode or ignite. use vehicles with 12-volt systems tire or wheel with other wheels or . They contain enough with negative grounds to jump tires. They will not fit. Keep the electricity to burn you. start your vehicle. spare tire and its wheel together. If you do not follow these steps Notice: Tire chains will not fit the exactly, some or all of these compact spare. Using them can things can hurt you. damage the vehicle and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compact spare. 9-104 Vehicle Care

2. Get the vehicles close enough 3. Turn off the ignition on both so the jumper cables can reach, vehicles. Unplug unnecessary but be sure the vehicles are not accessories plugged into the touching each other. If they are, cigarette lighter or the accessory it could cause a ground power outlets. Turn off the radio connection you do not want. and all lamps that are not You would not be able to start needed. This will avoid sparks your vehicle and the bad and help save both batteries. grounding could damage the And it could save the radio! electrical systems. 4. Open the hoods and locate the To avoid the possibility of the positive (+) and negative (−) vehicles rolling, set the parking terminal locations or the remote brake firmly on both vehicles positive (+) and remote Your vehicle has a remote involved in the jump start negative (−) terminals of the negative (−) ground location, as procedure. Put an automatic other vehicle. Then locate the shown in the illustration. It is transmission in P (Park) or a remote positive (+) location on located on the rear passenger manual transmission in Neutral your vehicle. See Engine side of the vehicle . See Engine before setting the parking brake. Compartment Overview on Compartment Overview on page 9 6. You should always Notice: If you leave the radio or page 9‑6 for more information ‑ use this remote ground location, other accessories on during the on locations the terminals. instead of the terminal on the jump starting procedure, they battery. could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. Vehicle Care 9-105

Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the Engine Control { WARNING { WARNING Module (ECM), ECM mounting bracket, or any cables that attach Using an open flame near a Fans or other moving engine to the ECM bracket, you may battery can cause battery gas to parts can injure you badly. Keep damage the ECM. Always attach explode. People have been hurt your hands away from moving the negative cable to your doing this, and some have been parts once the engine is running. vehicle's remote negative ground blinded. Use a flashlight if you location, instead of the ECM, ECM need more light. 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing bracket, or any cables attached to Be sure the battery has enough the ECM bracket. insulation. If they do, you could water. You do not need to add get a shock. The vehicles could water to the battery installed in be damaged too. { WARNING your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right Before you connect the cables, An electric fan can start up even here are some basic things you amount of fluid is there. If it is low, when the engine is not running should know. Positive (+) will go add water to take care of that and can injure you. Keep hands, to positive (+) or to a remote first. If you do not, explosive gas clothing and tools away from any positive (+) terminal if the vehicle could be present. underhood electric fan. has one. Negative (−) will go to a Battery fluid contains acid that heavy, unpainted metal engine can burn you. Do not get it on part or to a remote negative (−) you. If you accidentally get it in terminal if the vehicle has one. your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 9-106 Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end touch 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) or you will get a metal. Connect it to the negative (−) cable at least short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the 18 inches (45 cm) away from the battery and maybe other parts good battery. Use a remote dead battery, but not near too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle engine parts that move. The negative (−) cable to the has one. electrical connection is just as negative (−) terminal on the dead 8. Now connect the black good there, and the chance of battery because this can cause negative (−) cable to the sparks getting back to the sparks. negative terminal of the good battery is much less. battery. Use a remote Use a remote negative (−) negative (−) terminal if the terminal if the vehicle has one. vehicle has one. Your vehicle's remote Do not let the other end touch negative (−) ground location is anything until the next step. The for this purpose. other end of the negative (−) 10. Now start the vehicle with the cable does not go to the dead good battery and run the battery. It goes to a heavy, engine for a while. unpainted metal engine part or 11. Try to start the vehicle that had to a remote negative (−) terminal the dead battery. If it will not on the vehicle with the dead start after a few tries, it battery. probably needs service. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Vehicle Care 9-107

Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following: wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black may occur and damage the negative (−) cable from the vehicle. The repairs would not be vehicle that had the dead covered by the vehicle warranty. battery. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct 2. Disconnect the black order, making sure that the negative (−) cable from the cables do not touch each other or vehicle with the good battery. other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the Jumper Cable Removal good battery. A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle. Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal 9-108 Vehicle Care

Towing the vehicle with two wheels on the Dinghy Towing ground and two wheels up on a Towing the Vehicle device known as a dolly. Here are some important things to Consult your dealer/retailer or a consider before recreational vehicle professional towing service if the towing: disabled vehicle needs to be towed. See Roadside Service on . What is the towing capacity page 12‑6. of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle manufacturer's vehicle for recreational purposes recommendations. (such as behind a motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towing . What is the distance that will be following. travelled? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how Recreational Vehicle long they can tow. Towing . Is the proper towing equipment going to be used? See your Recreational vehicle towing means dealer/retailer or trailering towing the vehicle behind another professional for additional vehicle – such as behind a advice and equipment motorhome. The two most common recommendations. types of recreational vehicle towing . are known as dinghy towing and Is the vehicle ready to be dolly towing. Dingy towing is towing towed? Just as preparing the the vehicle with all four wheels on vehicle for a long trip, make sure the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle is prepared to be towed. Vehicle Care 9-109

Dolly Towing 3. Firmly set the parking brake. (Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) See Parking Brake (Manual) on page 8‑34 or Parking Brake (Electric) on page 8‑35. 4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) for an automatic transmission or in 1 (First) for a manual transmission. 5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the dolly. 6. Clamp the steering wheel in a Notice: If the vehicle is straight-ahead position with a towed with all four wheels clamping device designed for on the ground, the drivetrain towing. components could be damaged. Use the following procedure to dolly The repairs would not be covered 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. tow a rear-wheel-drive vehicle from by the vehicle warranty. Do not the rear: tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly The vehicle was not designed to be manufacturer's instructions. towed with all four wheels on the ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle 2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly. must be towed, a dolly or a trailer should be used. If an all-wheel-drive vehicle must be towed, a trailer should be used. See “Dolly Towing” following for more information. 9-110 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing Appearance Care (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) Exterior Care Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing the Vehicle” later in this section. Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the Finish Care ground, or even with only two of Occasional waxing or mild polishing its wheels on the ground, will of the vehicle by hand may be damage drivetrain components. necessary to remove residue from Do not tow an all-wheel-drive the paint finish. Approved cleaning vehicle with any of its wheels on products can be obtained from your the ground. dealer/retailer. All-wheel-drive vehicles can only be If the vehicle has a basecoat/ towed with all four wheels on a clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat trailer. gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. Vehicle Care 9-111

Notice: Machine compounding Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Notice: Certain cleaners contain or aggressive polishing on a Parts chemicals that can damage the basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be emblems or nameplates on the may damage it. Use only cleaned regularly to keep their vehicle. Check the cleaning non-abrasive waxes and luster. Wash with water or use product label. If it states that it polishes that are made for a chrome polish on chrome or should not be used on plastic basecoat/clearcoat paint finish stainless steel trim, if necessary. parts, do not use it on the vehicle on the vehicle. or damage may occur and it Use special care with aluminum Foreign materials such as calcium would not be covered by the trim. To avoid damaging protective warranty. chloride and other salts, ice melting trim, never use auto or chrome agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, polish, steam or caustic soap to Do not use cleaning agents that are bird droppings, chemicals from clean aluminum. A coating of petroleum based or that contain industrial chimneys, etc., can wax, rubbed to high polish, is acid or abrasives, as they can damage the vehicle's finish if they recommended for all bright metal damage the paint, metal or plastic remain on painted surfaces. Wash parts. on the vehicle. Approved cleaning the vehicle as soon as possible. products can be obtained from If necessary, use non-abrasive Washing the Vehicle your dealer/retailer. Follow all cleaners that are marked safe for manufacturer directions regarding To preserve the vehicle's finish, painted surfaces to remove foreign correct product usage, necessary keep it clean by washing it often. matter. safety precautions and appropriate Do not wash the vehicle in Exterior painted surfaces are disposal of any vehicle care direct sunlight and use a car subject to aging, weather and product. washing soap. chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. 9-112 Vehicle Care

Rinse the vehicle well, before Weatherstrips Notice: Chrome wheels and other washing and after to remove all chrome trim may be damaged if Silicone grease on weatherstrips will cleaning agents completely. If they the vehicle is not washed after make them last longer, seal better, are allowed to dry on the surface, driving on roads that have been and not stick or squeak. Apply they could stain. sprayed with magnesium, calcium silicone grease with a clean cloth. or sodium chloride. These Dry the finish with a soft, clean During very cold, damp weather chlorides are used on roads for chamois or an all-cotton towel to frequent application may be conditions such as ice and dust. avoid surface scratches and water required. See Recommended Fluids Always wash the vehicle's spotting. and Lubricants on page 10 7. ‑ chrome with soap and water High pressure car washes could Wheels and Trim — Aluminum after exposure. cause water to enter the vehicle. or Chrome Avoid using high pressure washes Notice: Using strong soaps, closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the The vehicle may have either chemicals, abrasive polishes, surface of the vehicle. Use of power aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners washers exceeding 8,274 kPa that contain acid on aluminum or Keep the wheels clean using a soft chrome-plated wheels, could (1,200 psi) can result in damage or clean cloth with mild soap and removal of paint and decals. damage the surface of the water. Rinse with clean water. After wheel(s). The repairs would not Notice: Conveyor systems on rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft be covered by the vehicle some automatic car washes could clean towel. A wax may then be warranty. Use only approved damage the vehicle. There may applied. cleaners on aluminum or not be enough clearance for the chrome-plated wheels. undercarriage. Check with the car wash manager before using the automatic car wash. Vehicle Care 9-113

The surface of these wheels is Never drive a vehicle that has Tires similar to the painted surface of the aluminum or chrome-plated Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, wheels through an automatic car clean the tires. chemicals, abrasive polishes, wash that uses silicone carbide abrasive cleaners, cleaners with tire cleaning brushes. Notice: Using petroleum-based acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes tire dressing products on the on them because the surface could Windshield and Wiper Blades vehicle may damage the paint be damaged. Do not use chrome Clean the outside of the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying polish on aluminum wheels. with glass cleaner. a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted Notice: Using chrome polish on Clean the rubber blades using a lint surfaces on the vehicle. aluminum wheels could damage free cloth or paper towel soaked the wheels. The repairs would with windshield washer fluid or a Sheet Metal Damage not be covered by the vehicle mild detergent. Wash the windshield If the vehicle is damaged and warranty. Use chrome polish on thoroughly when cleaning the requires sheet metal repair or chrome wheels only. blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and replacement, make sure the body a buildup of vehicle wash/wax Use chrome polish only on repair shop applies anti-corrosion treatments may cause wiper chrome-plated wheels, but avoid material to parts repaired or streaking. Replace the wiper blades any painted surface of the wheel, replaced to restore corrosion if they are worn or damaged. and buff off immediately after protection. application. Wipers can be damaged by: Original manufacturer replacement Notice: Driving the vehicle . Extreme dusty conditions parts will provide the corrosion through an automatic car wash . Sand and salt protection while maintaining the that has silicone carbide tire vehicle warranty. cleaning brushes, could damage . Heat and sun the aluminum or chrome-plated . Snow and ice, without proper wheels. The repairs would not be removal covered by the vehicle warranty. 9-114 Vehicle Care

Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these Interior Care materials from the underbody with Any stone chips, fractures or deep plain water. Clean any areas where The vehicle's interior will continue to scratches in the finish should be mud and debris can collect. Dirt look its best if it is cleaned often. repaired right away. Bare metal will packed in close areas of the frame Dust and dirt can accumulate on the corrode quickly and may develop should be loosened before being upholstery and cause damage to into major repair expense. flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an the carpet, fabric, leather, and Minor chips and scratches can be underbody car washing system can plastic surfaces. Stains should be repaired with touch-up materials do this. removed quickly as extreme heat available from your dealer/retailer. could cause them to set rapidly. Chemical Paint Spotting Larger areas of finish damage can Lighter colored interiors may be corrected in your dealer's/ Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning. retailer's body and paint shop. conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can Underbody Maintenance fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the Chemicals used for ice and snow the vehicle. This damage can take vehicle's interior. removal and dust control can collect two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped Remove dust from small buttons on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular and knobs with a small brush with removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint soft bristles. develop on the underbody parts surface. such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. Vehicle Care 9-115

Your dealer/retailer has products for Cleaners can contain solvents that . Never apply heavy pressure or cleaning the vehicle's interior. When can become concentrated in the rub aggressively with a cleaning cleaning the vehicle's interior, only vehicle's interior. Before using cloth. Use of heavy pressure can use cleaners specifically designed cleaners, read and adhere to all damage the interior and does for the surfaces that are being safety instructions on the label. not improve the effectiveness of cleaned. Permanent damage can While cleaning the vehicle's interior, soil removal. result from using cleaners on maintain adequate ventilation by . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. surfaces for which they were not opening the vehicle's doors and Avoid laundry detergents or intended. Apply the cleaner directly windows. dishwashing soaps with to the cleaning cloth to prevent Do not clean the interior using the degreasers. Using too much over-spray. Remove any accidental following cleaners or techniques: soap will leave a residue that over-spray from other surfaces leaves streaks and attracts dirt. immediately. . Never use a knife or any other For liquid cleaners, about sharp object to remove a soil 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of Notice: Using abrasive cleaners from any interior surface. when cleaning glass surfaces on water is a good guide. . the vehicle, could scratch the Never use a stiff brush. It can . Do not heavily saturate the glass and/or cause damage to the cause damage to the vehicle's upholstery while cleaning. rear window defogger. When interior surfaces. . cleaning the glass on the vehicle, Damage to the vehicle's interior use only a soft cloth and glass may result from the use of many cleaner. organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. 9-116 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white carpet after the cleaning process. brush attachment to remove dust cloth with water or club soda. and loose dirt. A canister vacuum 2. Remove excess moisture. Leather with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and 3. Start on the outside edge of the To remove dust, a soft cloth carpeted floor mats. For soils, soil and gently rub toward the dampened with water can be used. always try to remove them first with center. Continue cleaning, using If a more thorough cleaning is plain water or club soda. Before a clean area of the cloth each necessary, a soft cloth dampened cleaning, gently remove as much of time it becomes soiled. with a mild soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry the soil as possible using one of the 4. Continue to gently rub the following techniques: naturally. Do not use heat, steam, soiled area. or spot lifters or spot removers, . For liquids: gently blot the 5. If the soil is not completely or shoe polish on leather. remaining soil with a paper removed, use a mild soap Many commercial leather cleaners towel. Allow the soil to absorb solution and repeat the cleaning and coatings that are sold to into the paper towel until no process with plain water. preserve and protect leather more can be removed. may permanently change the If any of the soil remains, a appearance and feel of the leather . For solid dry soils: remove as commercial fabric cleaner or spot and are not recommended. Do not much as possible and then lifter may be necessary. Test a small use silicone or wax-based products, vacuum. hidden area for colorfastness before or those containing organic solvents using a commercial upholstery to clean the vehicle's interior cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally because they can alter the cleaned area gives any impression appearance by increasing the that a ring formation may result, gloss in a non-uniform manner. clean the entire surface. Vehicle Care 9-117

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may Other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the dampened with water can be used. windshield and even make it difficult If a more thorough cleaning is to see through the windshield under necessary, a clean soft cloth certain conditions. dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust Care of Safety Belts and dirt. Never use spot lifters or Keep belts clean and dry. removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve { WARNING and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts. appearance and feel of the interior It may severely weaken them. In and are not recommended. Do not a crash, they might not be able to use silicone or wax-based products, provide adequate protection. or those containing organic solvents Clean safety belts only with mild to clean the vehicle's interior soap and lukewarm water. because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. 9-118 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES Service and Maintenance 10-1

General Information Please read the information under Service and Scheduled Maintenance. To keep Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals, the vehicle in good condition, checks, inspections, see your dealer/retailer. recommended fluids, and The maintenance schedule is for lubricants are necessary to keep General Information vehicles that: General Information ...... 10-1 this vehicle in good working condition. Damage caused by . Carry passengers and cargo Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled within recommended limits on Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-3 maintenance might not be the Tire and Loading Information covered by the vehicle warranty. label. See Vehicle Load Limits Recommended Fluids, on page 8‑12. Lubricants, and Parts Proper vehicle maintenance helps to . Recommended Fluids and keep the vehicle in good working Are driven on reasonable road Lubricants ...... 10-7 condition, improves fuel economy, surfaces within legal driving Maintenance Replacement and reduces vehicle emissions for limits. Parts ...... 10-9 better air quality. . Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel on Maintenance Records Because of all the different ways people use vehicles, maintenance page 8‑49. Maintenance Records ...... 10-11 needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. 10-2 Service and Maintenance

At your General Motors dealer/ Rotation of New Tires { WARNING retailer, you can be certain that you Tire rotation is not recommended if will receive the highest level of the vehicle has different size tires Performing maintenance work can service available. Your dealer/ be dangerous. Some jobs can on the front and rear wheels. If tire retailer has specially trained rotation is recommended for the cause serious injury. Perform service technicians, uses genuine maintenance work only if you vehicle, to maintain ride, handling, GM replacement parts, as well as, and performance of the vehicle, have the required know-how up to date tools and equipment to and the proper tools and it is important that the first rotation ensure fast and accurate service for new tires be performed equipment. If in doubt, see your diagnostics. when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km dealer/retailer to have a qualified The proper replacement parts, (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire technician do the work. See fluids, and lubricants to use are Rotation on page 9‑73. Doing Your Own Service Work on listed in Recommended Fluids and page 9‑4. Lubricants on page 10‑7 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 10‑9. We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer/retailer. Service and Maintenance 10-3

Scheduled If the engine oil life system is reset . Windshield wiper blade accidentally, service the vehicle inspection for wear, cracking, Maintenance within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since or contamination and windshield the last service. Reset the oil life and wiper blade cleaning, When the Change Engine Oil system whenever the oil is changed. if contaminated. See Exterior Soon Message Displays See Engine Oil Life System on Care on page 9‑110. Worn or damaged wiper blade Change engine oil and filter. page 9‑12. replacement. See Wiper Blade See Engine Oil on page 9 10. ‑ Every Engine Oil Change Replacement on page 9 33. An Emission Control Service. ‑ . Change engine oil and filter. . Tire inflation check. See Tire When the “Change Engine Oil See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. Pressure on page 9‑66. Soon” message displays, service is An Emission Control Service. required for the vehicle as soon as . Tire wear inspection. See Tire possible, within the next 1 000 km/ . Engine coolant level check. Inspection on page 9‑73. See Engine Coolant on 600 miles. If driving under the best . If tire rotation is recommended page 9 18. conditions, the engine oil life system ‑ for the vehicle, rotate tires. might not indicate the need for . Engine cooling system See Tire Rotation on page 9‑73. vehicle service for more than a year. inspection. Visual inspection of . Fluids visual leak check The engine oil and filter must be hoses, pipes, fittings, and (or every 12 months, whichever changed at least once a year and clamps and replacement, occurs first). A leak in any the oil life system must be reset. if needed. Your dealer/retailer has trained system must be repaired and service technicians who will perform . Windshield washer fluid level the fluid level checked. check. See Washer Fluid on this work and reset the system. . Engine air cleaner filter page 9 25. ‑ inspection. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15. 10-4 Service and Maintenance

. Brake system inspection Additional Required Services Once a Year (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). At Each Fuel Stop . See Starter Switch Check on page 9‑31. . Steering and suspension . Engine oil level check. See inspection. Visual inspection for Engine Oil on page 9‑10. . See Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System damaged, loose, or missing . Engine coolant level check. Check on page 9‑32. parts or signs of wear. See Engine Coolant on . . Body hinges and latches, key page 9‑18. See Ignition Transmission Lock Check on page 9‑32. lock cylinders, folding seat . Windshield washer fluid level hardware, and sunroof check. See Washer Fluid on . See Park Brake and P (Park) (if equipped) lubrication. See page 9‑25. Mechanism Check on Recommended Fluids and page 9‑32. Lubricants on page 10‑7. Once a Month . Exhaust system and nearby heat More frequent lubrication may . Tire inflation check. See Tire shields inspection for loose or be required when vehicle is Pressure on page 9‑66. damaged components. exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone . Tire wear inspection. See Tire . Accelerator pedal check for grease on weatherstrips with a Inspection on page 9‑73. damage, high effort, or binding. clean cloth makes them last Replace if needed. longer, seal better, and not stick . If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant or squeak. and Compressor Kit, check the . Restraint system component sealant expiration date printed check. See Safety System on the instruction label of the Check on page 2‑25. kit. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 9‑84. Service and Maintenance 10-5

First Engine Oil Change After . CTS-V only: Clutch hydraulic . CTS-V only: 6‐speed manual Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles system drain, flush, and refill. transmission fluid change (normal service). . Fuel system inspection for . CTS-V only: Brake hydraulic damage or leaks. system drain, flush, and refill . All-wheel-drive vehicles only: (severe service only) for vehicles Transfer case fluid change . Passenger compartment air used for high performance (severe service) for vehicles filter replacement (or every operation. mainly driven in heavy city 12 months, whichever occurs traffic in hot weather, in hilly or first). More frequent replacement First Engine Oil Change After mountainous terrain, when Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles may be required if vehicle is frequently towing a trailer, driven regularly under dusty . Engine air cleaner filter or used for taxi, police, conditions. replacement. See Engine Air or delivery service. During any . CTS-V only: 6‐speed manual Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15. maintenance, if a power washer transmission fluid change . Automatic transmission fluid is used to clean mud and dirt (severe service) for vehicles change (severe service) for from the underbody, care should mainly driven in heavy city traffic vehicles mainly driven in be taken to not directly spray in hot weather, in hilly or heavy city traffic in hot weather, the transfer case output seals. mountainous terrain, when in hilly or mountainous terrain, High pressure water can frequently towing a trailer, when frequently towing a overcome the seals and or used for taxi, police, trailer, or used for taxi, contaminate the transfer case or delivery service. police, or delivery service. fluid. Contaminated fluid will See Automatic Transmission decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced. Fluid on page 9‑13. 10-6 Service and Maintenance

. CTS-V only: Rear axle fluid High pressure water can . 6.2L supercharged V8 engine change (severe service only) for overcome the seals and only: Intercooler system drain, vehicles mainly driven in hilly or contaminate the transfer case flush, and refill, cooling system mountainous terrain, when fluid. Contaminated fluid will and cap pressure check, and frequently towing a trailer, used decrease the life of the transfer cleaning of outside of radiator for high speed or competitive case and should be replaced. and air conditioning condenser driving, or used for taxi, police, (or every 5 years, whichever or delivery service. See Rear . Spark plug replacement. occurs first). See Cooling Axle on page 9‑30. An Emission Control Service. System on page 9‑18. . CTS-V only: drive An Emission Control Service. First Engine Oil Change After belt inspection for fraying, Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles . Engine accessory drive belt excessive cracks, or obvious inspection for fraying, excessive . Automatic transmission fluid damage and replacement, cracks, or obvious damage change (normal service). if needed. and replacement, if needed. See Automatic Transmission An Emission Control Service. Fluid on page 9‑13. First Engine Oil Change After Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles . All-wheel-drive vehicles only: Transfer case fluid change . Engine cooling system drain, (normal service). During any flush, and refill, cooling system maintenance, if a power washer and cap pressure check, and is used to clean mud and dirt cleaning of outside of radiator from the underbody, care should and air conditioning condenser be taken to not directly spray (or every 5 years, whichever the transfer case output seals. occurs first). See Cooling System on page 9‑18. An Emission Control Service. Service and Maintenance 10-7

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Fluid/Lubricant The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard can be identified with the American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. However, Engine Oil not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM standard. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M. For the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on page 9‑10. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant. Engine Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, Hydraulic Power Steering System in Canada 89021186). DOT 4 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88958860, Hydraulic Clutch System in Canada 88901244). SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. U.S. 88862475, Manual Transmission (CTS) in Canada 88862476). 10-8 Service and Maintenance

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800, Manual Transmission (CTS-V) in Canada 88861801). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Rear Drive Module and Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861950, in Canada 88861951). (All-Wheel Drive) Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or Chassis Lubrication lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges in Canada 10953474). Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668, Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint in Canada 89021674). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Service and Maintenance 10-9

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3.0L V6 Engine 15875795 A3096C 3.6L V6 Engine 15875795 A3096C 6.2L V8 Engine 25898499 A3105C Engine Oil Filter 3.0L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129 3.6L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129 6.2L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48 Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130403 CF133 Spark Plugs 3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109 3.6L V6 Engine 12597464 41-990 6.2L V8 Engine 12571165 41-104 10-10 Service and Maintenance

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Wiper Blades — Except CTS-V Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in) 15890062 — Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in) 15890064 — Wiper Blades — CTS-V Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in) 20791461 — Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in) 20791462 — Service and Maintenance 10-11

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Reading 10-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Reading Service and Maintenance 10-13

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Reading 10-14 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Reading Technical Data 11-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 11-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications Label ...... 11-1 on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 11-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4 Identification Label This legal identifier is in the front This label, on the spare tire cover, corner of the instrument panel, on has the following information: the left side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN) the Vehicle Certification and Service . Model designation Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. . Paint information . Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 11-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 10‑7 for more information. Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System — Engine 3.0LV6 Engine 10.3 L 10.9 qt 3.6LV6 Engine 10.3 L 10.9 qt 6.2LV8 Engine 11.8 L 12.5 qt Cooling System — Intercooler, 6.2LV8 Engine 2.3 L 2.4 qt Engine Oil with Filter 3.0LV6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt 3.6LV6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt 6.2LV8 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt Technical Data 11-3

Capacities Application Metric English Fuel Tank 68.1 L 18.0 gal Transfer Case — AWD 1.0 L 1.1 qt Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 3.0LV6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic 6.3 L 6.7 qt 3.6LV6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic 6.3 L 6.7 qt 6.2LV8 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic 6.3 L 6.7 qt 3.0L, 3.6LV6 Engines, 6-Speed Manual 1.8 L 1.9 qt 6.2LV8 Engine, 6-Speed Manual 3.8 L 4.0 qt Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. 11-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Automatic 3.0LV6 Engine G 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Manual Automatic 3.6LV6 Engine V 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Manual Automatic 6.2LV8 Engine P 1.0 mm (0.040 in) Manual

Engine Drive Belt Routing

CTS 3.6L V6 Engine CTS-V 6.2L V8 Engine CTS 3.0L V6 Engine Customer Information 12-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Information Customer Reporting Safety Defects to Information the United States Government ...... 12-13 Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are Customer Satisfaction Government ...... 12-14 important to your dealer and to Procedure ...... 12-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns General Motors ...... 12-14 Customer Assistance with the sales transaction or the Offices ...... 12-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4 Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes, Online Owner Center ...... 12-4 however, despite the best intentions GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy ...... 12-15 Event Data Recorders ...... 12-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings Program ...... 12-5 ® can occur. If your concern has not Roadside Service ...... 12-6 OnStar ...... 12-16 Navigation System ...... 12-16 been resolved to your satisfaction, Scheduling Service the following steps should be taken: Appointments ...... 12-8 Radio Frequency Courtesy Transportation Identification (RFID) ...... 12-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Program ...... 12-8 Radio Frequency with a member of dealership Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10 Statement ...... 12-16 management. Normally, concerns Service Publications can be quickly resolved at that level. Ordering Information ...... 12-12 If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 12-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Cadillac, decision given in your case, you member of dealership management, remember that your concern will may reject it and proceed with any it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's other venue for relief available resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest to you. further help, in the United States, following Step One first. You may contact the BBB Auto call the Cadillac Customer STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Line Program using the toll-free Assistance Center, 24 hours a day, General Motors and your dealer are telephone number or write them at at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, call committed to making sure you are the following address: the Canadian Cadillac Customer completely satisfied with your new BBB Auto Line Program Communication Centre at vehicle. However, if you continue to 1-888-446-2000. Council of Better Business remain unsatisfied after following Bureaus, Inc. We encourage you to call the the procedure outlined in Steps One 4200 Wilson Boulevard toll-free number in order to give your and Two, you can file with the Better Suite 800 inquiry prompt attention. Have the Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Arlington, VA 22203-1838 following information available to Program to enforce your rights. give the Customer Assistance Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 The BBB Auto Line Program is an dr.bbb.org/goauto Representative: out of court program administered . Vehicle Identification Number by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all (VIN). This is available from the Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of vehicle registration or title, or the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by plate at the top left of the the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage and other instrument panel and visible Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves through the windshield. be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility dispute resolution program prior to limitations and/or discontinue its . Dealership name and location. filing a court action, use of the participation in this program. . Vehicle delivery date and program is free of charge and your present mileage. case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the Customer Information 12-3

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners): our impartial program offers Customer Assistance General Motors Participation in advantages over courts in most Offices the Mediation/Arbitration Program jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge. Cadillac encourages customers In the event that you do not feel For further information concerning to call the toll-free number for your concerns have been addressed assistance. However, if a customer after the following the procedure eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, outlined in Steps One and Two. the letter should be addressed to: General Motors of Canada Limited call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or wants you to be aware of its call the General Motors Customer United States — Customer participation in a no-charge Communication Centre, Assistance mediation/Arbitration program. 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to Cadillac Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Center has committed to binding arbitration the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following address: Cadillac Motor Car Division of owner disputes involving P.O. Box 33169 factory-related vehicle service Mediation/Arbitration Program Detroit, MI 48232-5169 claims. The program provides for c/o Customer Communication www.Cadillac.com the review of the facts involved by Centre an impartial third party arbiter, and General Motors of Canada Limited 1-800-458-8006 may include an informal hearing Mail Code: CA1–163–005 1-800-833-2622 (For Text before the arbiter. The program is 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Telephone devices (TTYs)) designed so that the entire dispute Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112 settlement process, from the time Your inquiry should be accompanied you file your complaint to the final by the Vehicle Identification decision, should be completed in Number (VIN). approximately 70 days. We believe 12-4 Customer Information

From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America and dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). 1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. 1-800-263-3830.) Virgin Islands) Customer From U.S. Virgin Islands: — Assistance Online Owner Center 1-800-496-9994 General Motors de Mexico, Online Owner Center (U.S.) — Canada — Customer S. de R.L. de C.V. www.gmownercenter.com/ Assistance Customer Assistance Center cadillac Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Lomas de Bezares Information and services Canadian Cadillac Customer C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. customized for your specific Communication Centre, vehicle — all in one convenient CA1-163-005 01-800-508-0000 place. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 . Digital owner manual, warranty Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 information, and more www.gmcanada.com Customer Assistance for . Online service and maintenance 1-888-446-2000 Text Telephone (TTY) records 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Users Telephone devices (TTYs)) . Find Cadillac dealers for service Roadside Assistance: To assist customers who are deaf, nationwide hard of hearing, or speech-impaired 1-800-882-1112 . and who use Text Telephones Exclusive privileges and offers Overseas — Customer (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment . Recall notices for your specific Assistance available at its Customer Assistance vehicle Center. Any TTY user can ® Please contact the local General . OnStar and GM Cardmember communicate with Cadillac by Motors Business Unit. Services Earnings summaries Customer Information 12-5

Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility and services you will have Cadillac — www.cadillac.com access to: Reimbursement Program Cadillac Merchandise — . www.cadillaccollection.com My Showroom: Find and save information on vehicles and Help Center — www.cadillac.com/ current offers in your area. helpcenter . My Dealers/Retailers: Save . FAQ details such as address and . Contact Us phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers/retailers. This program, available to qualified My GM Canada . My Driveway: Access quick links applicants for cost reimbursement (Canada) — www.gm.ca to parts and service estimates, of eligible aftermarket adaptive My GM Canada is a check trade-in values, equipment required for your password-protected section of or schedule a service vehicle, such as hand controls or www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the a wheelchair/scooter lift for the information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your vehicle. personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. For more information on the limited tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your offer visit gmmobility.com or call the profile and use tools and forms GM Mobility Assistance Center at with greater ease. 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within www.gm.ca. General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. 12-6 Customer Information

Roadside Service Coverage Cadillac Owner Privileges™ In the United States or Canada, call Services are provided up to 5 years/ . Emergency Fuel Delivery: 1-800-882-1112. 100,000 miles (160 000 km), Delivery of enough fuel for the whichever comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, service station. call 1-888-889-2438. In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Lock-Out Service: Service is Service is available 24 hours a day, person driving the vehicle without provided to unlock the vehicle if 365 days a year. permission from the owner is not you are locked out. A remote Calling for Assistance covered. unlock may be available if you have OnStar®. For security When calling Roadside Assistance, Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. reasons, the driver must present have the following information identification before this service ready: Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to is given. . Your name, home address, and make any changes or discontinue . Emergency Tow From a Public home telephone number the Roadside Assistance program at Road or Highway: Tow to the . Telephone number of your any time without notification. nearest Cadillac dealer for location Cadillac and General Motors of warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be . Location of the vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an driven. Assistance is also given . Model, year, color, and license owner or driver if they decide the when the vehicle is stuck in the plate number of the vehicle claims are made too often, or the sand, mud, or snow. . Odometer reading, Vehicle same type of claim is made many . Flat Tire Change: Service is Identification Number (VIN), and times. provided to change a flat tire delivery date of the vehicle with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good . Description of the problem condition and properly inflated. Customer Information 12-7

It is your responsibility for the Cadillac Technician Roadside Services Not Included in repair or replacement of the Service (U.S. only) Roadside Assistance tire if it is not covered by the warranty. Cadillac's exceptional Roadside . Impound towing caused by Service is more than an auto club or violation of any laws. . Battery Jump Start: Service is towing service. It provides every . Legal fines. provided to jump start a dead Cadillac owner in the United States battery. with the advantage of contacting . Mounting, dismounting or . Trip Routing Service: Detailed a Cadillac advisor and, where changing of snow tires, chains, maps of North America are available, a Cadillac trained dealer or other traction devices. provided when requested either technician who can provide on-site . Towing or services for vehicles with the most direct route or the service. driven on a non-public road or most scenic route. Additional A dealer technician will travel to highway. travel information is also your location within a 30 mile Services Specific to Canadian available. Allow three weeks radius of a participating Cadillac for delivery. dealership. If beyond this radius, we Purchased Vehicles . Trip Interruption Benefits and will arrange to have your car towed . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement Assistance: If your trip is to the nearest Cadillac dealership. is approximately $5 Canadian. interrupted due to a warranty Each technician travels with a Diesel fuel delivery may be failure, incidental expenses may specially equipped service vehicle restricted. Propane and other be reimbursed during the 5 year/ complete with the necessary fuels are not provided through 100,000 miles (160 000 km) Cadillac parts and tools required this service. to handle most roadside repairs. Powertrain warranty period. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle Items considered are hotel, registration is required. meals, and rental car. . Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year. 12-8 Customer Information

. Trip Interruption Benefits and Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Assistance: Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a Appointments Program copy of the repair orders are When your vehicle requires To enhance your ownership required. Once authorization has warranty service, contact your experience, we and our participating been received, the Roadside dealer/retailer and request an dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Assistance advisor will help you appointment. By scheduling a Transportation, a customer support make arrangements and explain service appointment and advising program for vehicles with the New how to receive payment. your service consultant of your Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base . Alternative Service: If transportation needs, your dealer/ Warranty Coverage period in assistance cannot be provided retailer can help minimize your Canada) and extended powertrain, right away, the Roadside inconvenience. and hybrid specific warranty in both Assistance advisor may give If your vehicle cannot be scheduled the U.S. and Canada. you permission to get local into the service department Several courtesy transportation emergency road service. You will immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist in receive payment, up to $100, can be scheduled for service, reducing your inconvenience when after sending the original unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required. receipt to Roadside Assistance. safety-related. If it is, please call Mechanical failures may be Courtesy Transportation is not a your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited covered, however any cost for know this, and ask for instructions. parts and labor for repairs not Warranty. A separate booklet covered by the warranty are the If the dealer/retailer requests you to entitled “Warranty and Owner owner responsibility. bring the vehicle for service, you are Assistance Information” furnished urged to do so as early in the work with each new vehicle provides day as possible to allow for the detailed warranty coverage same day repair. information. Customer Information 12-9

Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Reimbursement Warranty service can generally be Your dealer may arrange to provide completed while you wait. However, If your vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle or if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public reimburse you for a rental vehicle to minimize your inconvenience by transportation is used instead of the that you obtain if your vehicle is providing several transportation dealer's shuttle service, the expense kept for an overnight warranty options. Depending on the must be supported by original repair. Rental reimbursement will circumstances, your dealer can receipts and can only be up to the be limited and must be supported offer you one of the following: maximum amount allowed by GM by original receipts. This requires for shuttle service. In addition, for that you sign and complete a Shuttle Service U.S. customers, should you arrange rental agreement and meet state/ Shuttle service is the preferred transportation through a friend or provincial, local, and rental means of offering Courtesy relative, limited reimbursement for vehicle provider requirements. Transportation. Dealers may provide reasonable fuel expenses may be Requirements vary and may include you with shuttle service to get you available. Claim amounts should minimum age requirements, to your destination with minimal reflect actual costs and be insurance coverage, credit card, interruption of your daily schedule. supported by original receipts. etc. You are responsible for fuel This includes one-way or round trip See your dealer for information usage charges and may also be shuttle service within reasonable regarding the allowance amounts responsible for taxes, levies, usage time and distance parameters of the for reimbursement of fuel or other fees, excessive mileage, or rental dealer's area. transportation costs. usage beyond the completion of the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. 12-10 Customer Information

Additional Program Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts Information may also be used for repair. These If your vehicle is involved in a parts are typically removed from All program options, such as shuttle collision and it is damaged, have vehicles that were total losses in service, may not be available at the damage repaired by a qualified prior crashes. In most cases, the every dealer. Please contact your technician using the proper parts being recycled are from dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle. about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM Transportation arrangements will be repairs diminish your vehicle's part, may be an acceptable choice administered by appropriate dealer resale value, and safety to maintain your vehicle's originally personnel. performance can be compromised designed appearance and safety General Motors reserves the right in subsequent collisions. performance, however, the history of to unilaterally modify, change or Collision Parts these parts is not known. Such parts discontinue Courtesy Transportation are not covered by your GM New at any time and to resolve all Genuine GM Collision parts are new Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any questions of claim eligibility parts made with the same materials related failures are not covered by pursuant to the terms and and construction methods as the that warranty. parts with which your vehicle conditions described herein at its Aftermarket collision parts are also sole discretion. was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice available. These are made by to ensure that your vehicle's companies other than GM and designed appearance, durability, may not have been tested for your and safety are preserved. The use vehicle. As a result, these parts of Genuine GM parts can help may fit poorly, exhibit premature maintain your GM New Vehicle durability/corrosion problems, Warranty. and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Customer Information 12-11

Aftermarket parts are not covered Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs by your GM New Vehicle Limited reduced protection to your GM If there has been an injury, call Warranty, and any vehicle failure vehicle by limiting compensation emergency services for help. Do not related to such parts are not for damage repairs by using leave the scene of a crash until all covered by that warranty. aftermarket collision parts. Some matters have been taken care of. insurance companies will not Move the vehicle only if its position Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts. puts you in danger, or you are When purchasing insurance, we We recommend that you choose a instructed to move it by a police recommend that you assure your collision repair facility that meets officer. your needs before you ever need vehicle will be repaired with GM collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information may have a collision repair center If such insurance coverage is to police and other parties involved with GM-trained technicians and not available from your current in the crash. state of the art equipment, or be insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see to another insurance carrier. able to recommend a collision repair Roadside Service on page 12‑6. center that has GM-trained If your vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: technicians and comparable company may require you to have equipment. insurance that assures repairs with . Driver's name, address, phone Insuring Your Vehicle Genuine GM Original Equipment number Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver's license number Protect your investment in your GM Genuine Manufacturer replacement vehicle with comprehensive and parts. Read your lease carefully, as . Owner's name, address, phone collision insurance coverage. There you may be charged at the end of number are significant differences in the your lease for poor quality repairs. . Vehicle license plate quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. . Vehicle make, model and model year 12-12 Customer Information

. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications Number (VIN) recycled parts will not be covered by Ordering Information . Insurance company and policy your GM vehicle warranty. number Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals . General description of the but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis damage to the other vehicle Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on engines, your insurance company may transmission, axle, suspension, Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using that uses quality replacement parts. brakes, electrical, steering, aftermarket parts. Discuss this with body, etc. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this your repair professional, and insist section. on Genuine GM parts. Remember if Service Bulletins If the airbag has inflated, see What your vehicle is leased you may be Service Bulletins give additional Will You See After an Airbag obligated to have the vehicle technical service information Inflates? on page 2‑33. repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks. Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost. Repair Process Each bulletin contains instructions If another party's insurance to assist in the diagnosis and In the event that your vehicle company is paying for the repairs, service of your vehicle. requires damage repairs, GM you are not obligated to accept a recommends that you take an repair valuation based on that Owner Information active role in its repair. If you have insurance company's collision policy Owner publications are written a pre-determined repair facility of repair limits, as you have no specifically for owners and intended choice, take your vehicle there, contractual limits with that company. to provide basic operational or have it towed there. Specify to In such cases, you can have control information about the vehicle. the facility that any required of the repair and parts choices as The owner manual includes the replacement collision parts be long as cost stays within reasonable Maintenance Schedule for all original equipment parts, either limits. models. new Genuine GM parts or recycled Customer Information 12-13

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, ORDER TOLL FREE: Reporting Safety Owner Manual, and Warranty 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday Booklet. 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Defects RETAIL SELL PRICE: For Credit Card Orders Only $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Reporting Safety Defects Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web Without Portfolio: Owner to the United States at: helminc.com Manual only. Government Or you can write to: RETAIL SELL PRICE: If you believe that your vehicle $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee Helm, Incorporated has a defect which could cause P.O. Box 07130 a crash or could cause injury or Current and Past Model Order Detroit, MI 48207 Forms death, you should immediately Prices are subject to change inform the National Highway Technical Service Bulletins and without notice and without incurring Traffic Safety Administration Manuals are available for current obligation. Allow ample time for (NHTSA) in addition to notifying and past model GM vehicles. To delivery. request an order form, specify year General Motors. and model name of the vehicle. Note to Canadian Customers: All If NHTSA receives similar listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to complaints, it may open an make checks payable in U.S. funds. investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. 12-14 Customer Information

However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects become involved in individual to the Canadian to General Motors problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like To contact NHTSA, you may call If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a this, please notify General Motors. the Vehicle Safety Hotline safety defect, notify Transport Call 1-800-458-8006, or write: toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada immediately, in addition to Cadillac Customer Assistance (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to notifying General Motors of Center http://www.safecar.gov; or Canada Limited. Call them at Cadillac Motor Car Division write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to: P.O. Box 33169 Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5169 Road Safety Branch 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. In Canada, call 1 888 446 2000, 2780 Sheffield Road ‐ ‐ ‐ Washington D.C. 20590 or write: Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 You can also obtain other Canadian Cadillac Customer information about motor Communication Centre, vehicle safety from CA1-163-005 http://www.safecar.gov. General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Customer Information 12-15

Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded crash or near crash-like situations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial Your GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will recorded by the EDR under normal information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age, For example, your vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded. computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as control engine and transmission law enforcement, could combine performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely and deploy airbags in a crash and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: acquired during a crash if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation. braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR, data to help your dealer/retailer special equipment is required, and . technician service your vehicle. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is Some modules may also store data passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle about how you operate the vehicle, buckled/fastened manufacturer, other parties, such as such as rate of fuel consumption or . How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the average speed. These modules may pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the also retain the owner’s personal brake pedal information if they have access to preferences, such as radio pre-sets, the vehicle or the EDR. . How fast the vehicle was seat positions, and temperature traveling settings. 12-16 Customer Information

GM will not access this data or Navigation System Radio Frequency share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, If your vehicle has a navigation Statement if the vehicle is leased, with the system, use of the system may This vehicle has systems that consent of the lessee; in response result in the storage of destinations, operate on a radio frequency that to an official request of police or addresses, telephone numbers, and comply with Part 15 of the Federal similar government office; as part of other trip information. Refer to the Communications Commission (FCC) GM's defense of litigation through navigation system operating manual Rules and with RSS-210/211 of the discovery process; or, as for information on stored data and Industry and Science Canada. required by law. Data that GM for deletion instructions. Operation is subject to the following collects or receives may also be two conditions: used for GM research needs or may Radio Frequency be made available to others for Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause research purposes, where a need is interference. RFID technology is used in some shown and the data is not tied to a 2. The device must accept any specific vehicle or vehicle owner. vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including interference that may cause OnStar® system security, as well as in connection with conveniences undesired operation of the If your vehicle has OnStar and you such as key fobs for remote door device. subscribe to the OnStar services, locking/unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any of please refer to the OnStar Terms in-vehicle transmitters for garage these systems by other than an and Conditions for information on door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void data collection and use. See also GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment. OnStar® System on page 4‑59 in personal information or link with any this manual for more information. other GM system containing personal information. INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake Passenger Sensing System (ABS) ...... 8-33 Accessories and System ...... 2-35 Warning Light ...... 4-27 Modifications ...... 9-3 What Makes an Airbag Appearance Care Accessory Power ...... 8-19 Inflate? ...... 2-32 Exterior ...... 9-110 Adaptive Forward What Will You See After Interior ...... 9-114 Lighting (AFL) ...... 5-4 an Airbag Inflates? ...... 2-33 Ashtrays ...... 4-14 Add-On Electrical When Should an Airbag Audio Players ...... 6-16 Equipment ...... 8-60 Inflate? ...... 2-31 CD ...... 6-16 Adding Equipment to the Where Are the Airbags? ...... 2-29 MP3 ...... 6-23 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-40 Airbags Audio System AdjustmentS Adding Equipment to the Diversity Antenna System . . . .6-15 Thigh Support ...... 2-7 Vehicle ...... 2-40 Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . .6-27 Adjustments Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-22 Radio Reception ...... 6-15 Lumbar, Front Seats ...... 2-6 Readiness Light ...... 4-21 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-2 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 9-15 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Automatic Air Filter, Passenger Vehicles ...... 2-40 Door Locks ...... 1-15 Compartment ...... 7-6 System Check ...... 2-27 Automatic Transmission ...... 8-26 Air Vents ...... 7-6 Alarm System Fluid ...... 9-13 Airbag System Anti-Theft ...... 1-23 Manual Mode ...... 8-28 Check ...... 2-42 All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-32, 9-30 Shiftlock Control System How Does an Airbag AM-FM Radio ...... 6-9 Check ...... 9-32 Restrain? ...... 2-33 Anti-Theft Auxiliary Devices ...... 6-35 Alarm System ...... 1-23 Axle, Rear ...... 9-30 Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-48 i-2 INDEX

B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cargo Net ...... 3-4 Headlamps ...... 9-37 Cautions, Danger, and Battery ...... 9-29 High Intensity Discharge Warnings ...... iv Exterior Lighting Battery (HID) Lighting ...... 9-37 CD Saver ...... 5-7 License Plate Lamps . . .9-38, 9-39 DVD Player ...... 6-19 Jump Starting ...... 9-103 Buying New Tires ...... 9-75 CD Player ...... 6-16 Load Management ...... 5-6 Center Console Storage ...... 3-1 Power Protection ...... 5-7 Central Door Unlock System . . . 1-15 Voltage and Charging C Chains, Tire ...... 9-81 Messages ...... 4-37 Calibration ...... 4-11 Charging System Light ...... 4-23 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-33 California Check Bluetooth ...... 6-37 Fuel Requirements ...... 8-50 Engine Lamp ...... 4-23 Boost Gage ...... 4-18 Perchlorate Materials Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-32 Brakes ...... 9-26 Requirements ...... 9-3 Child Restraints Antilock ...... 8-33 Warning ...... 9-3 Infants and Young Assist ...... 8-37 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 8-46 Children ...... 2-45 Fluid ...... 9-27 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iv Lower Anchors and Parking ...... 8-34, 8-35 Capacities and Tethers for Children ...... 2-51 System Messages ...... 4-38 Specifications ...... 11-2 Older Children ...... 2-43 Braking ...... 8-4 Carbon Monoxide Securing ...... 2-57, 2-59 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 8-17 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-25 Systems ...... 2-47 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-39 Liftgate ...... 1-19 Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-49 Fog Lamps ...... 5-5, 9-37 Trunk ...... 1-17 Cigarette Lighter ...... 4-13 Halogen Bulbs ...... 9-37 Winter Driving ...... 8-10 Circuit Breakers ...... 9-41 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-34 Cargo Cover ...... 3-2 Management System ...... 3-3 INDEX i-3

Cleaning Courtesy Transportation Defensive Driving ...... 8-3 Exterior Care ...... 9-110 Program ...... 12-8 Delayed Locking ...... 1-15 Interior Care ...... 9-114 Covers Devices, Auxiliary ...... 6-35 Climate Control Systems Cargo ...... 3-2 Door Dual Automatic ...... 7-1 Engine ...... 9-9 Ajar Messages ...... 4-39 Clock ...... 4-12 Cruise Control ...... 8-41 Central Door Unlocking Cluster, IP ...... 4-15 Light ...... 4-31 System ...... 1-15 Clutch, Hydraulic ...... 9-14 Messages ...... 4-39 Delayed Locking ...... 1-15 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10 Cupholders ...... 3-1 Locks ...... 1-14 Compact Spare Tire ...... 9-102 Customer Assistance ...... 12-4 Power Locks ...... 1-15 Compass ...... 4-11 Offices ...... 12-3 Drive Systems Compass Messages ...... 4-39 Text Telephone (TTY) All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-32, 9-30 Competitive Driving ...... 8-8 Users ...... 12-4 Driver Information Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 8-40 Customer Information Center (DIC) ...... 4-31 Compressor Kit, Tire Service Publications Driving Sealant ...... 9-84 Ordering Information ...... 12-12 Better Fuel Economy ...... 8-2 Control of a Vehicle ...... 8-4 Customer Satisfaction Characteristics and Convenience Net ...... 3-6 Procedure ...... 12-1 Towing Tips ...... 8-54 Convex Mirrors ...... 1-26 Competitive ...... 8-8, 8-40 Coolant D Defensive ...... 8-3 Engine ...... 9-18 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10 Drunk ...... 8-3 Engine Temperature Gage . . . .4-20 Danger, Warnings, and Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-9 Engine Temperature Cautions ...... iv Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-9 Warning Light ...... 4-29 Data Recorders, Event ...... 12-15 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 8-12 Cooling System ...... 9-18 Daytime Running Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Engine Messages ...... 4-40 Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-3 i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont.) Engine (cont.) Event Data Recorders ...... 12-15 Off-Road Recovery ...... 8-6 Coolant ...... 9-18 Extender, Safety Belt ...... 2-25 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 8-12 Coolant Heater ...... 8-22 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 5-1 Winter ...... 8-10 Coolant Temperature Gage . . .4-20 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 5-2 Dual Automatic Climate Coolant Temperature Exterior Lighting Battery Control System ...... 7-1 Warning Light ...... 4-29 Saver ...... 5-7 DVD/CD Player ...... 6-19 Cooling System ...... 9-18 Cooling System Messages . . .4-40 F E Cover ...... 9-9 Filter Electrical Equipment, Drive Belt Routing ...... 11-4 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 9-15 Add-On ...... 8-60 Exhaust ...... 8-25 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Electrical System Oil Pressure Gage ...... 4-19 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 5-4 Engine Overheated Protection Flat Tire ...... 9-81 Compartment Operating Mode ...... 9-24 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 9-94 Fuse Block ...... 9-41, 9-45, 9-48 Overheating ...... 9-23 Fluid Fuses and Circuit Power Messages ...... 4-41 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-13 Breakers ...... 9-41 Pressure Light ...... 4-30 Brakes ...... 9-27 Overload ...... 9-40 Running While Parked ...... 8-25 Power Steering ...... 9-25 Rear Speed Limiter ...... 4-19 Washer ...... 9-25 Compartment Starting ...... 8-20 Fog Lamps Fuse Block ...... 9-51, 9-53, 9-55 Engine Oil Bulb Replacement ...... 5-5, 9-37 Engine Life System ...... 9-12 Light ...... 4-31 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 9-15 Messages ...... 4-40 Folding Mirrors ...... 1-27 Check and Service Engine Entry Lighting ...... 5-6 Soon Lamp ...... 4-23 Equipment, Towing ...... 8-59 Compartment Overview ...... 9-6 INDEX i-5

Front Seats G H Adjustment ...... 2-3 Gages Halogen Bulbs ...... 9-37 Heated and Ventilated ...... 2-9 Boost ...... 4-18 Hard Drive Device (HDD) ...... 6-27 Fuel ...... 8-49 Engine Coolant Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 5-4 Additives ...... 8-50 Temperature ...... 4-20 Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Economy Driving ...... 8-2 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 4-19 Active ...... 2-3 Filling a Portable Fuel Fuel ...... 4-17 Headlamps Container ...... 8-53 Odometer ...... 4-17 Adaptive Forward Filling the Tank ...... 8-52 Speedometer ...... 4-17 Lighting (AFL) ...... 5-4 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-50 Tachometer ...... 4-17 Aiming ...... 9-34 Gage ...... 4-17 Trip Odometer ...... 4-17 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-37 Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-50 Warning Lights and Daytime Running Recommended ...... 8-49 Indicators ...... 4-14 Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-3 Requirements, California . . . . .8-50 Garage Door Opener ...... 4-61 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 System Messages ...... 4-42 Programming ...... 4-61 High Intensity Discharge Fuses Gasoline (HID) Lighting ...... 9-37 Engine Specifications ...... 8-50 High-Beam On Light ...... 4-30 Compartment General Information High/Low Beam Changer ...... 5-2 Fuse Block ...... 9-41, 9-45, 9-48 Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1 Lamps On Reminder ...... 4-31 Fuses and Circuit Towing ...... 8-54 Washer ...... 4-10 Breakers ...... 9-41 Vehicle Care ...... 9-2 Heated and Ventilated Rear Glove Box ...... 3-1 Front Seats ...... 2-9 Compartment GM Mobility Reimbursement Heated Mirrors ...... 1-27 Fuse Block ...... 9-51, 9-53, 9-55 Program ...... 12-5 i-6 INDEX

Heater J Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-20 Engine Coolant ...... 8-22 LATCH System Jump Starting ...... 9-103 High-Beam On Light ...... 4-30 Replacing Parts After a High-Speed Operation ...... 9-67 Crash ...... 2-57 Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-9 K Latch, Lower Anchors and Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-9 Key and Lock Messages ...... 4-42 Tethers for Children ...... 2-51 Hood ...... 9-5 Keyless Entry Liftgate Horn ...... 4-7 Remote (RKE) System . . . 1-5, 1-7 Carbon Monoxide ...... 1-19 How to Wear Safety Belts Keyless Entry System ...... 1-4 Lighter, Cigarette ...... 4-13 Properly ...... 2-15 Keys ...... 1-2 Lighting Hydraulic Clutch ...... 9-14 Adaptive Forward ...... 5-4 L Entry ...... 5-6 I Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 9-60 Parade Dimming ...... 5-6 Ignition Positions ...... 8-18, 8-19 Lamp Messages ...... 4-44 Lights Ignition Transmission Lamps Airbag Readiness ...... 4-21 Lock Check ...... 9-32 Daytime Running (DRL) ...... 5-3 Antilock Brake System Illumination Control ...... 5-5 Exterior Controls ...... 5-1 (ABS) Warning ...... 4-27 Immobilizer ...... 1-24 Exterior Lamps Off Charging System ...... 4-23 Infants and Young Children, Reminder ...... 5-2 Cruise Control ...... 4-31 Restraints ...... 2-45 Exterior Lighting Battery Engine Coolant Instrument Cluster ...... 4-15 Saver ...... 5-7 Temperature Warning ...... 4-29 Instrument Panel ...... 5-5 License Plate ...... 9-38, 9-39 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 4-30 Storage Area ...... 3-1 Malfunction Indicator ...... 4-23 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Introduction ...... iii, 6-1 On Reminder ...... 4-31 Fog Lamps ...... 4-31 Reading ...... 5-5 High-Beam On ...... 4-30 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 5-2 INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.) M Messages (cont.) Safety Belt Reminders ...... 4-21 Fuel System ...... 4-42 Magnetic Ride Control ...... 8-40 Security ...... 4-30 Key and Lock ...... 4-42 Maintenance Tire Pressure ...... 4-29 Lamp ...... 4-44 Records ...... 10-11 Traction Control System Object Detection System . . . . .4-45 Maintenance Schedule (TCS)/StabiliTrak® ...... 4-28 Ride Control System ...... 4-45 Recommended Fluids and Up-Shift ...... 4-28 Service Vehicle ...... 4-48 Lubricants ...... 10-7 Limited-Slip Rear Axle ...... 8-41 Tire ...... 4-48 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-3 Locks Transmission ...... 4-49 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-23 Automatic Door ...... 1-15 Vehicle ...... 4-36 Manual Mode ...... 8-28 Central Door Unlocking Vehicle Speed ...... 4-50 Manual Transmission ...... 8-30 System ...... 1-15 Washer Fluid ...... 4-50 Fluid ...... 9-14 Delayed Locking ...... 1-15 Mirrors Messages Door ...... 1-14 Automatic Dimming Airbag System ...... 4-48 Lockout Protection ...... 1-16 Rearview ...... 1-27 Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 4-48 Power Door ...... 1-15 Convex ...... 1-26 Battery Voltage and Safety ...... 1-16 Folding ...... 1-27 Charging ...... 4-37 Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Heated ...... 1-27 Brake System ...... 4-38 Low-Profile Tires ...... 9-59 Power ...... 1-27 Compass ...... 4-39 Lower Anchors and Monitor System, Tire Door Ajar ...... 4-39 Tethers for Children Pressure ...... 9-68 Engine Cooling System ...... 4-40 (LATCH SYSTEM) ...... 2-51 MP3 ...... 6-23 Engine Oil ...... 4-40 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 2-6 Engine Power ...... 4-41 Front Seats ...... 2-6 i-8 INDEX

N Online Owner Center ...... 12-4 Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-35 OnStar® System ...... 4-59 Perchlorate Materials Navigation System Operation, Infotainment Requirements, California ...... 9-3 Vehicle Data Recording System ...... 6-2 Phone and Privacy ...... 12-16 Outlets Bluetooth ...... 6-37 Net Power ...... 4-12 Power Cargo ...... 3-4 Overheated Engine Door Locks ...... 1-15 Net, Convenience ...... 3-6 Protection Operating Mode . . . 9-24 Mirrors ...... 1-27 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 8-17 Overheating, Engine ...... 9-23 Protection, Battery ...... 5-7 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-19 O Seat Adjustment ...... 2-4 Object Detection System P Parade Dimming ...... 5-6 Steering Fluid ...... 9-25 Messages ...... 4-45 Park Windows ...... 1-28 Odometer ...... 4-17 Shifting Into ...... 8-22 Power Outlets ...... 4-12 Trip ...... 4-17 Shifting Out of ...... 8-23 Pregnancy, Off-Road Parking ...... 8-24 Using Safety Belts ...... 2-25 Recovery ...... 8-6 Assist, Ultrasonic ...... 8-44 Privacy Oil Brake ...... 8-34, 8-35 Radio Frequency Engine ...... 9-10 Brake and P (Park) Identification (RFID) ...... 12-16 Engine Oil Life System ...... 9-12 Mechanism Check ...... 9-32 Program Engine Oil Pressure Gage . . . .4-19 Over Things That Burn ...... 8-24 Courtesy Transportation ...... 12-8 Messages ...... 4-40 Passenger Airbag Status Proposition 65 Warning, Pressure Light ...... 4-30 Indicator ...... 4-22 California ...... 9-3 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-43 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...... 7-6 INDEX i-9

R Reimbursement Program, Roadside Service ...... 12-6 GM Mobility ...... 12-5 Roof Radio Frequency Remote Keyless Sunroof ...... 1-31 Identification (RFID) ...... 12-16 Entry (RKE) Roof Rack System ...... 3-6 Statement ...... 12-16 System ...... 1-4, 1-5, 1-7 Rotation, Tires ...... 9-73 Radios Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-12 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4 AM-FM Radio ...... 6-9 Replacement Bulbs ...... 9-39 Running the Vehicle While CD/DVD Player ...... 6-19 Replacement Parts Parked ...... 8-25 Reception ...... 6-15 Airbags ...... 2-42 Satellite ...... 6-11 Maintenance ...... 10-9 Reading Lamps ...... 5-5 S Replacing Airbag System ...... 2-42 Rear Axle ...... 9-30 Safety Belts ...... 2-11 Replacing LATCH System Limited-Slip ...... 8-41 Care ...... 2-26 Parts After a Crash ...... 2-57 Rear Seats ...... 2-10 Extender ...... 2-25 Replacing Safety Belt Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-46 How to Wear Safety Belts System Parts After a Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-9 Properly ...... 2-15 Crash ...... 2-26 Rearview Mirrors Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-20 Reporting Safety Defects Automatic Dimming ...... 1-27 Reminders ...... 4-21 Canadian Government ...... 12-14 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-7 Replacing After a Crash ...... 2-26 General Motors ...... 12-14 Recommended Fluids and Use During Pregnancy ...... 2-25 U.S. Government ...... 12-13 Lubricants ...... 10-7 Safety Defects Reporting Retained Accessory Recommended Fuel ...... 8-49 Canadian Government ...... 12-14 Power (RAP) ...... 8-19 Records General Motors ...... 12-14 Ride Control Systems Maintenance ...... 10-11 U.S. Government ...... 12-13 Limited Slip Rear Axle ...... 8-41 Recreational Vehicle Safety Locks ...... 1-16 Magnetic ...... 8-40 Towing ...... 9-108 Messages ...... 4-45 i-10 INDEX

Safety System Check ...... 2-25 Service (cont.) Steering ...... 8-5 Satellite Radio ...... 6-11 Maintenance, General Fluid, Power ...... 9-25 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-3 Information ...... 10-1 Wheel Adjustment ...... 4-6 Scheduling Appointments ...... 12-8 Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1 Wheel Controls ...... 4-7 Sealant Kit, Tire ...... 9-84 Publications Ordering Storage Areas Seats Information ...... 12-12 Cargo Cover ...... 3-2 Adjustment, Front ...... 2-3 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8 Cargo Management System . . . 3-3 Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Vehicle Messages ...... 4-48 Center Console ...... 3-1 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 2-9 Servicing the Convenience Net ...... 3-6 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-6 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-40 Glove Box ...... 3-1 Power Adjustment, Front ...... 2-4 Shifting Instrument Panel ...... 3-1 Rear ...... 2-10 Into Park ...... 8-22 Roof Rack System ...... 3-6 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-7 Out of Park ...... 8-23 Storing the Tire Securing Child Signals, Turn and Sealant and Restraints ...... 2-57, 2-59 Lane-Change ...... 5-4 Compressor Kit ...... 9-92, 9-93 Security Spare Tire Stuck Vehicle ...... 8-12 Light ...... 4-30 Compact ...... 9-102 Sun Visors ...... 1-31 Vehicle ...... 1-23 Specifications and Sunroof ...... 1-31 Service Capacities ...... 11-2 Symbols ...... iv Accessories and Speed Limiter, Engine ...... 4-19 System Modifications ...... 9-3 Speedometer ...... 4-17 Roof Rack ...... 3-6 Doing Your Own Work ...... 9-4 StabiliTrak System ...... 8-38 System Check Engine Soon Lamp ...... 4-23 Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 1-12 Automatic Transmission Maintenance Records ...... 10-11 Starter Switch Check ...... 9-31 Shiftlock Control ...... 9-32 Starting the Engine ...... 8-20 INDEX i-11

T Tires (cont.) Towing (cont.) Rotation ...... 9-73 Trailer ...... 8-58, 8-59 Tachometer ...... 4-17 Sealant and Vehicle ...... 9-108 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4 Compressor Kit ...... 9-84 Traction Theft-Deterrent Sealant and Control System (TCS) ...... 8-37 Systems ...... 1-24, 1-25 Compressor Kit, Control System (TCS)/ Immobilizer ...... 1-24 Storing ...... 9-92, 9-93 StabiliTrak® Light ...... 4-28 Thigh Support Adjustment ...... 2-7 Sidewall Labeling ...... 9-60 Limited-Slip Rear Axle ...... 8-41 Time ...... 4-12 Terminology and Trailer Towing ...... 8-58, 8-59 Tires Definitions ...... 9-63 Transmission Buying New Tires ...... 9-75 Uniform Tire Quality Automatic ...... 8-26 Chains ...... 9-81 Grading ...... 9-78 Fluid, Automatic ...... 9-13 Changing ...... 9-94 Wheel Alignment and Fluid, Manual ...... 9-14 Compact Spare ...... 9-102 Tire Balance ...... 9-79 Messages ...... 4-49 Designations ...... 9-62 Wheel Replacement ...... 9-80 Transportation Program, Different Size ...... 9-77 When It Is Time for Courtesy ...... 12-8 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 9-81 New Tires ...... 9-74 Trip Odometer ...... 4-17 Inflation Monitor System ...... 9-69 Winter ...... 9-59 Trunk ...... 1-17 Inspection ...... 9-73 Towing Turn and Lane-Change Low Profile ...... 9-59 Driving Characteristics ...... 8-54 Signals ...... 5-4 Messages ...... 4-48 Equipment ...... 8-59 Pressure ...... 9-67 General Information ...... 8-54 Pressure Light ...... 4-29 Recreational Vehicle ...... 9-108 Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-68 i-12 INDEX

U Vehicle Care Wheels Storing the Tire Alignment and Tire Ultrasonic Parking Assist ...... 8-44 Sealant and Balance ...... 9-79 Uniform Tire Quality Compressor Kit ...... 9-92, 9-93 Different Size ...... 9-77 Grading ...... 9-78 Tire Pressure ...... 9-66 Replacement ...... 9-80 Universal Remote System . . . . . 4-61 Vehicle Identification When It Is Time for Operation ...... 4-65 Number (VIN) ...... 11-1 New Tires ...... 9-74 Programming ...... 4-61 Service Parts Where to Put the Child Up-Shift Light ...... 4-28 Identification Label ...... 11-1 Restraint ...... 2-49 Using this Manual ...... iv Ventilation, Air ...... 7-6 Windows ...... 1-28 Visors ...... 1-31 Power ...... 1-28 V Windshield Vehicle Wiper/Washer ...... 4-8 Canadian Owners ...... iv W Warning Lights, Gages, and Winter Driving ...... 8-10 Control ...... 8-4 Indicators ...... 4-14 Winter Tires ...... 9-59 Load Limits ...... 8-12 Warnings ...... iv Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-33 Messages ...... 4-36 Cautions and Danger ...... iv Wipers Personalization ...... 4-51 Hazard Flashers ...... 5-4 Rear Washer ...... 4-9 Remote Start ...... 1-12 Washer Fluid ...... 9-25 Security ...... 1-23 Washer Fluid Messages ...... 4-50 Speed Messages ...... 4-50 Washer, Headlamps ...... 4-10 Towing ...... 9-108